i 


m 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 

GIFT  OF 


Sift  U.C.  Library 


[by  authority.] 

INFANTRY  TACTICS, 


FOE   THE 


INSTRUCTION,  EXERCISE,  AND  MANffiTJVRES 


THB    SOLDI^E,  A    COMPAN^Y,    LINE    OF    BKIRMISHEKS, 
BATTALION,    BEIGADK, 


CORPS    d'arme: 


BRIG.-GEN.  SILAS  CASEY, 


A^ol.  II. 
School  of  the  Battalwil 


NEW  YORK: 

D.  YAN  NOSTRAXD,  192  BROADWAY. 

1862. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1862, 

By  D.  van  NOSTEAND, 

In  the  Clerk's  Oflice  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States, 

for  the  Southern  District  of  New  York, 


\ho     . 

i^ 

Q^tJaL 

\;.% 

•5. 
t 

ABBREVIATIONS. 

8.  8. 

Will  Btand  for  School  of  the  Soldier, 

L 

&  a 

"        11        w    School  of  the  Company. 

p^ 

>      &  B. 

*        "       "    School  of  the  Battalion. 

o 

KB. 

"        "       "    Evolutions  of  a  Brigade. 

Paragraphs  marked  0  ^^e  suspended,  and  ■will  not 
bo  taught. 

CHANGES. 

Paragraphs  94  and  95,  S.  B.,  will  be  apphcable  to 
any  skirmishers  from  the  battahon,  the  duties  indi- 
eaied  for  the  junior  major  can  be  assigned  to  any  other 
officer  by  the  colonel.  In  paragraph  95  the  words, 
"  as  indicated  Nos.  84  and  86"  will  be  omitted. 

Paragraph  156,  S.  B.,  will  be  apphcable  to  any 
skirmishers  from  the  battahon. 

Paragraph  158,  S.  B.,  will  read  as  foUowa:  "wiD 
serve  equally  for  two,  three,  or  five  divisions." 

Paragraph  342  wiU  be  apphcable  to  any  skirmishers, 
omitting  after  "  Xo.  95." 

Paragraph  364,  S.  B.,  wiU  be  apphcable  to  any 
skirmishers. 

Paragraphs  785  and  786,  S.  B.,  will  be  apphcable  to 
a^y  skirmishers  from  the  battahon. 

Paragraph  787,  S.  B.,  the  latter  part  will  read  as 
foUows :  "  They  will  take  their  proper  places  in  the 
Hne,  under  the  direction  of  the  colonel." 

Paragraphs  802,  803,  and  804,  S.  B.,  will  be  appli- 
j  cable  to  any  skirmishers  from  the  battalion. 

Paragraphs  901  and  902,  S.  B.,  are  applicable  tc 
^Y  skirmishers  from  the  battalionj  omit  tiie  last  sen 

ice  of  902.        iL  ^  <^f   Cj 


A.dd  the  following  remarks  to  paragraph  910,  S.  B.: 
'If  there  are  ten  companies  present,  the  first,  third, 
^d  fifth,  should  be  behind  the  second,  fourth,  and 
gixth,  and  the  tenth  and  eighth  should  be  behind  the 
ninth  and  seventh.  If  there  are  nine  companies,  the 
ninth  will  be  considered  a  division  column." 

Paragraph  912,  S.  B.,  add:  "The  same  remark  wiD 
apply  to  nine  or  to  seven  companies." 

Paragraph  928,  S.  B.,  add  as  follows:  "When  more 
tJian  eight  companies  are  present,  at  the  second  com- 
mand, the  fifth  company  will  face  to  the  right,  the 
sixth  will  stand  fast.  At  the  command  March,  the 
fifth  will  take  its  place  on  the  right  of,  and  on  a  line 
with  the  sixth." 

Paragraph  934,  S.  B.,  add  the  following:  ""WTien 
more  than  eight  companies  are  present,  at  the  second 
command,  the  sixth  wiU  stand  fast,  and  the  fifth  will 
fiace  to  the  left." 

Paragraph  936,  S.  B.,  add  as  follows:  ""When  more 
than  eight  companies  are  present,  the  sixth  company 
will  stand  fast,  and  the  fifth  will  take  its  place  in  its 
rear." 

On  the  second  lines  of  paragraphs  1041,  S.  B.,  and 
1045,  S.  B.,  for  "  last  division"  read  "  next  to  the  last 
division." 

Paragraph  1089,  S.  B.,  the  latter  clause  will  read  as 
fcdlows:  "and  take  their  proper  distances." 

Paragraphs  1196,  1197,  1198,  and  1199,  S.  B.,  ace 
i^phcable  to  any  skirmishers  from  the  battahon. 


INFANTRY    TACTICS 


TITLE  V. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 
Formation  of  the  battalion. 

1.  Evert  colonel  will  labor  to  habituate  hia 
battalion  to  form  line  of  battle,  by  night  as  well 
as  by  day,  with  the  greatest  possible  prompti- 
tude. 

2.  The  color-company  will  generally  be  desig- 
nated as  the  directing  company.  That,  as  soon 
as  formed,  will  be  placed  on  the  direction  the 
colonel  may  have  determined  for  the  line  of  bat- 
tle. The  other  hattulion  companies  will  form  on 
it,  to  the  right  and  left,  on  the  principles  of  suc- 
cessive formations,  which  will  be  herein  pre- 
scribed. 

0-3.  The  companies  of  slcirmi^Tiers  will  be  formed 
in  rear  of  the  battalion,  and  in  the  position  pre- 
scribed, Ko.  9,  Title  I. 

4.  The  color-bearer   may  have   received  the 
color  from  the  hands  of  the  colonel ;  but  if  there 
be  daylight,  and  time,  the  color  will  be  produced 
with  due  solemnity. 
1* 


6  ESCORT    OF    COLOE. 

COMPOSITION  AND  MARCH  OF  THE  OOLOE-ESOOET. 

5.  When  tlie  battalion  turns  out  under  arms, 
and  the  color  is  wanted,  a  battalion  company, 
other  than  that  of  the  color,  will  be  put  in  march 
to  receive  and  escort  it. 

6.  The  march  will  be  in  the  following  order, 
in  quick  time,  and  without  music ;  the  field  mu- 
sic, followed  by  the  band  ;  the  escort  in  coluinn 
by  platoon,  right  in  front,  with  arras  on  the  right 
shoulder,  and  the  color-bearer  between  the  pla- 
toons. 

7.  Arrived  in  fi*ont  of  the  tent  or  quarters  of 
the  colonel,  the  escort  will  form  line,  the  field 
music  and  band  on  the  right,  and  arms  will  be 
brought  to  a  shoulder. 

8.  The  moment  the  escort  is  in  line,  the  color- 
bearer,  preceded  by  the  first  lieutenant,  and  fol- 
lowed by  a  sergeant  of  the  escort,  will  go  to 
receive  the  color. 

9.  When  the  color-bearer  shall  come  out,  fol- 
lowed by  the  lieutenant  and  sergeant,  he  will 
halt  before  the  entrance  ;  the  escort  will  present 
arms,  and  the  field  music  will  sound  to  the  color. 

10.  After  some  twenty  seconds,  the  captain 
will  cause  the  sound  to  cease,  arms  to  be  shoul- 
dered, and  then  break  by  platoon  into  column ; 
the  color-bearer  will  place  himself  between  the 
platoons,  and  the  lieutenant  and  sergeant  will 
resume  their  posts. 

11.  The  escort  will  march  back  to  the  battalion 
to  the  sound  of  music  in  quick  time,  and  in  the 
same  order  as  above,  the  guide  on  the  right. 
TTie  march  will  be  so  conducted  that  when  the 


ESCOET    OF    COLOR.  T 

escort  arrives  at  one  hundred  and  fiftj  paces  in 
front  of  the  right  of  the  battalion,  the  direction 
of  the  march  will  be  parallel  to  its  front,  and 
when  the  color  arrives  nearly  opposite  its  place 
in  line,  the  column  will  change  direction  to  the 
left,  and  the  right  guide  will  direct  himself  on 
the  centre  of  the  battalion. 

nONOES    PAID    TO    THE    COLOE. 

12.  Arrived  at  the  distance  of  twenty  paces 
from  the  battalion,  the  escort  will  halt,  and  the 
music  cease ;  the  colonel  will  place  himself  sis 
paces  before  the  centre  of  the  battalion,  the  color- 
bearer  will  approach  the  colonel,  by  the  front,  in 
quick  time ;  when  at  the  distance  of  ten  paces, 
he  will  halt :  the  colonel  will  cause  arms  to  be 
presented,  and  to  the  color  to  be  sounded,  which 
being  executed,  the  color-bearer  will  take  his 
place  in  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard,  and 
the  battalion,  by  command,  shoulder  arms. 

13.  The  escort,  field  music,  and  band,  will  rC' 
turn  in  quick  time  to  their  several  places  in  line 
of  battle,  marching  by  the  rear  of  the  battalion. 

14.  The  color  will  be  escorted  back  to  the  col- 
onel's tent  or  quarters,  by  the  color-company,  for 
which  purpose  the  captain  of  that  company,  on 
an  intimation  from  the  colonel,  will  march  his 
company  six  paces  to  the  front,  and  wheel  it  by 
platoon  to  the  right.  The  color-bearer  will  take 
his  place  between  the  platoons. 

15.  The  escort  will  be  marched  parallel  to  the 
battalion,  and  at  six  paces  from  the  line,  the 
guide  right,  arms  shouldered,  the  music  playing, 


8  ESOOET    OF    COLOE. 

and  in  the  order  prescribed  iSTo.  6.  The  colonel 
will  cause  the  battalion  to  present  arms  when 
the  escort  commences  its  march,  and  when  it  ar- 
rives opposite  the  right  flank  of  the  battalion  he 
will  cause  arms  to  be  shouldered. 

16.  As  soon  as  the  color-bearer  has  passed  the 
right  flank  of  the  battalion,  the  escort  will  be 
directed  to  the  place  of  deposit  for  the  color,  and 
in  the  same  order  as  above. 

17.  Arrived  in  front  of  the  tent  or  quarters, 
the  escort  will  be  halted,  and  wheeled  into  line, 
the  field  music  and  band  on  the  right.  The  mo- 
ment the  escort  is  in  line,  the  first  lieutenant  and 
a  sergeant,  designated  for  the  purpose,  will  take 
a  position  faced  to  the  front,  six  paces  in  advance 
of  the  centre  of  the  escort,  the  lieutenant  on  the 
right,  and  at  a  distance  of  three  paces  from  the 
sergeant,  and  the  color-bearer  will  take  his  place 
between  them,  and  abreast  of  the  centre  of  the 
company,  facing  in  the  same  direction.  The  mu- 
sic will  then  sound  to  the  color,  and  arms  pre- 
sented. After  about  twenty  seconds  the  music 
will  cease,  arms  will  be  shouldered,  the  first  lieu- 
tenant, color-bearer,  and  sergeant,  will  face  to 
the  right,  and  marching  in  this  order  wiU  conduct 
the  color  to  its  place  of  deposit. 

18.  When  the  color  bearer  and  sergeant  shall 
have  resumed  their  proper  places  in  the  ranks, 
the  escort  will  be  wheeled  by  platoon  to  the 
right,  and  marched  to  the  parade  ground  in  the 
order  prescribed  No.  6. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION.  9 

General  rviles  and  division  of  the  school  of  the 
Battalion. 

19.  This  scliool  has  for  its  object  the  instrno- 
tion  of  battalions  singly,  and  thus  to  prepare 
them  for  manoeuvres  in  line.  The  harmony  so 
indispensable  in  the  movements  of  many  battal- 
ions, can  only  be  attained  by  the  use  of  the  same 
commands,  the  same  principles,  and  the  same 
means  of  execution.  Hence,  all  colonels  and  ac- 
tual commanders  of  battalions  Avill  conform  them- 
selves, -without  addition  or  curtailment,  to  what 
will  herein  be  prescribed, 

20.  When  a  battalion  instructed  in  this  drill 
shall  manoeuvre  in  a  brigade,  the  colonel  will 
regulate  its  movements  as  prescribed  in  the 
third  volume  of  these  Tactics. 

21.  The  school  of  the  battalion  will  be  divided 
into  five  parts. 

22.  The  first  will  compreliend  opening  and 
closing  ranks,  and  the  execution  of  the  different 
fires. 

23.  The  second,  the  different  modes  of  passing 
from  the  order  in  battle,  to  the  order  in  column. 

24.  The  third,  the  march  in  column,  and  the 
other  movements  incident  thereto. 

25.  The  fourth,  the  different  modes  of  passing 
from  the  order  in  column  to  the  order  in  battle. 

26.  The  fifth  will  comprehend  the  march  in 
line  of  battle,  in  advance  and  in  retreat ;  the  pas- 
sage of  defiles  in  retreat ;  the  march  by  the  flank; 
the  formation  by  file  into  line  of  battle;  the 
change  of  front ;  the  column  doubled  on  the  cen- 
tre ;  the  formation  of  division  columns ;  disposi- 
tions against  cavalry ;  the  rally  of  skirmishers  on 


10  SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    I. 

the  battalion,  and  their  disposition  in  the  column 
about  to  form  square ;  the  rally,  and  rules  for 
manoeuvring  by  the  rear  rank. 


PART  FIRST. 

OPKNnrQ   AND     CLOSING     EANKS,    AND   THE   EXECU- 
TION   OF    THE    DIFFEEENT   FIEE8. 

Aeticle  I. 
To  open  and  to  close  ranks. 

27.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  ranks  to  be 
opened,  will  command : 

1.  Prepare  to  open  ranlcs. 

28.  At  this  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel 
and  senior  major  will  place  themselves  on  the 
right  of  the  battalion,  the  first  on  the  flank  of  the 
file  closers,  and  the  second  four  paces  from  the 
front  rank  of  the  battalion. 

29.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

2,  To  the  rear^  open  order.     3.  Kaech« 

30.  At  the  second  command,  the  covering  ser- 
geants, and  tlie  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  batta- 
lion, will  place  themselves  four  paces  in  rear  of 
the  front  rank,  and  opposite  their  places  in  line 
of  battle,  in  order  to  mark  the  new  alignment  of 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART   I.  11 

the  rear  rank ;  thej  will  be  aligned  by  the  senior 
major  on  the  left  sergeant  of  the  battalion,  who 
wiU  be  careful  to  place  himself  exactly  four  paces 
in  rear  of  the  front  rank,  and  to  hold  his  piece 
between  the  eyes,  erect  and  inverted,  the  better 
to  indicate  to  the  senior  major  the  direction  to 
be  given  to  the  covering  sergeants. 

31.  At  the  command  march.,  the  rear  rank  and 
the  file  closers  will  step  to  the  rear  without  count- 
ing steps;  the  men  will  pass  a  little  in  rear  of  the 
line  traced  for  this  rank,  halt,  and  dress  forward 
on  the  covering  sergeants,  who  will  align  correctly 
the  men  of  their  respective  companies. 

32.  The  file  closers  will  fall  back  and  preserve 
the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank, 
glancing  eyes  to  the  right ;  the  lieutenant-colonel 
will,  from  the  right,  align  them  on  the  file  closer 
of  the  left,  who,  having  placed  himself  accurately 
two  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  will  invert  his  piece, 
and  hold  it  up  erect  between  his  eyes,  the  better 
to  be  seen  by  the  lieutenant-colonel. 

33.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will 
command : 

4.  Feont. 

At  this  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel,  senior 
major  and  the  left  sergeant,  will  retake  their  places 
in  line  of  battle. 

34.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  ranks  to  be 
closed  by  the  commands  prescribed  for  the  in- 
eiructor  in  the  S.  (7.,  No.  28. 


12  SCHOOL    or    THE    BATTALION PABT    I. 

Aeticle  II. 

Manual  of  arms. 

35.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  colonel  will 
cause  the  following  times  and  pauses  to  be  exe- 
cuted : 

Present  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Order  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Support  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Fix  hayonets.  Shoulder  arms. 

Charge  hayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Unfix  Ijayonet.  Shoulder  arms, 

0-36.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  wiU  not 
generally  execute  the  manual  of  arms  or  open 
ranks  \rith  the  battalion  companies,  but  for 
purposes  of  instruction  in  those  movements,  the 
colonel  TviU  sometimes  cause  them  to  take  post 
on  the  right  of  the  battalion.  The  junior  major 
wiU  in  this  case,  place  himself  twelve  paces  in 
rear  of  the  file  closers,  and  opposite  the  centre 
of  the  companies  of  skirmishers. 

Aeticle  m. 

Loading  at  -will,  and  the  firings. 

37.  The  colonel  will  next  cause  to  be  executed 
loading  at  will,  by  the  commands  prescribed  in 
the  S.  C.^  Iso.  45 ;  the  officers  and  sergeants  in 
the  ranks  wiU  half  face  to  the  right  with  the 
men  at  the  eighth  time  of  loading,  and  will  face 
to  the  front  when  the  men  next  to  them  come  to 
a  shoulder. 


8CH00-L    OF   THE   BATTALION PAET    I.  18 

38.  The  colonel  will  canse  to  be  executed  the 
fire  bv  company,  the  fire  by  wing,  the  fire  by 
battalion,  the  fire  by  file,  and  the  fire  by  rank, 
by  the  commands  to  be  herein  indicated. 

39.  The  fire  by  company  and  the  fire  by  file 
will  always  be  direct;  the  fire  by  battalion,  the 
fire  by  wing,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  may  be  either 
direct  or  oblique. 

40.  When  the  fire  ought  to  be  oblique,  the 
colonel  will  give,  at  every  round,  the  caution 
right  (or  left)  ohlique^  between  the  commands 
ready  and  aim. 

41.  The  fire  by  company  will  be  executed  alter- 
nately by  the  right  and  left  companies  of  each 
division,  as  if  the  division  were  alone.  The  right 
company  will  fire  first;  the  captain  of  the  left 
will  not  give  his  first  command  till  he  shall  see 
one  or  two  pieces  at  a  ready  in  the  right  com- 
pany; the  captain  of  the  latter,  after  the  first 
discharge,  will  observe  the  same  rule  in  respect 
to  the  left  company ;  and  the  fire  will  thus  bo 
continued  alternately. 

42.  The  colonel  will  observe  the  same  rule  in 
the  firing  by  wing. 

43.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  in  all  the 
companies  at  once,  and  will  be  executed  as  has 
been  prescribed  in  the  S.  (7.,  No.  55  and  follow- 
ing. The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by 
each  rank  alternately,  as  has  been  prescribed  in 
the  S.  C,  No.  58,  and  following. 

44.  The  color-guard  will  not  fire,  but  reserve 
itself  for  the  defence  of  the  color. 

VOL.  n.— 2 


14  SCHOOL    OF  THE    BATTALION PAET    I. 

THE    FIEE   BY    COMPANY. 

45.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  fire  by  companj 
to  be  executed,  will  command : 

1.  Fire  ly  company.    2.   Commence  firing 

46.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  and 
covering  sergeants  will  take  the  positions  indi- 
cated in  the  S.  6'.,  Iso.  49, 

47.  The  color  and  its  guard  will  step  back  at 
the  same  time,  so  as  to  bring  the  front  rank  of  the 
guard  in  a  line  with  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion. 
T%is  rule  is  general  for  all  the  different  firings. 

48.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd-numbered 
companies  will  commence  to  fire ;  their  captains 
will  each  give  the  commands  prescribed  in  the 
S.  (7.,  !N"o.  50,  observing  to  precede  the  command 
company  by  that  of  Jirst,  third,  fifth,  or  seventh^ 
according  to  the  number  of  each. 

49.  The  captains  of  the  even-numbered  com- 
panies will  give,  in  their  turn,  the  same  com- 
mands, observing  to  precede  them  by  the  number 
of  their  respective  companies. 

50.  In  order  that  the  odd-numbered  compa- 
nies may  not  all  fire  at  once,  their  captains  will 
observe,  but  only  for  the  first  discharge,  to  give 
the  command  fire  one  after  another ;  thus,  the 
captain  of  the  third  company  will  not  give  the 
command  ^re  until  he  has  heard  the  fire  of  the 
first  company ;  the  captain  of  the  fifth  will  ob- 
serve the  same  rule  with  respect  to  the  third, 
and  the  captain  of  the  seventh  the  same  rule 
with  respect  to  the  fifth. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PAET    I.  15 

51.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  fire  to  cease  by 
the  sound  to  cease  firing ;  at  this  sound,  the  men 
will  execute  what  is  prescribed  in  the  S.  C,  Na 
63  ;  at  the  sound,  for  officers  to  take  their  places 
after  firing,  the  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and 
color-guard,  will  promptly  resume  their  places  in 
line  of  battle :  this  rule  is  general  for  all  the 
firings. 

THE    FIEE   BY   WEN'O. 

52.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  this  fire  to  be 
executed,  he  will  command : 

1.  Mre  hy  wing.     2.  Right  wing.     3.  Eeadt. 
4.  Aim.     5.  Fire.     6.  Load. 

53.  Tlie  colonel  will  cause  the  wings  to  fire 
alternately,  and  he  will  recommence  the  fire  by 
the  commands,  1.  Right  wing ;  2.  Aim;  3.  Fiee; 
4.  Load.  1.  Left  icing ;  2.  Aim  ;  3.  Fire  ;  4.  Load; 
in  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  Xo.  42. 

THE   EIRE   BY   BATTALION. 

54.  The  colonel  will  cause  this  fire  to  be  exe- 
cuted by  the  commands  last  prescribed,  substi- 
tuting for  the  first  two,  1.  Fire  hy  battalion;  2. 
Battalion. 

THE    EIRE    BY   PILE. 

55.  To  cause  this  to  be  executed,  the  colonel 
will  command : 


16  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PAPwT   I. 

1.  Fire  ly  file.     2.  Battalion.     3.  Ready. 
4.    Commence  firing. 

56.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  fire  will  com- 
mence on  the  right  of  each  company,  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  8.  (7.,  Xo.  57.  The  colonel  may, 
if  he  thinks  proper,  cause  the  fire  to  commence 
on  the  right  of  each  platoon. 

THE    FIRE    BY    BANK. 

57.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the 
colonel  will  command : 

\.  Firely  ranh.  '2^.  Battalion-.  3.  Ready.  4^.  Rear 
rank.     5.  Aim.     6.  Fiee.     7.  Load. 

58.  This  fire  will  be  executed  as  has  been  ex- 
plained in  the  >S'.  C,  oSTo,  59,  in  following  the  pro- 
gression prescribed  for  the  two  ranks,  which 
should  fire  alternately. 

TO  fiee  by  the  eeae  eank. 

59.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  battalion 
to  fire  to  the  rear,  he  will  command : 

1.  Face  ly  the  rear  rank.     2.  Battalion. 
3.  Aboil t — Face. 

60.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains,  cover- 
ing sergeants,  and  file  closers  will  execute  what 
has  been  prescribed  in  the  S.  (7.,  ISTo.  69;  the 
color-bearer  will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,   and 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAKT    I.  17 

for  this  purpose,  the  corporal  of  his  file  will 
step  before  the  corporal  next  on  his  right  to  let 
the  color-bearer  pass,  and  will  then  take  his  place 
in  the  front  rank ;  the  lieutenant-colonel,  adjutant, 
senior  and  junior  majors,  sergeant-major,  and  the 
music,  will  place  themselves  before  the  front  rank, 
and  face  to  the  rear,  each  opposite  his  place  in 
the  line  of  battle — the  first  two  passing  around 
the  right,  and  the  others  around  the  left  of  the 
battalion. 

0-61.  At  tbe  same  command,  the  first  company 
of  ^irmishers  will  face  to  the  right,  and  the 
second  to  the  left ;  they  will  be  marched  by  their 
CBptains  around  the  right  and  left  flanks  of  the 
battalion  respectively,  and  faced  to  the  rear  oppo- 
site their  places  in  line  of  battle,  the  right  of  each 
company  toward  the  proper  left  of  the  battalion. 

62.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will 
face  about ;  the  captains  and  covering  sergeants 
observing  what  is  prescribed  in  the^'.  C,  No. 
70. 

63.  The  battalion  facing  thus  by  the  rear  rank, 
the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  execute  the  different 
fires  by  the  same  commands  as  if  it  were  faced 
by  the  front  rank. 

64.  The  right  and  left  wings  will  retain  the 
same  designations,  although  faced  about ;  the 
companies  also  wiU  preserve  their  former  desig- 
nations, 2iQ  first,  second^  third^  &c. 

65.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left 
of  each  company,  now  become  the  right. 

66.  The  fire  by  rank  wiU  commence  by  the 
front  rank,  now  become  the  rear  rank.  This 
rank  will  preserve  its  denomination. 

a* 


18  SCHOOL   OF    THE   BATTALION PAET  I. 

67.  The  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and  color- 
gnard  will,  at  the  first  command  given  by  the 
colonel,  take  the  places  prescribed  for  them  in 
the  fires,  with  the  front  rank  leading. 

68.  The  colonel,  after  firing  to  the  rear,  wish- 
ing to  face  the  battalion  to  its  proper  front,  will 
command : 

1.  Face  hy  the  front  ranlc.     2.  Battalion. 
3.  About — Face. 

69.  At  these  commands,  the  battalion  will  re- 
turn to  its  proper  front  by  the  means  prescribed 
Nos.  60,  61  and  62. 

70.  The  fire  by  file  being  that  most  used  in 
war,  the  colonel  will  give  it  the  preference  in  the 
preparatory  exercises,  in  order  that  the  battalion 
may  be  bronght  to  execute  it  with  the  greatest 
possible  regularity. 

0-71.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  not  fire 
when  the  line  fires,  except  behind  a  breastwork, 
or  other  defensive  mask,  when  they  may  be 
brought  into  line  for  that  purpose. 

72.  When  the  colonel  may  wish  to  give  some , 
relaxation  to  the  battalion,  without  breaking  the 
ranks,  he  wiU  execute  what  has  been  prescribed 
in    the  S.  C,  Nos.  37  and  38  or  Nos.  39  and 
40. 

73.  "WTien  the  oclonel  shaU  wish  to  cause  arms 
to  be  stacked,  he  wiU  bring  the  battalion  to  | 
ordered  arms,  and  then  command :  i 

1  Stoik — Ajems.     2.  Break  rank».  ' 

3.  ]Maegh.  j 


I 


y^l  o        Sckool  of    tke  Battalion.        pi  / 


^HIIIIIIIIIIIlilllliliMf  ■       JiJiK 


HH!!||i||i;iWlf'''!P-^ 


HiMiiiniiiliiiiiifiV" 

^  H!i!;l!!l!!!:ll'^liri!l'f^' 


Hli|l|lllillllil!lill!lli!P' 


siiiiiBiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiig' 


^^a^iiiMigJF 


7V'  hrntk  hy  ccmtjjanytoth.:  Ti<pit.y?7H. 


SCHOOL    OF  THE   BATTALION PAET   H.  19 

74.  The  colonel  wishing  the  men  to  return  to 
the  ranks,  will  cause  attention  to  be  sounded,  at 
which  the  battalion  will  reform  behind  the  stacks 
of  arms.  The  sound  being  finished,  the  colonel, 
after  causing  the  stacks  to  be  broken,  will  com- 
mand : 

Battalion. 

75.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  fix  their 
attention,  and  remain  immovable. 

0-76.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  wOl  perform 
the  movements  indicated  Nos.  72,  73  and  74,  at 
the  command  of  the  colonel,  and  at  the  same 
time  with  the  battalion  companies. 


PART  SECOND. 

DIFFEEENT  MODES  OF  PASSING  FEOil  THE  OEDEB  IN 
BATTLE  TO  THE  OEDEE  IN  COLUMX. 

Aeticle  I. 
To  break  to  the  right  or  the  left  into  column. 

77.  Lines  of  battle  will  habitually  break  into 
column  by  company ;  they  may  also  break  by 
division  or  by  platoon.  The  companies  of  skir- 
mishers will  always  break  by  platoon. 

78.  It  is  here  supposed  that  the  colonel  wishes 
to  break  by  company  to  the  right ;  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  By  company^  right  wheel.   2.  Maeoh  (or  d(mbk 
quick — Maeoh.) 


20         SCHOOL    OF  THE   BATTALION PAET   IL 

79.  At  the  first  command,  each  battahon  cap- 
tain  will  place  himself  rapidly  before  the  centre 
of  his  company,  and  caution  it  that  it  has  to 
wheel  to  the  right ;  each  covering  sergeant  will 
eplace  his  captain  in  the  front  rank. 
0-80.  At  the  same  command,  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon of  the  companies  of  skirmishers,  will  placo 
himself  rapidly  before  the  centre  of  his  platoon,  as 
prescribed  in  the  S.  C,  No.  177,  and  caution  it 
that  it  has  to  wheel  to  the  right. 

81.  At  the  command  viarch,  each  company 
will  break  to  the  right,  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  in  the  S.  C,  ISTo.  178 ;  each  cap- 
tain will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed 
for  the  chiefs  of  platoon ;  the  left  guide,  as  soon 
as  he  can  pass,  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of 
the  front  rank  to  conduct  the  marching  flank, 
and  when  he  shall  have  approached  near  to  the 
perpendicular,  the  captain  will  command:  1. 
Such  Company.     2.  Halt. 

82.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be 
given  at  the  instant  the  left  guide  shall  be  at  the 
distance  of  three  paces  from  the  perpendicular, 
the  company  will  halt ;  the  guide  will  advance 
and  place  his  left  arm  lightly  against  the  breast 
of  the  captain,  who  will  establish  him  on  the 
alignment  of  the  man  who  has  faced  to  the 
right ;  the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself 
correctly  on  the  alignment  on  the  right  of  that 
man ;  which  being  executed,  the  captain  wiU 
align  his  company  by  the  left,  command  Feont, 
and  place  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre. 

83.  The  captains  having  commanded  Feont, 
the  guides,  although  some  of  them  may  not  be 


SCHOOL    OF  THE    BATTALION PAET    II.         21 

In  the  direction  of  the  preceding  guides,  will 
stand  fast,  in  order  that  the  error  of  a  company 
that  has  wheeled  too  much  or  too  little  may  not 
be  propagated ;  the  guides  not  in  the  direction 
will  readily  come  into  it  when  the  column  is  pui 
in  march. 

0-34.  At  the  command  marcTi^  the  platoons  of 
the  companies  of  skirmishers  will  be  wheeled  as 
prescribed  in  the  S.  {7.,  No.  178;  they  will  be 
halted  and  dressed  in  such  manner,  that  the  first 
platoon  of  each  of  the  companies  shall  be  on  a 
line  with  the  first  and  last  battalion  companies 
respectively. 

85.  A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will"  break 
into  column  by  company  to  the  left,  according 
to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means ; 
the  covering  sergeant  of  each  company  will  con- 
duct the  marching  flank,  and  the  left  guide  will 
place  himself  on  the  left«[)f  the  front  rank  at  the 
moment  the  company  halts. 
0-86.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  break 
by  platoon  to  the  left,  according  to  the  samo 
principles  by  which  they  broke  to  the  right,  but 
oy  iuverse  means.  In  this  case,  the  second  pla- 
toon of  these  companies  will  be  on  a  line  with 
the  first  and  last  battalion  companies  respect- 
ively. 

87.  "When  the  battalion  breaks  by  division,  the 
indication  division  will  be  substituted  in  the 
commands  for  that  of  company  ;  the  chief  of 
each  division  (the  senior  captain)  will  conform 
himself  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  chief  of 
company,  and  will  place  himself  two  paces  be- 
fore the  centre  of  his  division ;  the  junior  cap- 


22  SCHOOL    OF  THE    BATTALIOX PAET    U. 

tain,  if  not  already  there,  -^'ill  place  himself  in 
tlie  interval  between  the  two  companies  in  the 
front  rank,  and  be  covered  bj  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  left  company  in  the  rear  rank.  The 
right  guide  of  the  right  company  will  be  th^ 
right  guide,  and  the  left  guide  of  the  left  com- 
pany, the  left  guide  of  the  division. 

88.  When  the  battalion  shall  break  by  platoon 
to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  each  first  lieutenant 
will  pass  around  the  left  of  his  company,  to 
place  himself  in  front  of  the  second  platoon,  and 
for  this  purpose,  each  covering  sergeant,  except 
the  one  of  the  right  company,  will  step,  for  the 
moment,  in  rear  of  the  right  file  of  his  company. 

83.  When  the  battalion  breaks  by  division  to 
the  right,  and  there  is  an  odd  company,  the  cap- 
tain of  this  company  (the  left),  after  wheeling 
into  column,  will  cause  it  to  oblique  to  the  left, 
halt  it  at  company  distance  from  the  preceding 
division,  place  his  left  guide  on  the  direction  of 
the  column,  and  then  align  his  company  by  the 
left.  When  the  line  breaks  by  division  to  the 
left,  the  odd  company  will  be  in  front ;  its  cap- 
tain, having  wheeled  it  into  column,  Avill  cause  it 
to  oblique  to  the  right,  halt  it  at  division  dis- 
tance from  the  division  next  in  the  rear,  place 
his  right  guide  on  the  direction  of  the  other 
guides,  and  align  the  company  by  the  right. 
0-90.  When  the  battalion  breaks,  either  by  di- 1 
vision  or  platoon,  the  first  or  second  platoon  of  j 
'each  of  the  company  of  skirmishers,  will  be  es-i 
tablished  on  the  prolongation  of  the  first  and  last  \ 
division,  or  platoon,  respectively. 
0-91.  When  there  is  an  odd  company,  and  the  I 


SCHOOL    OF  THE    BATTALIOX PAET    II.  2S 

battalion  breaks  by  division  to  the  right,  or  left, 
the  first  or  second  platoon  of  the  second  com- 
pany of  skirmishers,  will  always  be  held  abreast 
with  that  company,  but  otherwise  the  position 
of  this  company  of  skirmishers  will  not  be 
changed. 

0-92.  Whenever  there  is  but  one  company  of 
skirmishers  present  with  the  battalion,  and  it  is 
divided  into  platoons,  and  posted,  as  prescribed 
No.  10,  Title  I. :  in  all  the  cases  where  the  battalion 
is  broken  to  the  right  or  le£t,  either  by  platoon, 
company,  or  division,  the  first  platoon  of  skir- 
mishers will  always  bo  held  abreast  of  the  first, 
and  the  second  platoon  abreast  of  the  last  bat- 
talion subdivision. 

93.  The  battalion  being  in  column,  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel and  senior  major  will  place  them- 
selves on  the  directing  flank,  the  first  abreast 
with  tlie  leading  subdivision,  and  the  other 
abreast  with  the  last,  and  both  six  paces  from 
the  flank.  The  adjutant  will  be  near  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel, and  the  sergeant-major  near  the  sen- 
ior major. 

0-94.  When  the  companies  of  skirmishers  are 
with  the  battalion,  when  in  column,  the  junior 
major  will  habitually  occupy  a  position  on  the 
reverse  flank,  abreast  with  the  color  comjjany, 
and  on  a  line  passing  through  the  centre  of  the 
platoons  of  these  companies.  In  case  the  pres- 
ence of  the  enemy,  or  other  cause,  requires  that 
the  companies  of  skirmishers,  or  any  portion  of 
them,  should  bo  deployed  on  either  the  front, 
flanks,  or  rear  of  the  column,  the  colonel  Avill  in- 
dicate to  tlie  junior  m^jor  the  number  of  men  to 


24         SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PART    H. 

be  deployed,  the  position  thej  are  to  occupy,  and 
the  duties  they  will  be  required  to  perform ;  the 
junior  major,  after  communicating  these  instruc- 
tions to  the  chiefs  of  the  companies  of  skirmishers, 
will  take  such  position  as  best  to  supervise  the 
movements. 

0-95.  When  one  or  more  platoons  of  the  com- 
panies of  skirmishers  are  deployed  to  cover  the 
battalion,  when  in  open  column,  and  the  colonel 
desires  their  recall,  he  will  cause  it  to  be  indica- 
ted to  the  commandant  of  the  skirmishers,  who 
will  either  direct  the  assemble  on  the  battalion 
to  be  sounded,  or  will  command,  assejnhle  on  the 
hattalion.  At  this  signal  or  command,  the  skir- 
mishers will  assemble  on  their  respective  re- 
serves, as  prescribed  'Bo.  165,  instruction  for 
skirmishers,  and  then  proceed  to  take  their 
appropriate  places,  as  indicated  ]^os.  84  and  86. 

96.  The  colonel  will  have  no  fixed  place  as  the 
instructor  of  his  battahon ;  but  in  columns  com- 
posed of  many  battalions,  he  will  place  himself 
habitually  on  the  directing  flank,  fifteen  or 
twenty  paces  from  the  guides,  and  abreast  with 
the  centre  of  his  battalion. 

97.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  move  the 
column  forward  without  halting  it,  ho  will  cau- 
tion the  battalion  to  that  effect,  and  command : 

1.    By   company^   right  wheel.      2.    Maech  (or 
double  quick — Maech). 

98.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  com- 
panies will  execute  what  is  prescribed  for  break- 
ing into  column  from  a  halt. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE  BATTALION — PART    11.         25 

99.  At  the  second  command,  they  will  remain 
in  front  of  their  companies  to  superintend  the 
movement ;  the  companies  will  wheel  to  the 
right  on  fixed  pivots,  as  indicated  in  the  S.  C, 
No.  190  ;  the  left  guides  will  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed  above ;  when  they  shall  arrive  near 
the  perpendicular,  the  colonel  wOl  command : 

3.  Forward.     4.  Maech.     5.   Guide  left. 

100.  At  the  third  command,  each  covering  ser- 
geant will  place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  the 
man  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  his  com- 
pany. At  the  fourth  command,  which  will  be 
given  at  the  instant  the  wheel  is  completed,  the 
companies  will  cease  to  wheel  and  march  straight- 
forward. At  the  fifth,  the  men  Avill  take  the 
touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  The  leading  guide 
will  march  in  the  direction  indicated  to  him  by 
the  lieutenant-colonel.  The  guides  will  imme- 
diately conform  themselves  to  the  principles  of 
the  march  in  column,  as  indicated  in  the  S.  0.^ 
No.  205,  and  following. 

0~101.  At  the  first  command',  the  chiefs  of  the 
companies  of  skii-mishers,  will  execute  what  is 
prescribed  for  breaking  from  a  halt ;  at  the  sec- 
ond command,  they  Avill  execute  what  is  pre- 
scribed in  the  S.  (7.,  No.  190,  with  this  exception, 
on  arriving  near  the  perpendicular,  each  captain 
will  command. 

1.  Marh  time.     2.  Maech. 

0  -102.  At  the  fourth  command  by  the  colonel,  the 
VOL.  ir. — 3 


26         SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET   H. 

platoons  will  execute  "what  is  prescribed  in  the 
S.  6',  No.  191.  At  the  fifth  command,  thej 
will  take  the  guide  to  the  left,  and  the  guides  of 
the  first  platoons  will  march  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  first  and  last  battalion  companies,  respec- 
tivelj,  and  at  a  distance  from  the  right  guides  of 
tlie  column  of  about  thirty-three  paces,  less  the 
front  of  the  platoon. 

103.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  line  of 
battle,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  wheel  to  the 
right  or  left,  by  the  same  commands  and  the 
same  means ;  but  he  should  pre\aousl7  caution 
the  battalion  that  it  is  to  continue  the  march. 
At  the  first  command,  the  color  and  general 
guides  will  retake  their  places  in  ranks. 

104.  A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will  break 
into  column  by  company  to  the  left,  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means ;  the 
covering  sergeant  of  each  company  will  conduct 
the  marching  flank,  and  the  left  guides  will  place 
themselves  on  the  left  of  their  respective  compa- 
nies at  the  command /orirar^. 

0-105.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  break 
by  platoon  to  the  left,  according  to  the  same 
principles  by  which  they  broke  to  the  right,  but 
by  inverse  means ;  the  second  platoon  marching 
on  the  prolongation  of  the  first  and  last  battal- 
ion companies. 

106.  When  a  battalion  has  to  prolong  itself  in 
column  toward  the  right  or  left,  or  has  to  direct 
its  march  in  column  perpendicularly  or  diagon- 
ally in  front,  or  in  rear  of  either  flank,  the  colo- 
nel will  cause  it  to  break  by  company  to  the 
right  or  left,  as  has  just  been  prescribed;  but 


27 

to 
lo- 
rch 
the 

^Vi 
a  is 
ker 
)m- 
on, 
ht), 

;mg 

ht). 
bain 
ht). 
di- 
mn. 
ce  a 
om- 

ndi- 
sof 
itiv© 


into 
htoir 


e  tbe 
into 


iihio 


Sckool  of    tLe  Battalion. 


LI    l"l    J 


QgrxxD 


LI    I    I  -J 
Li  I    I    I 


L-L   i    I  J 
LJ_l-iJ 

brealcmy  off/ile^t. 


'Gl 


45"  ■  I 


I  "ff 


'/*y  bre£iA-  to  the  /■*•*< 
cobu?ift  Xo  iO^ 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    BATTALION PART   II.  27 

when  the  line  breaks  to  the  right,  in  order  to 
march  toward  the  left,  or  the  reverse,  the  colo- 
nel will  command :  Break  to  the  right  to  march 
to  the  left^  or  hrealc  to  the  left  to  march,  to  th@ 
rights  before  giving  the  command,  hy  company^ 
right  (or  left)  wheel.  As  soon  as  the  battalion  is 
broken,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  a  marker 
abreast  with  the  right  guide  of  the  leading  com- 
pany. The  instant  the  column  is  put  in  motion, 
this  oompanj  will  wheel  to  the  left  (or  right), 
march  ten  paces  to  the  front  without  changing 
the  guide,  and  wheel  again  to  the  left  (or  right). 
The  second  wheel  being  completed,  the  captain 
will  immediately  command,  guide  left  (or  right). 
The  guide  of  this  company  will  march  in  a  di- 
rection parallel  to  the  guides  of  the  column. 
The  Heutenant-colonel  will  be  careful  to  place  a 
second  marker  at  the  point  where  the  first  com- 
pany is  to  change  direction  the  second  time. 
0-107.  lu  executing  the  movements  above  indi- 
cated, the  platoon  columns  of  the  companies  of 
skirmishers  will  maintain  their  proper  relative 
positions  to  the  battalion  column. 

Aeticle  II. 

To  break  to  the  rear,  by  the  right  or  left,  into 
column,  and  to  advance  or  retire  by  the  right  or 
left  of  companies. 

108.  When  the  colonel  shaU  wish  to  cause  the 
battalion  to  break  to  the  rear,  by  the  right,  into 
column  by  company,  he  will  command : 

1.  By    the   right  of  companies  to  the  rear  into 


28  SCHOOL    OF   THE   BATTALION PAKT   II. 

column.    1.  Battalion  right — Face.    8.  Maeoh 
(or  double  quick — Maech). 

109.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will 
place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company, 
and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right ;  the  covering 
sergeants  will  step  into  the  front  rank. 
Q-llO.  At  the  same  command,  each  chief  of 
platoon  of  the  companies  of  skirmishers,  will 
place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  platoon,  and 
caution  it  to  face  to  the  right. 

111.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion 
will  face  to  the  right ;  each  captain  will  hasten 
to  the  right  of  his  company,  and  break  three 
files  to  the  rear ;  the  first  file  will  break  the 
whole  depth  of  the  four  ranks,  and  face  to  the 
rear,  the  breasts  of  the  men  on  a  line  with  the 
right  shoulders  of  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion; 
the  second  file  half  way  of  the  first,  and  the  third 
file  less,  which  being  executed,  the  captain  will 
place  himself  so  that  his  breast  may  touch  lightly 
the  left  arm  of  the  front-rank  man  of  the  last  file 
in  the  company  next  on  the  right  of  his  own. 
The  captain  of  the  right  company  will  place  him- 
self as  if  there  were  a  company  on  his  rigPit,  and 
will  align  himself  on  the  other  captains.  The 
covering  sergeant  of  each  company  will  break  to 
the  rear  with  the  right  files,  and  place  himself 
before  the  front  rank  of  the  first  file,  to  conduct 
him.  The  guides,  who  in  similar  movements 
place  themselves  in  front  of  the  leading  front- 
rank  men  to  conduct  them,  will  face  toward 
those  points  on  which  it  is  intended  the  subdi- 
vision shall  march. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART   II.  39 

This  rule  is  general. 

112.  At  the  command  march^  the  first  file 
of  each  company  will  march  straight-forward, 
the  covering  sergeant  placed  before  this  file,  will 
conduct  it  perpendicularly  to  the  rear.  The  oth- 
er files  will  come  bj  wheeling,  successively,  into 
the  position  previously  occupied  by  the  first,  as 
indicated  No.  111.  The  captains  will  stand  fast, 
see  their  companies  file  past,  and  at  the  instant 
the  last  file  shall  have  wheeled,  each  captain  will 
command :      -^ 

1.  Siich  company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 
4.  Left — Dress. 

113.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the 
front,  its  left  guide  Avill  place  himself  so  that  his 
left  arm  may  touch  lightly  the  breast  of  his 
captain. 

114.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  company 
will  align  itself  on  its  left  guide,  the  captain  so 
directing  it  that  the  new  alignment  may  be  per- 
pendicular to  that  which  the  company  had  occu- 
pied in  line  of  battle,  and  the  better  to  judge  of 
this,  he  will  step  back  two  paces  from  the  flank. 

115.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain 
will  command :  Front,  and  take  his  place  be- 
fore its  centre. 

0-116.  At  the  second  command,  the  companies 
of  skirmishers  will  face  to  the  right,  each  chief 
of  platoon  will  hasten  to  the  right  of  his  pla- 
toon, break  three  files  to  the  rear,  as  indicated 
No.  Ill,  and  place  himself  by  the  side  of  his 
guide,  to  conduct  him  ;  the  guide  of  each  second 
3* 


30  SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PART  II. 

platoon  will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  lead- 
ing front-rank  man  of  his  platoon. 
0-117.  At  the  command  marc\  each  platoon 
will  be  conducted  perpendicularly  to  the  rear  by 
its  chief,  who  having  marched  a  distance  eqaal 
to  the  front  of  his  platoon,  will  halt  in  his  own 
person,  let  his  platoon  file  past  him,  and  when 
the  left  file  shall  have  passed,  the  platoon  will  be 
halted,  faced  to  the  front,  and  dressed,  as  pre- 
scribed JSTo.  84 :  the  guides  will  move  rapidly  to 
the  left  of  the  platoons  at  the  command  halt^  by 
their  chiefs. 

118.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  break  into  column 
by  company,  to  the  rear,  by  the  right,  he  will 
command : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  rear  into 
column.  2.  Battalion,  hy  the  right  Jianh,  3. 
Maech  (or  double  2'iac^>— March). 

119.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will 
step  briskly  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company, 
and  caution  it  to  face  by  the  right  Jianh. 
0-120.  At  the  same  command,  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon of  the  companies  of  skirmishers,  will  step  in 
front  of  the  centre  of  his  platoon,  and  caution  it 
to  face  by  the  right  JlanTc. 

121.  At  the  command  march^  the  battalion 
wOl  face  to  the  right,  the  color  and  general 
guides  will  retake  their  places  in  ranks:  each 
captain  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  his  com- 
pany, and  cause  it  to  break  to  the  right;  the 
•overing  sergeant  placed  in  front  of  the  front- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PART  IL  31 

rank  man  of  the  first  file  of  each  company,  -will 
conduct  it  perpendicularly  to  the  rear ;  the  other 
files  will  come  by  wheeling  successively  into  the 
position  previously  occupied  by  the  first.  The 
captains  will  see  their  companies  file  past  them ; 
and  when  the  last  files  have  wheeled,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

4.  Battalion  dy  the  leftjlanh — Maech,     5.  Chuide 
left. 

0-122.  At  the  third  command  by  the  colonel, 
the  chief  of  each  platoon  of  the  companies  of 
skirmishers,  will  cause  the  right  of  his  platoon 
to  break  as  indicated  iSTo.  116,  and  be  conducted 
to  the  rear  as  prescribed  No.  117. 

123.  At  the  fourth  command  by  the  colonel, 
the  battalion  companies  will  face  to  the  left,  and 
march  in  column  in  the  new  direction.  The 
captains  will  place  themselves  in  front  of  the 
centres  of  their  respective  companies.  At  the 
fifth  command,  the  guides  will  conform  to  the 
principles  of  the  march  in  column  ;  the  leading 
one  will  move  in  the  direction  indicated  to  him 
\>j  the  lieutenant-colonel.  The  men  will  take 
the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left. 
0-124.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  platoons  of 
the  companies  of  skirmishers  will  face  by  the 
left  flank,  and  at  the  fifth,  will  take  their  guide 
to  the  left. 

125.  To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  left,  the  col- 
onel will  give  the  same  commands  as  in  the  case 
of  breaking  to  the  rear  by  the  right,  substituting 
the  indication  left  for  that  of  right. 


32  BOnOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PART   II. 

126.  The  movement  will  be  executed  acoord- 
ing  to  the  same  principles.  Each  captain  will 
hasten  to  the  left  of  his  company,  cause  the  first 
three  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  then  place  his 
breast  against  the  right  file  of  the  company  next 
on  the  left  of  his  own,  in  the  manner  prescribed 
above. 

127.  As  soon  as  the  three  files  break  to  the  rear, 
the  left  guide  of  sach  company  will  place  him- 
self before  the  front-rank  man  of  the  headmost 
file,  to  conduct  him.  •  x 

128.  The  instant  the  companies  face  to  the 
front,  the  right  guide  of  each  will  place  himself 
so  that  his  right  arm  may  lightly  touch  the  breast 
of  his  captain. 

0-129.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  break 
to  the  rear  by  the  left,  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  !N"os.  110,  116  and  117.  In  this  case, 
the  second  platoon  of  each  company  will  be 
aligned  on  the  first  and  last  battalion  companies 
respectively. 

130.  The  battalion  may  be  broken  by  division 
to  the  rear,  by  the  right  or  left,  in  like  manner ; 
in  this  case,  the  indication  divisions  will  be  substi- 
tuted, in  the  first  command,  for  that  of  compa- 
nies; the  chiefs  of  division  will  conform  them- 
selves to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of  com- 
pany. The  junior  captain  in  each  division  will 
place  himself,  when  the  division  faces  to  a  fiank, 
by  the  side  of  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left 
company,  who  steps  into  the  front  rank. 
0-131.  When  the  battalion  breaks  to  the  rear 
by  division,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  of  the  compa- 
nies of  skirmishers  will  lead  off  their  platoons  a 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    II.  33 

distance  equal  to  once  and  a  half  a  companj  front^ 
before  halting  in  their  own  person,  to  let  them  file 
past  as  indicated  No.  117. 

132.  If  there  be  an  odd  nnmber  of  companies, 
and  the  battalion  break  bv  division  to  the  rear, 
whether  by  the  right  or  left,  the  captain  of  the 
left  company  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
^o.  89. 

0-133.  In  the  case  above  indicated,  the  platoons 
of  the  companies  of  skirmishers  will  be  conclud- 
ed, so  as  to  conform  to  the  principles  prescribed 
in  1^0.  91. 

134.  This  maimer  of  breaking  into  column  be- 
ing at  once  the  most  prompt  and  regular,  will  be 
preferred  on  actual  service,  unless  there  be  some 
particular  reason  for  breaking  to  the  front. 

135.  If  the  battalion  be  in  line  and  at  a  halt, 
and  the  colonel  should  wish  to  advance  or  retire 
by  the  right  of  companies,  he  will  command : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  front  (or  rear), 
2.  Battalion  right — ^Face.  3.  March  (or  dou- 
ble quick — Maech).  4.  Guide  right  (left)  cr 
(c&ntre). 

136.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will 
move  rapidly  two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of 
his  company,  and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right ; 
the  covering  sergeants  will  replace  the  captains 
in  the  front  rank, 

0-137.  At  the  same  command,  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon of  the  companies  of  skirmishers,  will  move 
rapidly  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  platoon,  and 
caution  it  to  face  to  the  right. 


34  SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALIOX PAKT   II. 

138.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion 
will  face  to  the  right,  and  each  captain,  moving 
qnicldy  to  the  right  of  his  company,  will  cause 
files  to  break  to  the  front,  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples indicated  'No.  111. 

0-139.  At  the  same  command,  the  companies  of 
skirmishers  will  face  to  the  right,  and  each  chief 
of  platoon  moving  quickly  to  its  right,  will  cause 
files  to  break  to  the  front,  and  will  place  himself 
Eiccording  to  the  principles  indicated  N"o.  116. 

140.  At  the  command  march,  each  captain, 
placing  himself  on  the  left  of  his  leading  guide, 
will  conduct  his  company  perpendicularly  to  the 
original  line.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  guide 
of  each  company  will  dress  to  the  right,  left,  or 
centre,  according  to  the  indication  given,  taking 
care  to  preserve  accurately  his  distance. 
0-141.  At  the  command  march^  each  chief  of 
platoon  of  the  companies  of  skirmishers,  will  halt 
in  his  own  person,  and  let  his  platoon  file  past  him, 
and  when  the  left  file  has  arrived  abreast  with 
him  each  captain  vi^iYL  command:  1.  Marie  time 
2.  Maech.  At  the  second  command,  given  the 
instant  the  left  files  are  abreast  with  their  chiefs, 
the  platoons  will  mark  time,  each  captain  will 
then  command:  1.  Forward.  2.  Maech.  At  the 
first  command,  each  chief  of  platoon  will  place , 
himself  by  the  side  of  his  guide,  at  the  command  j 
march^  given  at  the  instant  the  battalion  compa-  * 
nies  have  prolonged  themselves  their  entire 
length  in  the  new  direction,  the  platoons  will 
step  off',  the  first  platoon  of  the  companies,  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  first  and  last  batt^on 
companies  respectively. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAKT   II.  85 

0-142.  When  the  battalion  retires  by  the  right 
of  companies,  the  first  and  last  battalion  com- 
panies will  march  on  the  prolongation  of  the 
first  platoons  of  the  companies  of  skirmishers, 
respectively.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  see 
that  the  guide  of  the  platoon  on  the  directing 
flank  marches  in  the  proper  direction.  Should 
the  colonel  command:  guide  centre^  the  right 
general  guide  will  immediately  place  himself  on 
a  line  with  the  platoon  guides,  and  abreast  with 
the  guide  of  the  right  centre  company.  He  will 
be  assured  in  this  position  by  the  lieutenant-colo- 
nel, and  the  platoon  guides  of  the  companies  of 
skirmishers  will  align  themselves  upon  him,  pre- 
serving their  proper  distances;  the  guide  of  the 
right  centre  company  will  march  in  the  trace  of 
this  guide,  preserving  from  him  a  distance  of 
about  thirty-three  paces. 

143.  If  the   colonel  should  wish  to  move  to 

the  front,  or  rear,  by  the  left  of  companies,  the 

I  movement  will  be  executed  by  the  same  means 

I  and  the  same   commands,  substituting  left   for 

i  right, 

1 0-144.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  move 
to  the  front  or  rear  by  the  left  of  platoons  on 
I  the  same  principles  as  by  the  right.  In  this 
\  case,  each  second  platoon  will  march  on  the 
'  prolongation  of  the  first  and  last  battalion  com- 
panies respectively  and  conversely. 

145.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the 
colonel  should  wish  to  advance  or  retire  by  the 
right  of  companies,  he  will  command : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  front  (or 


36  SCHOOL    OF   THE    BATTALION PART   II. 

rear).  2.  Battalion,  hy  the  right  flanh.  3. 
March  (or  double  quick — Maech).  4.  Guide 
right  {left)  or  {centre.) 

146.  Which  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  and  means  prescribed  Nos.  119  and 
following,  and  136  and  following.  At  the  first 
command,  the  color  and  general  guides  will  take 
their  places  as  in  column. 

0-147.  When  advancing  or  retiring  by  the  right 
of  companies,  the  platoons  of  the  companies  of 
skirmishers  will  execute  the  movement  accord- 
ing to  the  means  and  principles  prescribed  I^os. 
120,  122,  139,  141,  and  142. 

148.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  advance  or 
retire  by  the  left  of  companies,  the  movement 
will  be  executed  by  the  s^e  means  and  the 
same  commands,  substituting  left  for  right. 
0-149.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  ad- 
vance or  retire  by  the  left  of  platoons,  on  the 
same  principles  as  by  the  right,  observing  what 
is  required  No.  144. 

150.  If  the  battalion  be  advancing  by  the 
right  or  left  of  companies,  and  the  colonel  should 
wish  to  form  line  to  the  front,  he  will  com- 
mand: 

1.   By  companies  into  line.     2,  'hlLKRC'H.  {ov  double 
quick  Maech).      3.    Guide  centre. 

151.  At  the  command  march^  briskly  repeated 
by  the  captains,  each  company  will  be  formed 
into  line,  as  prescribed  in  the  S.  C.,  No.  155. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    BATTALION PAET    II.  37 

152.  At  the  third  command,  the  color  and 
general  guides  will  move  rapidly  to  their  places 
in  line,  as  will  be  hereinafter  prescribed  No.  480. 
0-153.  The  platoons  of  the  companies  of  skir- 
mishers will  come  into  line  at  the  same  time 
with  the  battalion  companies  in  the  manner  pre- 
scribed in  the  S.  C,  iSTos.  163  and  165. 

154.  If  the  battalion  be  retiring  by  the  right 
or  left  of  companies,-  and  the  colonel  should 
wish  to  form  line  facing  the  enemy,  he  will  first 
cause  the  companies  to  face  about  while  march- 
ing, and  immediately  form  in  line  by  the  com- 
mands prescribed  No.  150,  and  by  the  means  in- 
dicated in  the  8.  C,  No.  159.  If  the  colonel 
does  not  wish  the  battalion  to  advance  after  facing 
about,  he  will  command :  right  about — halt.,  which 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed in  the  8.  C,  Nos.  132-3. 
0-155.  In  the  movement  above  indicated,  the 
companies  of  skirmishers  will  face  about,  and 
come  into  line,  at  the  same  time  with  the  battalr- 
ion  companies. 

2EMAEKS  ox  THE  DEPLOYMENT  OF  SKIEMISHEES,  IN 
EETIEINft  BY  THE  EIGHT  OE  LEFT  OF  COMPANIES. 

0-156.  If,  in  retiring  by  the  flanks  of  companies, 
it  is  not  intended  to  open  the  fire  of  the  line  on 
the  enemy,  the  companies  of  skirmishers,  or  a 
portion  of  them,  will  generally  be  deployed  be- 
tween the  enemy  and  the  line,  for  the  purpose  of 
covering  the  retreat. 

VOL.  II. — i 


88  SCHOOL    OF   THE    BATTALION PAET   II. 

Article  III. 
To  ploy  tho  battalion  into  close  column. 

157.  TMs  movement  may  be  executed  by  com- 
pany or  by  division,  on  the  right  or  left  subdi- 
vision, or  on  any  other  subdivision,  right  or  left 
in  front. 

158.  The  examples  ?n  this  school  "^vill  suppose 
the  presence  of  four  divisions,  with  directions  for 
an  odd  company ;  but  what  will  be  prescribed 
for  four,  will  serve  equally  for  two  or  three  divi- 
sions. 

159.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column 
by  division  in  rear  of  the  first,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

1.  Close  00111711711)1/ division.  2.  On  the  first  divis- 
ion^  right  in  front.  3.  Battalion.^  right — Face. 
4.  Maech  (or  doiible  quick — Maech). 

160.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  chiefs  of 
division  will  place  themselves  before  the  centres 
of  their  divisions  ;  the  chief  of  the  first  will  cau- 
tion it  to  stand  fast ;  the  chiefs  of  the  three  others 
will  remind  them  that  they  will  have  to  face  to 
the  right,  and  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  right 
company  of  each  division  will  replace  his  captain 
in  the  front  rank,  as  soon  as  the  latter  steps  out. 
■0-181.  At  the  same  command,  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon of  the  companies  of  skirmishers,  will  place 
himself  before  the  centre  of  his  platoon,  and  cau- 
tion it  that  it  will  have  to  face  to  the  right. 

162.  At  the  third  command,  the  last  three  di- 


r 


% 


n 


16 
'ft 

as 

)n 

3d 
iir 
in 
.ix 
ha 
ch 
lis 
ii- 
in 


SCHOOL    OF  THE    BATTALION PAET    II.  39 

visions  will  face  to  the  right ;  the  chief  of  each 
division  will  hasten  to  its  right,  and  cause  files 
to  be  broken  to  the  rear,  as  indicated  Xo.  Ill ; 
the  right  guide  will  break  at  the  same  time,  and 
place  himself  before  the  front-rank  man  of  the 
first  file,  to  conduct  him,  and  each  chief  of  divis- 
ion will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  this  guide. 

163.  The  moment  these  divisions  face  to  the 
right,  the  junior  captain  in  each  will  place  him- 
self on  the  left  of  the  covering  sergeant  of  th© 
left  company,  who  will  place  himself  in  the  front 
rank.  This  rule  is  general  for  all  the  ployments 
ly  division. 

0-164.  At  the  third  command,  the  companies  of 
skirmishers  will  face  to  the  right.  Each  chief 
of  platoon  will  hasten  to  the  right  of  his  platoon ; 
the  chiefs  of  the  second  platoons  will  break  ofi^ 
files,  and  the  guides  of  those  platoons  will  place 
themselves  as  prescribed  Is'o,  116. 

165.  At  the  command  march^  the  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  add,  guide  left ;  at  this,  its  left 
guide  will  place  himself  on  its  left,  as  soon  as 
the  movement  of  the  second  division  may  permit, 
and  the  file  closers  will  advance  one  pace  upon 
the  rear  rank. 

166.  All  the  other  divisions,  each  conducted 
by  its  chief,  will  step  off  together,  to  take  their 
places  in  the  column ;  the  second  will  gain,  in 
wheeling  by  file  to  the  rear,  the  space  of  six 
paces,  which  ought  to  separate  its  guide  from  tbe 
guide  of  the  first  division,  and  so  direct  its  march 
as  to  enter  the  column  on  a  line  parallel  to  this 
division ;  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  di- 
rect themselves  diagonally  toward,  but  a  little  in 


^0         SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PART    II. 

rear  of,  the  points  at  which  they  ought,  respec- 
tively, to  enter  the  column ;  at  six  paces  from  the 
left  flank  of  the  column,  the  head  of  each  of  these 
divisions  will  incline  a  little  to  the  left,  in  order 
to  enter  the  column,  as  has  just  been  prescribed 
for  the  second,  taking  care  also  to  leave  the  dis- 
tance of  six  paces  between  its  guide  and  the  guide 
of  the  preceding  division.  At  the  moment  the 
divisions  put  themselves  in  march  to  enter  the 
column,  the  file  closers  of  each  will  incline  to 
the  left,  so  as  to  bring  themselves  to  the  distance 
of  a  pace  from  the  rear  rank. 

167.  Each  chief  of  these  three  divisions  will 
conduct  his  division  till  he  shall  be  up  with  the 
guide  of  the  directing  one ;  the  chief  will  then 
himself  halt,  see  his  division  file  past,  and  halt  it 
the  instant  the  last  file  shall  have  passed,  com- 
manding: 1.  Such  division;  2.  Halt;  3.  Feont; 
4.  Left — Deess. 

168.  At  the  second  command,  the  division  will 
halt ;  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  promptly 
on  the  direction,  six  paces  from  the  guide  which 
precedes  him,  in  order  that,  the  column  being 
formed,  the  divisions  may  be  separated  the  dis- 
tance of  four  paces. 

169.  At  the  third  command,  the  division  will 
face  to  the  front ;  at  the  fourth,  it  will  be  aligned 
by  its  chief,  who  will  place  himself  two  paces 
outside  of  his  guide,  and  direct  the  ahgnment  so 
tiiat  his  division  may  be  parallel  to  that  which 
precedes — which  being  done,  he  will  command, 
Feont,  and  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his 
division. 

170.  If  any  division,  after  the  command /r<wf, 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION — PART     H.         41 

be  not  at  its  proper  distance,  and  this  can  only 
happen  through  the  negligence  of  its  chief,  snch 
division  will  remain  in  its  place,  in  order  that  tlie 
fault  may  not  be  propagated. 
0-171.  At  the  command  march  by  the  colonel, 
each  first  platoon  of  the  companies  of  skirmish- 
ers will  stand  fast,  and  each  second  platoon, 
conducted  by  its  chief,  will  ploy  in  close  order, 
in  rear  of  its  first ;  and,  when  its  guide  shall 
be  nearly  up  with  the  guide  of  the  first,  each 
captain  will  command:  1.  Column  forward; 
2,  Guide  left;  3.  Maech  (or  douhle  quick — 
Maech). 

0-172.  At  this  the  first  platoon  column  will  di- 
rect itself  diagonally  to  the  front,  and  toward 
the  points  around  which  the  yjlatoons  will  have 
to  file ;  its  first  platoon,  conducted  by  its  chief, 
will  take  the  shortest  line  to  a  point  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  first  division,  and  at  the  distance 
iTom  its  right  guide  as  prescribed  I^o.  102  ;  the 
second  platoon  will  conform  its  movements  to 
the  first.  When  the  chiefs  of  the  platoons  have 
arrived  at  the  points  above  indicated,  the  chief, 
of  each  will  halt  in  his  own  person,  and  let  his 
platoon  file  past  him ;  the  first  platoon  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  first  division,  and  when  the 
left  file  shall  have  passed,  each  chief  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  Sujch  platoon — Halt.      2.  Front.     3.  Left — 
Deess. 

0-173.  At  the  same   time,  the    second  platoon 
I  column  will  direct  itself  diagonally  to  the  front, 
4* 


42       scnooL  OF  the  battalio:^ — part  ii. 

its  first  platoon  condncted  by  its  chief  toward 
a  point  on  the  jjrolongation  of  the  last  division, 
as  it  will  he  when  it  has  arrived  in  the  column, 
and  at  the  distance  prescribed  for  the  first  pla- 
toon of  the  first  platoon  column ;  the  chiefs  of 
platoons  will  halt  in  their  own  persons,  let  their 
platoons  file  past  them,  halt,  and  dress  them,  as 
prescribed  for  the  first  platoon  column. 

174.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  execu- 
tion of  the  movements  and  cause  the  prescribed 
principles  to  be  observed. 

175.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placing  himself 
in  succession  in  rear  of  the  left  guides,  will  as- 
sure them  on  the  direction  as  they  arrive,  and 
then  move  to  his  place  outside  of  the  left  flank 
of  the  column,  six  paces  from,  and  abreast  with, 
the  first  division.  In  assuring  the  guides  on  the 
direction,  he  will  be  a  mere  observer,  unless  one 
or  more  should  fail  to  cover  exactly  the  guide 
or  guides  already  established.  This  rule  is  gen- 
eral. 

176.  The  senior  major  will  follow  the  move- 
ment abreast  with  the  left  of  the  fourth  division, 
and  afterward  take  his  position  outside  of  the 
left  flank  of  the  column,  six  paces  from,  and 
abreast  with,  this  division.  The  junior  major 
will  follow  the  movement,  and  afterward  take 
post  as  indicated  IsTo.  94,  observing  what  fol- 
lows ;  he  will  take  post  abreast  of  the  division 
next  to  the  last. 

177.  To  ploy  the  battalion  in  front  of  the  first 
division,  the  colonel  will  give  the  same  com- 
mands, substituting  the  indication  left  for  that 
of  right  in  front. 


SCHOOL    OF  THE    BATTALION PAET   II.         43 

178.  At  the  second  and  third  commands,  the 
chiefs  of  division  and  the  junior  captains  will 
conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  Nos. 
160,  162,  163  ;  but  the  chiefs  of  the  last  three 
divisions,  instead  of  causing  the  first  three  files  to 
break  to  the  rear,  will  cause  them  to  break  to 
the  front. 

0-179.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of 
platoon  of  the  companies  of  skirmishers,  will 
place  himself  as  indicated  Xo.  161  ;  each  chief 
of  platoon  of  tlie  first  company  will  caution  his 
platoon  to  face  to  the  left,  and  each  chief  of 
platoon  of  the  second  company  will  caution  his 
platoon  to  face  to  the  right. 
0-180.  At  the  tliird  command,  the  companies 
will  face  to  the  left  and  right  respectively,  and 
tlic  chiefs  and  guides  of  platoons  will  execute 
what  is  prescribed  Xo.  164. 

181.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  add :    Guide  right. 

182.  The  three  other  divisions  will  step  ofi" 
together  to  take  their  places  in  the  column  in 
fiont  of  the  directing  division ;  each  will  direct 
itself  as  prescribed  Xo.  166,  and  will  enter  in 
such  manner  that,  when  halted,  its  guide  may 
find  himself  six  paces  from  the  guide  of  the 
division  next  previously  established  in  the  col- 
umn. 

183.  Each  chief  of  these  divisions  will  con- 
duct his  division,  till  his  right  guide  shall  be 
nearly  up  with  the  guide  of  the  directing  one ; 
he  will  then  halt  his  division,  and  cause  it  to 
face  to  the  front ;  at  the  instant  it  halts,  its  right 
guide  will  face  to  the  rear,  place  himself  six 


44         SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET   H. 

paces  from  tlie  preceding  gnide,  and  cover  him 
exactly — which  being  done,  the  chief  will  alfgn 
his  division  by  the  right. 

0-184.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  second  pla- 
toon of  the  first,  and  the  first  platoon  of  the 
second  company  of  skirmishers  will  stand  fast ; 
the  first  platoon  of  the  first  company  of  skir- 
mishers will  ploy  in  close  order  in  the  rear  of  its 
second,  and  the  second  platoon  of  the  second 
company  will  ploy  in  front  of  its  first  platoon, 
and  when  the  guides  of  the  first  and  second 
platoons  shall  be  nearly  up  with  the  guides  of 
the  second  and  first,  respectively,  the  captain  of 
the  first  company  will  command :  1.  Company 
forward.  2.  Guide  right.  3.  Maech  {or  double 
quick — Maech),  and  the  captain  of  the  second 
company  will  command  : 

1.    Company  forward.    2.   Ghiide  left.    3.  Maech 
(or  double  quick — Maech). 

0-185.  At  this,  the  platoon  columns  will  direct 
themselves  diagonally  to  the  front,  and  toward 
the  points  around  which  the  platoons  will  have  to 
file,  each  second  platoon,  conducted  by  its  chief, 
will  take  the  shortest  line  to  the  point  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  first  and  last  division  respective- 
ly, the  platoon  of  the  first  column,  at  the  distance 
prescribed  No.  102,  and  the  platoon  of  the  second 
column  at  a  distance  of  about  thirty-three  paces : 
the  first  platoons  will  conform  to  the  movements  of 
the  second,  and  the  platoons  will  execute  what  is 
prescribed  No.  172-3.  When  halted  and  faced  to 
the  front  the  platoons  will  be  dressed  to  the  right 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PART  II.    45 

186.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  in  front  of 
the  right  guide  of  the  first  division,  will  assure 
the  guides  on  the  direction  as  they  successively 
arrive,  and  then  move  outside  of  the  right  flank 
of  the  column,  to  a  point  six  paces  from,  and 
abreast  with,  the  fourth  division,  now  in  front. 

187.  The  senior  major  will  conform  himself  to 
what  is  prescribed  No.  176,  and  then  move  out- 
side of  the  right  flank  of  the  column,  six  paces 
from,  and  abreast  with,  the  first  division  now  in 
the  rear.  The  junior  major  will  conform  to  the 
movements  of  the  column  and  then  take  post  as 
indicated  No.  176. 

188.  The  movement  being  ended,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

Guides^  about — Face. 

189.  At  this,  the  guides,  who  are  faced  to  tlie 
rear,  will  face  to  the  front. 

190.  To  ploy  the  battalion  in  rear,  or  in  front 
of  the  fourth  division,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Close  column  ht/ division .  2.  On  the  fourth 
division  left  (or  right)  in  front.  3.  Battalion 
left — Face.  4.  March  (or  double  quick — ; 
March). 

191.  These  movements  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  of  those  which  precede,  but 
by  inverse  means  ;  the  fourth  division  on  which 
the  battalion  ploys  will  stand  fast ;  the  instant 
the  movement  commences,  its  chief  will  com- 
mand, guide  right  (or  left). 


46  SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PART    11. 

0-192.  These  movements  will  be  executed  by  the 
companies  of  skirmishers,  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples which  have  been  laid  down,  but  by  in- 
verse means. 

193.  The  foregoing  examples  embrace  all  the 
principles :  thus,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
ploy  the  battalion  on  an  interior  division,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Close  column  hy  division.  2.  On  such  division 
right  (or  left)  in  front.  3.  Battalion  imcards 
— Face.   4.  Maech  (or  double  quich — March.) 

194.  The  instant  the  movement  commences, 
the  chief  of  the  directing  division  wiU  command 
guide  left  (or  right). 

195.  The  divisions  which,  in  the  order  in  bat- 
tle, are  to  the  right  of  the  directing  division,  will 
face  to  the  left ;  those  which  are  to  the  left  will 
face  to  the  right. 

196.  If  the  right  is  to  be  in  front,  the  right 
divisions  will  ploy  in  front  of  the  directing  divis- 
ion, and  the  left  in  its  rear ;  the  reverse,  if  the 
left  is  to  be  in  front.  And  in  all  the  foregoing 
suppositions,  the  division  or  divisions  contiguous 
to  the  directing  one,  in  wheeling  by  file  to  the 
front  or  rear,  will  gain  the  space  of  six  paces, 
which  ought  to  separate  their  guides  from  the 
guide  of  the  directing  division. 

0-197.  In  these  movements  the  companies  of 
skirmishers  will  be  governed  by  the  principles 
heretofore  laid  down. 

198.  In  all  the  ployments  on  an  interior  divis- 
ion, the  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  the  posi- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET   II.  47 

tions  of  the  guides  in  front,  and  the  senior  major 
those  in  rear  of  the  directing  division. 

199.  If  the  battaUon  be  in  march,  instead  of 
at  a  halt,  the  movement  will  be  executed  by  com- 
bining the  two  gaits  of  quick  and  double  quick 
time,  and  always  in  rear  of  one  of  the  flank  di- 
visions. 

200.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it 
in  rear  of  the  first  division,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  Close  column  ly  divmon.  2.  On  tJie  first  di- 
vision. 3.  BattaUon — hy  the  right  JianTc.  4. 
Maech  (or  double  quicTc — Maech). 

201.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of 
division  will  move  rapidly  before  the  centre  of 
his  division  and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right. 

202.  The  chief  of  the  first  division  will  cau- 
tion it  to  continue  to  march  to  the  front,  and  he 
will  command  :    Quich  time. 

0-203.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of 
platoon  of  the  companies  of  skirmishers  will 
move  rapidly  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  pla- 
toon and  caution  it  to  face  by  the  right  flank,  the 
chief  of  each  first  platoon,  will  command  :  Quick 
time. 

204.  At  the  command  marc\  the  first  division 
will  march  in  quick  time,  and  its  chief  will  com- 
mand: Guide  left.  At  this,  the  left  guide  will 
move  to  the  left  flank  of  the  division  and  direct 
himself  on  the  point  indicated. 

205.  The  three  other  divisions  will  face  to  th© 
right  and  move  off  in  double  quick  time,  breakiqg 


48  SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET   II. 

to  the  right  to  take  their  places  in  cohimn ;  each 
chief  of  di\ision  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right 
of  his  division  in  order  to  conduct  it.  The  files 
will  be  careful  to  preserve  their  distances,  and  to 
march  with  a  uniform  and  decided  step.  The 
color-bearer  and  general  guides  will  retake  their 
places  in  the  ranks. 

206.  The  second  division  will  immediately 
enter  the  column,  marching  parallel  to  the  first 
division;  its  chief  will  allow  it  to  file  past  him, 
and  when  the  last  file  is  abreast  of  him,  will 
command:  1.  Second  division,  hy  the  leftjlanh — 
Maech.  2.  Guide  left,  and  place  himself  in  front 
of  the  centre  of  his  division. 
^07.  At  the  command  niarch^  the  division  will 
face  to  the  left ;  at  the  second  command,  the  left 
guide  will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  left  guide  of 
the  first  division  ;  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of 
elbows  to  the  left.  When  the  second  division 
has  closed  to  its  proper  distance,  its  chief  will 
command :  Quich  time — Maech.  This  division 
will  then  change  its  step  to  quick  time. 

208.  The  chiefs  of  the  third  and  fourth  divis- 
!t>ns  will  execute  their  movements  according  to 
the  same  principles,  taking  care  to  gain  as  much 
ground  as  possible  toward  the  head  of  the 
column. 

0-209.  At  the  command  inarch  by  the  colonel, 
each  platoon  of  the  companies  of  skirmishers, 
will  face  by  the  right  fiank,  the  chiefs  will  has- 
ten to  the  right  of  their  platoons,  each  second 
platoon  breaking  to  the  rear,  in  order  to  take  its 
place  in  the  platoon  column,  and  when  the  guide 
is  nearly  up  with  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon,  the 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX PAET  11.  49 

captain  will  command  :  1.  Column  guide  right, 
2.  Double  quick — March. 

0-210.  The  platoon-cohirans  will  be  conducted 
diagonally  toward  the  points  around  which  they 
are  to  file  as  indicated  Nos.  172,  173  and  when 
the  left  file  of  each  platoon,  shall  arrive  nearly 
up  to  its  chief,  he  will  command  \  \.  By  the 
leftjianlc.     2.   Quiclc  march.     3.   Guide  left. 

211.  If  the  battalion  had  been  previously  march- 
ing in  line  at  double  quick  time,  when  the  fourth 
division  shall  have  gained  its  distance,  the  colonel 
(should  he  wish  to  resume  that  gait)  will  com- 
mand: Double  5'?nVX:— Maech. 

212.  In  this  movement,  the  lieutenant-colonel 
will  move  rapidly  to  the  side  of  the  leading  guide, 
give  him  a  point  of  direction,  and  then  follow  the 
movements  of  the  first  division.  The  senior  ma- 
jor will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with  the 
left  of  the  fourth  division. 

EEMARKS    ON    PLOYIXG   THE    BATTALLION    INTO 
COLUMN. 

213.  The  battalion  may  be  ployed  into  column 
at  full,  or  half  distance,  on  the  same  principles, 
and  by  the  same  commands,  substituting  for  the 
first  command  :  Column  at  full  (or  lialf)  distance 
hy  division. 

The  battalion  will  not  be  ^Aoyed  at  full  distance 
unless  with  a  view  to  the  route  step. 

214.  In  the  ployments  and  movements  in  col- 
umn, when  the  subdivisions  execute  the  move- 
ments successively,  such  as — to  take  or  close  dis- 
tances ;  to  change  direction  by  the  flank  of  sub- 
divisions each  chief  of  subdivision  will  cause  his 

YOL.  IL— 5 


50         SCHOOL    OF   THE   BATTALION PAET    III. 

men  to  support  arms  after  having  aligned  it  and 
commanded  Front. 

0-215.  When  the  battalion  is  ployed  into  column, 
either  at  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass,  each 
company  of  skirmishers  will  ploy  into  columns 
closed  in  mass. 

PAET  THIED. 

Aeticle  I. 

To  march  in  column  at  full  distance. 

216.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  put  the 
column  in  march,  he  will  indicate  to  the  leading 
guide  two  distinct  objects  in  front,  on  the  line 
which  the  guide  ought  to  follow.  This  guide  will 
immediately  put  his  shoulders  in  a  square  with 
that  line,  take  the  more  distant  object  as  the 
point  of  direction,  and  the  nearer  one  as  the  in- 
termediate point. 

217.  If  only  a  single  prominent  object  present 
itself  in  the  direction  the  guide  has  to  follow,  he 
will  face  to  it  as  before,  and  immediately  endeavor 
to  catch  on  the  ground  some  intermediate  point, 
by  which  to  give  steadiness  to  his  march  on  the 
point  of  direction, 

218.  There  being  no  prominent  object  to  serve 
as  the  point  of  direction,  the  colonel  will  dispatch 
the  lieutenant-colonel  or  adjutant  to  place  him- 
self forty  paces  in  advance,  facing  the  column,  and 
by  a  sign  of  the  sword  establish  him  on  the  direc- 
tion he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  leading  guide ; 
that  oflBlcer  being  thus  placed,  this  guide  wifi  take 


fnl 


Fl  4. 


i 


q ^7V  tOth£ 

\rvrv  at  ruU 


T~ 

- 

a 

'!_- 

q— 

V 

□ 

- 

V 

FigA 


5  .-  :2 


■>  -:: 


-XJ[ 


u 


chool  of  the    Battaliaii. 


& 


it 


Tiq.3. 


FujA. 


Fuf.  2. 

at  rull 

1 p 

To  cJtangc  direction  t 
the  right  in  foiumri 
distaiia.A^-'27S. 

Ill 
III 

T"^ 

IJ                 Lj                 T 

r 

L 

" 

■\    ,._^p 

1 1 

-      ^ 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PAET   III.        51 

him  as  the  point  of  direction,  conforming  himself 
to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  S.  C,  No.  87. 

219.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command: 


1.   Column  forward.     2.  Guide  left  (or  right.) 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — Maech). 

220.  At  the  command  7narch,  briskly  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  subdivision,  and  the  chiefs  of 
platoon  of  the  companies  of  skirmishers,  the 
column  will  put  itself  in  march,  conforming  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  S.  C,  No.  205  and  fol- 
lowing. 

221.  The  leading  guide  may  always  maintain 
himself  correctly  on  the  direction  by  keeping 
steadily  in  view  the  two  points  indicated  to  him, 
or  chosen  by  himself;  if  these  points  have  a  cer- 
tain elevation,  he  may  be  assured  he  is  on  the 
true  direction,  when  the  nearer  masks  the  moro 
distant  point. 

222.  The  following  guides  will  preserve  with 
exactness  both  step  and  distance ;  each  will  march 
in  the  trace  of  the  guide  who  immediately  pre- 
cedes him,  without  occupying  himself  with  the 
general  direction. 

223.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  hold  himself, 
habitually,  abreast  with  the  leading  guide,  to  see 
that  he  does  not  deviate  from  the  direction,  and 
will  observe,  also,  that  the  next  guide  marches 
exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  first. 

224.  The  senior  major  will  generally  be  abreast 
with  the  last  subdivision ;  he  will  see  that  each 


52         SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    III. 

guide  marches  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  one 
immediately  preceding ;  if  either  deviate  from 
the  direction,  the  senior  major  will  promptly 
rectify  the  error,  and  prevent  its  being  propa- 
gated; but  he  need  not  interfere,  in  this  way, 
unless  the  deviation  has  become  sensible,  or  ma- 
terial. The  junior  major  will  take  part  as  indi- 
cated 'No.  94. 

225.  The  column  being  in  march,  the  colonel 
may  cause  the  about  to  be  executed  while  march- 
ing ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Battalion^  right  about.     2.  Maech. 
8.   G-uide  right. 

226.  At  the  second  command,  the  companies 
will  face  to  the  right  about,  and  the  column  will 
then  march  forward  in  an  opposite  direction ; 
the  chiefs  of  subdivision  will  remain  behind  the 
front  rank,  the  file  closers  in  front  of  the  rear 
rank,  and  the  guides  will  place  themselves  in  the 
rear  rank,  now  in  front.  The  second  platoons  of 
the  platoon  columns  will  march  abreast  with  the 
first  and  last  battalion  companies  respectively. 
The  lieutenant-colonel  will  remain  abreast  of  the 
first  division,  now  in  the  rear ;  the  senior  major 
will  give  a  point  of  direction  to  the  leading  guide, 
and  march  abreast  of  him. 

227.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  habitually 
on  the  directing  fiank ;  he  will  look  to  the  step 
and  to  the  distances,  and  see  that  all  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  for  the  march  in  column,  school 
of  the  company,  arc  observed. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    III.         53 

MANNEK    OF    PROLONGING    A    LINE    OF    BATTLE    BY 
MAEKEES. 

228.  When  a  column  prolongs  itself  on  the 
line  of  Lattle,  it  being  all-important  that  the 
guides  march  correctly  on  that  line,  it  becomes 
necessary  that  colonels,  lieutenant-colonels,  and 
senior  majors,  whose  duty  it  is  to  maintain  the 
true  direction,  should  be  able  to  see,  as  far  as 
practicable,  the  two  objects,  on  which  the  march 
of  the  guides  ought  to  be  directed;  consequently, 
when  no  prominent  objects  present  tliemselves  in 
the  desired  direction,  the  chief  of  the  column  will 
supply  the  want  of  them  in  advance  by  aids-de- 
camp, or  other  mounted  officers,  and  in  such  num- 
ber as  may  be  necessary. 

229.  Three  such  officers  may  prolong  a  line  as 
far  as  may  be  desired  in  the  following  manner: 
they  will  place  themselves  in  advance  on  the  line 
of  battle,  the  first  at  the  point  where  the  head  of 
the  cohimn  ought  to  enter ;  the  second,  three  or 
four  hundred  paces  beliind  the  first ;  and  the 
third,  a  like  distance  behind  the  second.  The 
first  of  these  ofiicers  will  remain  in  position  till 
the  leading  guide  shall  have  entered  on  the  line 
of  battle,  and  then,  at  a  gallop,  place  himself  at  a 
convenient  distance  behind  the  third.  The  second 
will  do  the  like  in  respect  to  the  first,  when  the 
head  of  the  column  shall  be  near  him,  and  so 
on  in  continuation.  These  officers,  without  dis- 
mounting, will  face  to  the  column,  and  cover  each 
other  accurately.  It  will  be  on  them  that  the 
guides  will  steadily  direct  tlieir  march,  and  it  will 
be  BO  much  the  more  easy  for  the  latter  to  main- 

1* 


54        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    UI. 

tain  themselves  on  the  direction,  as  they  will  al- 
ways be  able  to  see  the  mounted  officers  over  the 
heads  of  the  preceding  guides ;  thus  the  deviation 
from  the  direction,  by  one  or  more  guides,  need 
not  mislead  those  who  follow. 

230.  A  single  mounted  officer  may  suffice  to 
assure  the  direction  of  a  column,  when  the  point 
of  direction  toward  which  it  marches  is  very  dis- 
tinct. In  this  case,  that  officer  will  place  himself 
on  the  line  of  battle  within  that  point.and  beyond 
the  one  at  which  the  head  of  the  column  will  halt, 
and  remain  in  position  till  the  column  halts ; 
serving  thus  as  the  intermediate  point  for  giving 
steadiness  to  the  march  of  the  guides. 

231-  For  a  column  of  one  or  two  battalions, 
markers  on  foot  will  suffice  to  indicate  the  line 
to  be  followed  by  the  general  guides. 

EEMAEKS    ON   THE    MARCH    IN    COLUMN. 

232.  The  subdivisions  of  a  column  will  not 
maintain  the  full  distance,  for  any  considerable 
length  of  time,  unless  in  the  route  step,  or  upon 
reviews  or  other  movements  of  ceremony.  In 
presence  of  the  enemy,  the  column  will  habitu- 
ally be  either  at  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass. 

233.  Although  the  uncadenced  step  be  that  of 
columns  in  route  marches,  and  also  that  which 
ought  to  be  habitually  employed  in  the  Evolutions 
of  a  Brigade^  when  not  in  the  immediate  presence 
of  the  enemy,  and  when  the  difficulty  of  the  road, 
heat,  or  dust,  should  render  it  expedient,  never- 
theless, as  it  is  of  paramount  importance  to  con- 
firm soldiers  in  the  measure  and  the  movement 


m  'J. 


5& 


^ 


{fig/. 


T:r. 


ut 

X- 

id 
m 

tj 
w 
e- 

10 

le 

Q- 

le 

i; 

m 

10 

o> 
m 
le 
jh 

»g 
id 
)f 

at 

>f 
le 

r© 

e, 

&- 
3r 
is 

il 


Vol.  2. 


Scliool   of  tlie    BattaHoit. 

*-       Siiqhl  ,-h.i'uics  orcfireclioi 


t 


,i,..i„,u.-  .vr2J.j. 


ncf.i 


-.^ 

\ 

'/.; 

=■ 

■ifj  2  '■ 

h 

J'^__-_.^     '^ 

■L             r 

P 

Fuj  i 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION PAET   IH.        5b 

of  the  cadenced  pace,  the  route  step  will  be  but 
little  practised  in  the  exercises  bj  battalion,  ex- 
cept in  going  to,  and  returning  from,  the  ground 
of  instruction,  and  for  teaching  the  mechanism 
and  movements  of  columns  in  route. 

234.  It  is  highly  essential  to  the  regularity 
of  the  march  in  column  that  each  guide  follow 
exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  one  immediately  pre- 
ceding, without  occupying  his  attention  with  the 
general  direction  of  the  guides.  If  this  principle 
be  steadily  observed,  the  guides  will  find  them- 
selves aligned,  provided  that  the  leading  one 
march  exactly  in  the  direction  indicated  to  him; 
and  even  should  obstacles  in  his  way  force  him 
into  a  momentary  deviation,  the  direction  of  the 
column  would  not  necessarily  be  changed ;  where- 
as,  if  the  following  guides  endeavor  to  conform 
themselves  at  once  to  all  the  movements  of  the 
leading  one,  in  order  to  cover  him  in  file,  such 
endeavors  would  necessarily  cause  corresponding 
fluctuations  in  the  column,  from  right  to  left,  and 
from  left  to  right,  and  render  the  preservation  of 
distances  extremely  difficult. 

235.  As  a  consequence  of  the  principle,  thafe 
each  guide  shall  exactly  follow  in  the  trace  of 
the  one  who  immediately  precedes^  if,  pending  the 
march  of  the  column,  the  colonel  shall  give  a  new 
point  of  direction,  too  near  to  the  first  to  require 
a  formal  change  of  direction,  the  leading  guide, 
advancing  the  one  or  other  shoulder,  will  imme- 
diately direct  himself  on  this  point ;  the  other 
guides  will  only  conform  themselves  to  this 
movement  as  each  arrives  at  the  point  at  which 
the  first  had  executed  it.    Each  subdivision  will 


56        SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALIOX PART    III. 

conform  itself  to  the  movement  of  its  guide,  the 
men  insensibly  lengthening  or  shortening  the 
step,  and  advancing  or  refusing  (throwing  back) 
the  shoulder  opposite  to  the  guide,  but  without 
losing  the  touch  of  the  elbow  toward  his  side. 

236.  The  column,  at  full  distance,  by  company, 
being  in  march,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  di- 
minish front  by  platoon,  from  front  to  rear,  at 
once,  and  to  increase  front  by  platoon  in  like 
manner,  which  movements  will  be  commanded 
and  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  S.  6'.,  !N'os. 
287  and  278  and  follo^ving,  changing  the  com- 
mand form  company  to  form  companies.  So 
may  he  increase  and  dimuiish,  or  diminish  and 
increase  front,  according  to  the  same  principles 
and  at  once,  by  company,  changing  the  command 
form  companies  to  form  divisions^  and  the  com- 
mand Ireah  into i^latoons^  to  hreah  into  companies. 
In  this  case,  the  companies  and  divisions  will  exe- 
cute what  is  prescribed  for  platoons  and  compa- 
nies respectively. 

237.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  colonel 
should  wish  to  march  it  to  the  rear,  and  the  dis- 
tance to  be  gained  be  so  iuconsiderable  as  to  ren- 
der a  countermarch  a  disproportionate  loss  of 
time,  he  will  cause  the  column  to  face  about, 
and  then  put  it  in  march  by  the  commands  pre- 
scribed Xo.  219  ;  the  chiefs  of  the  subdivisions 
will  remain  behind  the  front  rank,  the  file  closers 
before  the  rear  rank,  and  the  guides  will  step 
into  the  rear  rank,  now  in  front.  In  a  column, 
by  division,  the  junior  captains,  in  the  intervals 
between  companies,  will  replace  their  covering 
sergeants  in  the  rear  rank,  and  these  sergeants 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    Ul.         57 

will  step  into  the  line  of  file  closers  in  front  of 

their  intervals. 

0-238.  In  the  different  movements  of  the  column, 

the    companies  of  skirmishers,  if  present,  will 

preserve   their  relative  positions  thereto;    the 

platoon  guides  will  always  be  on  the  side  of  the 

column. 

Aeticle  II. 

Column  in  route. 

239.  A  column  in  route,  ought  never  to  have 
a  depth  greater  than  about  the  front  it  had  oc- 
cupied in  the  line  of  battle,  less  the  front  of  a 
subdivision. 

240.  The  observance  of  this  principle  requires 
particular  rule ;  as  a  column  in  route  may  have 
hourly  to  pass  narrow  ways,  bridges,  or  other 
defiles,  rendering  it  necessary  to  diminish  the 
front  of  subdivisions,  it  becomes  important  to 
give  rules  and  means  by  which  the  column  may, 
for  any  length  of  march,  preserve  the  ease  of 
the  route  step  without  elongation  from  front  to 
rear. 

241.  A  column  in  route  will  be  habitually 
formed  by  company. 

242.  When  a  column  in  route  shall  arrive  at  a 
pass  too  narrow  to  receive  the  front  of  a  com- 
pany, the  column  will  dLminish  front  by  platoon 
before  entering.  This  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted successively,  or  by  all  the  companies  at 
once. 

243.  If;  however,  the  defile  be  very  short,  and 
it  may  be  passed  by  the  diminution  of  a  few  files, 


58        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    IIL 

it  will  be  preferable  to  break  to  the  rear  the  lim- 
ited number  of  files. 

244.  The  column  being  bj  platoon,  and  the 
want  of  space  rendering  a  further  diminution 
of  front  necessary,  it  will  be  diminished  by  sec- 
tion, if  the  platoons  be  of  twelve  or  more  files. 

245.  The  column  being  by  section,  will  con- 
tinue to  march  by  that  front  as  long  as  the  defile 
may  permit. 

246.  If  the  platoons  have  less  than  twelve 
files,  one  or  two  files  will  be  broken  to  the  rear, 
according  to  the  narrowing  of  the  defile,  and  the 
route  step  continued  as  long  as  six  files  can 
march  abreast. 

247.  What  has  just  been  explained  for  break- 
ing files  to  the  rear  in  a  column  by  platoon,  is 
equally  applicable  to  a  column  by  section. 

248.  If  the  defile  be  too  narrow  to  permit  six 
men  to  march  abreast,  the  subdivisions  will  be 
marched  successively  by  the  flank,  conforming 
to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  *S'.  6'.,  Nos.  319  and 
320. 

249.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  flank,  will  be 
formed  into  column,  by  section,  by  platoon,  or  by 
company,  as  soon  as  the  breadth  of  the  way  may 
permit ;  the  several  movements  which  these  for- 
mations include  will  be  executed  by  the  commands 
of  the  captains,  as  their  companies  successively 
clear  the  defile,  observing  the  following  rules. 

250.  As  soon  as  the  way  is  sufficiently  broad 
to  contain  six  men  abreast,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  By  section  (or  by  platoon)  into  line.  2.  Mabch. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    III.         59 

251.  -^t  the  command  march^  the  subdivisions 
indicated  will  form  themselves  into  line ;  the 
files  which  have  not  been  able  to  enter,  will  fol- 
low (by  the  flank;  the  last  four  files  of  their  sub- 
division which  have  entered  into  line. 

252.  Ihe  column  marching  in  this  order,  the 
files  in  rear  will  be  caused  to  enter  into  line  as 
the  increased  breadth  of  the  way  may  permit. 

253.  The  column  marching  by  section  or  by 
platoon,  platoons  or  com])anies  will  be  formed  as 
Boon  as  the  breadth  of  the  way  may  permit. 

254.  The  leading  subdivision  will  follow  the 
windings  of  the  pass  or  defile  ;  the  following 
subdivisions  will  not  occupy  themselves  with  the 
direction,  but  all,  in  succession,  pass  over  the 
trace,  of  the  subdivisions  which  precede  them 
respectively.  The  men  will  not  seek  to  avoid 
the  bad  parts  of  the  way.  but  pass,  as  far  as 
practicable,  each  in  the  direction  of  his  file. 

255.  Changes  of  direction  will  always  be  made 
without  command  ;  if  the  change  be  important, 

caution  merely  from  the  respective  chiefs  to 
their  subdivisions  will  suffice,  and  the  rear  rank, 

well  as  the  files  broken  to  the  rear,  will  exe- 
cute successively  the  movement  where  the  front 
rank  had  executed  it. 

256.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  at  the  head 
of  the  battalion ;  he  will  regulate  the  step  of 
the  leading  subdivision,  and  indicate  to  its  chief 
the  instant  for  executing  the  various  movements 
which  the  nature  of  the  route  may  render  neces- 
sary. 

257.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several 
battalions,  each  will  conform  itself,  in  its  turn^ 


60         SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    III. 

to  what  shall  have  heen  commanded  for  the  lead- 
ing battalion,  observing  to  execute  each  move- 
ment at  the  same  place  and  in  the  same  man- 
ner. 

258.  Finally,  to  render  the  mechanism  of  all 
those  movements  familiar  to  the  troops,  and  to 
habituate  them  to  march  in  the  route  step  with- 
out elongating  the  colunm,  commanders  will 
generally  cause  their  battalions  to  march  in  this 
step,  going  to,  and  returning  from,  fields  of  ex- 
ercise. Each  will  occasionally  conduct  his  bat- 
talion through  narrow  passes,  in  order  to  make 
it  perceive  the  utility  of  the  principles  prescribed 
above ;  and  he  will  several  times,  in  every  course 
of  instruction,  march  it  in  the  route  step,  and 
cause  to  be  executed,  sometimes  at  once,  and 
sometimes  successively,  the  divers  movements 
which  have  just  been  indicated. 
0-259.  On  marches,  the  companies  of  skirmish- 
ers, if  present,  will  habitually  take  post  in  the 
column,  the  first  company  in  front  of  the  first, 
and  the  second  company  of  skirmishers  in  rear 
of  the  last  battalion  company.  The  junior 
major  will  in  this  case  take  post  abreast  of  the 
color  company,  and  six  paces  from  its  reverse 
flank. 

GENEEAL  r.EMAEKS  OX  THE  COLUMIT  IN"  EOTJTE.    ' 

260.  The  lesson  relative  to  the  column  in  route 
is,  by  its  frequent  application,  one  of  the  most 
important  that  can  be  given  to  troops.  If  it  ba 
not  well  taught  and  established  on  right  princi- 
ples, it  will  happen  that  the  rear  of  the  column 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX PAET    III.         61 

in  route  will  be  obliged  to  run,  to  regain  dis- 
tances, or  that  the  front  will  be  forced  to  halt 
till  the  rear  shall  have  accomplished  that  object; 
thus  rendering  the  march  greatly  slower,  or 
greatly  more  fatiguing,  generally  both,  than  if 
it  were  executed  according  to  rule. 

261.  The  ordinary  progress  of  a  column  in 
route  ought  to  be,  on  good  roads  or  good  grounds, 
at  the  rate  of  one  hundred  and  ten  paces  in  a 
minute.  This  rate  may  be  easily  maintained  by 
columns  of  almost  any  depth;  but  over  bad 
roads,  ploughed  fields,  loose  sands,  or  mountain- 
ous districts,  the  progress  cannot  be  so  great, 
and  must  therefore  be  regulated  according  to 
circumstances. 

262.  The  most  certain  means  of  marching 
well  in  route,  is  to  preserve  always  a  regular 
and  equal  movement,  and,  if  obstacles  oblige  one 
or  more  subdivisions  to  slacken  or  to  shorten 
the  step,  to  cause  the  primitive  rate  of  march 
to  be  resumed  the  moment  the  difficulties  are 
passed. 

263.  A  subdivision  ought  never  to  take  more 
than  the  prescribed  distance  from  the  subdivision 
immediately  preceding ;  but  it  is  sometimes  neces- 
sary to  lessen  that  distance. 

264.  Thus :  the  head  of  the  column  encoun- 
ters an  obstacle  which  obliges  it  to  relax  its 
march;  all  the  following  subdivisions  will  pre- 
serve the  habitual  step,  and  close  up  in  mass,  if 
necessary,  on  the  subdivision  nearest  to  the  ob- 
stacle. Distances  will  afterward  naturally  be 
recovered  as  each  subdivision  shall  successively 
have  passed  the  obstacle.     Nevertheless,  if  the 

VOL.  IL— 6 


62        SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    III. 

difficulty  be  too  great  to  be  overcome  by  one 
subdivision,  whilst  the  next  is  closing  up,  so  that 
distances  cannot  afterward  be  recovered  with- 
out running,  the  chief  of  the  column  will  halt 
the  leading  subdivision  beyond  the  obstacle,  at  a 
distance  sufficient  to  contain  the  whole  column 
in  mass.  He  will  then  put  the  column  in  march, 
the  subdivisions  taking  distances  by  the  head, 
observing  to  commence  the  movement  in  time, 
so  that  the  last  subdivision  may  not  be  obliged 
to  halt,  after  having  cleared  the  obstacle. 

265.  When  the  chief  of  a  column  shall  wish 
to  change  the  rate  of  march,  he  will  cause  the 
leading  battalion  to  quicken  or  to  relax  the  step 
insensibly,  and  send  orders  to  the  other  battal- 
ions each  to  regulate  itself  by  that  which  pre- 
cedes it. 

266.  The  column  being  composed  of  several 
battalions,  the  general  will  always  leave  an  aid- 
de-camp  with  its  rear  to  bring  him  prompt  infor- 
mation if  it  find  a  difficulty  in  following. 

267.  Subdivisions  ought  always  to  step  out 
well  in  obliquing,  both  in  breaking  and  forming 
companies  or  platoons.  When  either  is  done  in 
succession,  it  is  highly  important  that  no  subdi- 
vision slacken  or  shorten  the  step  while  that 
which  precedes  it  is  engaged  in  the  movement. 
The  observance  of  this  principle  can  alone  pre- 
vent an  elongation  of  the  column. 

268.  If  the  battalion,  marching  by  the  flank, 
encounter  a  pass  so  narrow  as  to  oblige  it  to  de- 
file with  a  front  of  two  men,  the  colonel  will 
order  support  arms,  take  the  cadenced  step,  and 
undouble  the  files,  which  will  be  executed  as  pre- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PART   III.         63 

scribed  in  the  S.  (7.,  No.  331;  the  files  will 
double  again  as  soon  as  the  breadth  of  the  way 
will  permit. 

269.  If  the  defile  be  only  sufficient  to  receive 
a  front  of  one  man,  the  colonel  will  cause  the 
men  to  pass  one  at  a  time,  which  will  be  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed  in  the  xS'.  C,  Nos.  334  and 
335.  The  men  of  the  same  file  should  follow 
each  other  in  their  order  as  closely  as  possible, 
and  without  loss  of  time.  As  soon  as  the  defile 
permits  a  front  of  two  or  four  men,  the  battal- 
ion will  be  re-formed  into  two  or  four  ranks,  as 
prescribed  in  the  S.  C,  Nos.  336,  33T,  338,  and 
339,  and  will  march  in  this  order  until  there  be 
space  to  form  platoons  or  sections,  as  indicated 
No.  250. 

270.  In  both  cases,  just  supposed,  the  head 
of  the  battalion,  after  having  passed  the  defile, 
will  march  till  sufficient  space  be  left  to  contain 
the  whole  of  the  subdivisions  in  mass ;  afterward 
it  will  be  put  in  march  by  the  means  indicate-d 
No.  264. 

271.  When  a  command  has  to  move  rapidly 
over  a  given  distance,  the  movements  prescribed 
in  this  article  will  be  executed  in  double  quick, 
time ;  if  the  distance  be  long,  the  chief  of  the 
column  will  not  allow  the  march  at  this  gait  to 
be  continued  for  more  than  fifteen  minutes  ;  at 
the  end  of  this  time,  he  will  order  the  ordinary 
route  step  to  be  marched  for  five  minutes,  and 
then  again  resume  the  double  quick.  If  the 
ground  be  uneven,  having  considerable  ascents 
and  descents,  he  will  reserve  the  double  quick  for 


64        SOq/>OL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    in. 

those  parts  of  the  ground  most  favorable  to  fiii^ 
march. 

272.  A  column  marching  alternately  in  douMe 
quick  time  and  the  ordinary  route  step,  in  the 
manner  stated,  can  easily  accomplish  very  long 
distances  in  a  very  short  space  of  time ;  but  when 
the  distance  to  be  passed  over  is  not  greater  than 
two  miles,  it  ought  to  be  accomplished,  when  the 
ground  is  favorable,  without  changing  the  rate 
of  march. 

Article  III. 
To  change  direction  in  colunxn  at  full  distance. 

273.  The  column  being  in  march  in  the  oa- 
denced  step,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause 
it  to  change  direction,  he  will  go  to  the  point  at 
which  the  change  ought  to  be  commenced  and 
establish  a  marker  there,  presenting  the  breast 
to  the  flank  of  the  column  ;  this  marker,  no  mat- 
ter to  which  side  the  change  of  direction  is  to  be 
made,  will  be  posted  on  the  opposite  side,  and  he 
will  remain  in  position  till  the  last  subdivision 
of  the  battalion  shall  have  passed.  The  leading 
subdivision  being  within  a  few  paces  of  the 
marker,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Head  of  column  to  the  left  (or  right). 

274.  At  this,  the  chief  of  the  leading  subdi- 
vision will  immediately  take  the  guide  on  the 
side  opposite  the  change  of  direction,  if  noJt  al- 
ready there.  This  guide  will  direct  himself, so 
as  to  graze  the  breast  of  the  marker  ;  arrived  at 


SCHOOL    OF    THE  BATTALION PART    III.         65 

this  point,  the  chief  will  canse  his  subdivision 
to  change  direction  bv  the  commands  and  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  company.  When  the  wheel  is  completed, 
the  chief  of  this  subdivision  will  retake  the 
guide,  if  changed,  on  the  side  of  the  primitive 
direction. 

275.  The  chief  of  each  succeeding  subdivi- 
sion, as  well  as  the  guides,  will  conform  to 
what  has  just  been  explained  for  the  leading 
subdivision. 

276.  The  colonel  will  carefully  see  that  the 
guide  of  each  subdivision,  in  wheeling,  does  not 
throw  himself  without  or  within,  but  passes 
over  all  the  points  of  the  arc  of  the  circle,  which 
he  ought  to  describe. 

277.  As  often  as  no  distinct  object  presents 
itself  in  the  new  direction,  the  lieutenant-colo- 
nel will  place  himself  upon  it  in  advance,  at  the 
distance  of  thirty  or  forty  paces  from  the  marker, 
and  be  assured  in  this  direction  by  the  colonel ; 
the  leading  guide  will  take,  the  moment  he  shall 
have  changed  direction,  two  points  on  the  ground 
in  the  straight  line  which,  drawn  from  himself, 
would  pass  between  the  heels  of  the  lieutenant- 
colonel,  taking  afterward  new  points  as  he  ad- 
vances. 

278.  The  senior  major  will  see  that  the  guides 
direct  themselves  on  the  marker  posted  at  the 
point  of  change,  so  as  to  graze  his  breast. 

279.  At  the  command  head  of  column  to  the 
right^  by  the  colonel,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
tooH  column  will  command:  1.  By  the  right 
flank.    2.  ByJU.e  ^ight.    A|  this,  the  chiefs  and 


66   SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PAET  HI. 

guides  will  take  their  places  on  the  right  of  their 
respective  platoons. 

0-280.  At  the  command  march^  hj  the  captain 
of  the  first  battalion  company,  the  platoons,  con- 
ducted bj  their  chiefs,  will  commence  the 
movement ;  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon  will 
stand  fast  and  let  his  platoon  file  past,  and  when 
the  left  file  has  arrived  abreast  with  him  he  will 
command :  1.  Marh  time.  2.  March.^  and  face 
his  platoon  to  the  front.  The  platoon  guide  will 
immediately  take  his  place  on  its  left.  The  first 
platoon  will  move  diagonally  to  the  rear,  and  file 
into  column  parallel  to  the  second;  when  the 
chief  has  an-ived  abreast  with  the  left  of  the 
second  he  will  halt  in  his  own  person,  let  his  pla- 
toon file  past,  and  it  will  then  execute  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  second  platoon. 
0-281.  When  the  first  battalion  company  shall 
have  arrived  abreast  with  the  first  platoon,  the 
platoon  column  will  be  put  in  march  by  its  chie^ 
taking  the  guide  to  the  left,  and  regaining  the 
distance  of  thirty-three  paces  from  the  right 
fiank  of  the  battalion  column. 
0-282.  When  the  second  platoon  column  shall 
have  arrived  at  a  distance  of  thirty-three  paces 
from  the  right  flank  of  the  column  in  its  new  di- 
rection, it  will  change  direction  to  the  right  by 
command  of  its  chief,  and  its  first  platoon  will 
march  abreast  with  the  last  battahon  company, 
when  that  company  takes  the  new  direction. 
0-283.  If  the  change  of  direction  is  to  the  left, 
the  first  platoon  column  will  take  the  guide  to 
the  right,  and  increase  the  gait  by  command  of 
its  chief,  it  will  change  direction  at  the  same 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    IIL        67 

time  TN'ith  the  first  battalion  company,  taking 
care  to  maintain  its  relative  7)Osition  and  distance. 
It  will  resume  the  step  of  the  battalion  -when  its 
direction  is  changed. 

0-284.  When  the  last  battalion  company  changes 
direction  the  second  platoon  column  will  conform 
to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  first. 

If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  battal- 
ions, the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  second,  will 
cause  the  marker  of  the  first  battalion,  to  be  re- 
placed as  soon  as  the  last  subdivision  of  this 
battalion  shall  have  passed;  this  disposition  will 
be  observed  by  battalion  after  battalion,  to  the 
rear  of  the  column. 


285.  It  has  been  demonstrated,  school  of  the 
company,  how  important  it  is,  Jirst^  that  each 
subdivision  execute  its  change  of  direction  pre- 
cisely at  the  point  where  the  leading  one  had 
changed,  and  tliat  it  arrive  in  a  square  with  the 
direction;  «<?co/i^,  that  the  wheeling  point  ought 
always  to  be  cleared  in  time,  in  order  that  the 
subdivision  engaged  in  the  wheel  may  not  arrest 
the  movement  of  the  following  one.  The  deep- 
er the  column,  the  more  rigorously  ought  these 
principles  to  be  observed ;  because,  a  fault  that 
would  be  but  slight  in  a  column  of  a  single  bat- 
talion, would  cause  much  embarrassment  in  one 
of  great  depth. 
6* 


68        SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET   HI. 

Article  IV. 
To  halt  the  column. 

286.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command : 

1.    Column.     2.  Halt. 

287.  At  the  second  command,  briskly  repeat- 
ed by  the  captains  and  by  the  chiefs  of  platoons 
of  the  companies  of  skirmishers,  the  column  will 
halt;  no  guide  will  stir,  though  he  may  have  lost 
his  distance,  or  be  out  of  the  direction  of  the 
preceding  guides. 

288.  The  column  being  in  march,  in  double 
t[uicktime,  will  be  halted  by  the  same  commands. 
At  the  command  Tialt^  the  men  will  halt  in  their 
places,  and  will  themselves  rectify  their  positions 
in  the  ranks. 

289.  The  column  being  halted,  when  the  colo- 
nel shall  wish  to  form  it  into  line  of  battle,  he 
will  move  a  little  in  front  of  the  leading  guide, 
and  face  to  him ;  this  guide  and  the  following  one 
will  fix  their  eyes  on  the  colonel,  in  order  prompt- 
ly to  conform  themselves  to  his  directions. 

290.  If  the  colonel  judge  it  not  necessary  to 
give  a  general  direction  to  the  guides,  he  will  lim- 
it himself  to  rectifying  the  position  of  such  as 
may  be  without,  or  within  the  direction,  by  the 
command  guide  of  (such)  company^  or  guides  of 
(such)  corri'panics,  to  the  rigid  (or  to  the  left ;)  at 
this  command,  the  guides  designated  will  place 
themselves  on  the  direction ;  the  others  wiU  stand 
fast. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    UI.         69 

291.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  colonel  judge  it 
necessary  to  give  a  general  direction  to  the  guides 
of  the  column,  he  will  place  the  first  two  on  the 
direction  he  shall  have  chosen,  and  command : 

Guides,  cover. 

292.  At  this,  the  following^uides  will  prompt- 
ly place  themselves  on  the  direction  covering  the 
first  two  in  file,  and  each  precisely  at  a  distance 
equal  to  the  front  of  his  company,  from  the  guide 
immediately  preceding;  the  lieutenant-colonel 
will  assure  them  in  the  direction,  and  the  colonel 
will  command : 

Left  (or  ri(/ht) — Deess. 

293.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  subdivisions,  each  company  will  in- 
cline to  the  right  or  left,  and  dress  forward  or 
backward,  so  as  to  bring  the  designated  flank  to 
rest  on  its  guide ;  each  captain  will  place  himself 
two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  promptly  align 
his  company  parallelly  with  that  which  precedes, 
then  command  Feont,  and  return  to  his  place  in 
column. 

Aeticle  Y. 

To  close  the  column  to  half  distance,  or  in  mass. 

294.  A  column  by  company  being  at  full  dis- 
tance right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colo- 
nel shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  close  to  half  distance, 
on  the  leading  company,  he  will  command  : 


70         SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    in. 

1.    To   half  distance^  close  column.     2.  Maech. 
(or  double  quich — Maech.) 

295.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the 
leading  company  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast. 
0-296.  At  the  same  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon,  of  the  first  platoon  column,   will 
caution  his  platoo^^  to  stand  fast. 

297.  At  the  command  march^  which  will  be 
repeated  by  all  the  captains,  except  the  captain 
of  the  leading  company,  this  company  will  stand 
fast,  and  its  chief  will  align  it  by  the  left ;  the 
file  closers  will  close  one  x>ace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

298.  All  the  other  companies  will  continue  to 
march,  and  as  each  in  succession  arrives  at  pla- 
toon distance  from  the  one  which  precedes,  its 
captain  will  halt  it. 

299.  At  the  instant  that  each  company  halts, 
its  guide  will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the 
gnides  who  precede,  and  the  captain  will  align 
the  company  by  the  left;  the  file  closers  will 
close  one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

300.  ^o  particular  attention  need  be  given  to 
the  general  direction  of  the  guides  before  they 
respectively  halt ;  it  wUl  sufiice  if  each  follow  in 
the  trace  of  the  one  who  precedes  him. 
0-301.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the 
chief  of  the  second  platoon,  of  the  first  platoon 
column,  and  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon  of  the  seo- 
ond  platoon  column,  the  first  platoon  of  the  first 
platoon  column  will  stand  fast,  its  second  platoon 
will  close  in  mass  on  its  first,  and  its  chief  AviU 
align  it  by  the  left. 

0-302.  When  the  last  battalion  company  halts, 


SCHOOL    OF  THE    BATTALION PAST   HI.        7l 

the  second  platoon  of  the  second  platoon  column, 
)Till  close  in  mass  on  its  first  platoon,  which  has 
halted  at  the  same  time ;  its  chief  will  align  it 
by  the  left. 

303.  The  colonel,  on  the  side  of  the  guides, 
will  superintend  the  execution  of  the  movement, 
observing  that  the  captains  halt  their  companies 
exactly  at  platoon  distance^  the  one  from  the 
other. 

304.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  a  few  paces  in 
front,  will  face  to  tlie  leading  guide,  and  assure 
the  positions  of  the  following  guides,  as  they  suc- 
cessively place  themselves  on  the  direction. 

305.  The  senior  major  Avill  follow  the  move- 
ment abreast  with  the  last  guide.  The  junior 
major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with  the 
color  company. 

306.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel 
will  cause  it  to  close  by  the  same  commands. 

307.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double 
quick  time,  at  the  first  command,  the  captain  of 
the  leading  company  wiU  command,  quicTc  time  ; 
the  chiefs  of  the  other  companies  will  caution 
them  to  continue  their  march. 

0-308.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the 
leading  platoon  of  the  first  platoon  column,  will 
command,  quick  time;  the  chiefs  of  the  other 
platoons  will  caution  them  to  continue  the 
march. 

309.  At  the  command  march^  the  leading 
company  will  march  in  quick,  and  the  other  com- 
panies in  double  quick  time ;  and  as  each  arrives 
at  platoon  distance  from  the  preceding  one,  its 
chief  will  cause  it  to  march  in  quick  time. 


72         SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET   III. 

310.  When  the  rearmost  company  shall  have 
gained  its  distance,  the  colonel,  should  he  wish 
to  resume  the  previous  gait,  will  command : 

Double  quick — ^Mabch. 

0-311.  At  the  command  march^  the  leading  pla- 
■  toon  of  the  first  platoon  column  will  march  in 
quicTc^  and  the  other  platoons  in  douhle  quick 
time.  As  the  second  platoon  of  each  platoon 
column  arrives  at  six  paces  from  its  preceding 
one,  its  chief  will  cause  it  to  march  in  quick 
time. 

312.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  the 
column,  and  cause  it  to  close  to  half  distance  at 
the  same  time,  he  will  notify  the  captain  of  the 
leading  company  and  the  chief  of  the  leading 
platoon  of  skirmishers  of  his  intention.  At  the 
command  m<irch^  the  captain  of  the  leading  hat» 
talion  company  will  halt  his  company,  and  align 
it  by  the  left. 

0-313.  At  the  same  command,  the  chief  of  the 
leading  platoon  of  the  first  platoon  column  will 
halt  his  platoon,  and  dress  it  to  the  left. 

314.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time, 
and  the  colonel  should  not  give  the  command 
double  quic]i\  the  captain  of  the  leading  company 
will  halt  his  company  at  the  command  marc\ 
and  align  it  by  the  left.  In  the  case  where  the 
colonel  adds  the  command  double  quich^  the  cap- 
tains of  companies  will  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed Xo.  307,  and  the  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted as  indicated  No.  309. 
0-315.  The  chief  of  the  leading  platoon  of  the 


of 
rst 
to 


ose 

tCB. 


the 
Ded 
the 
md 
ovr 

)la- 
ion 

560- 

md 
Don 
■  in 

lins 
leir 


of 


Vol  2 

School   of   the    Battalion. 

^'^■• 

Pie 

To 

TBHEWP 

■■liHiJliBliP 

cloaf  thr 

column  in  imiKs  on 
mpatar   XP-JJti 

t5 

■^-_ y 

--"]--" 

^'— !-^     V 

1 P 

T— P 

r,^.2 

4 ^jy 

({       ■    ■  T 

■         1 

^1 Y      i ! 

1 

i 

c 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PART  in.    73 

leading  platoon  colnmn,  will  conform  to  what  is 
required  above  for  the  chief  of  the  leading  com- 
pany of  the  battalion  column. 

TO    CLOSE    THE    COLirNrN"  ON  THE  EIGHTH,  OE    EEAE- 
MOST  COMPANY. 

316.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  instead  of 
caQsing  it  to  close  to  half  distance  on  the  first 
company,  the  colonel  should  wish  to  cause  it  to 
close  on  the  eighth,  he  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  eighth  company^  to  half  distance  close 
column.  2.  Battalion  ahout — Face.  3.  Col- 
umn fortcard.  4.  &uide  right.  5.  Maech 
(or  double  quick — Maech). 

317.  At  the  first  com'mand  the  captain  of  the 
enghth  company  will  caution  it  to  remain  faced 
to  the  front ;  at  the  second  command,  all  the 
companies  except  the  eighth,  will  face  about,  and 
their  guides  will  remain  in  the  front  rank,  now 
the  rear. 

0-318.  At  the  first  command,  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon of  the  first  platoon  column,  will  caution 
it  to  face  about ;  the  chiefs  of  platoon  of  the  sec- 
ond platoon  column  will  caution  them  to  stand 
fast.  At  the  second  command  the  first  platoon 
column  will  face  about,  the  guides  rerLaining  in 
the  front  rank,  now  rear, 

319.  At  the  fourth  command,  all  the  captains 
will  place  themselves  two  paces  outside  of  their 
companies  on  the  directing  flank. 
O-320.  At  the  same  command,  each  chief  of 

VOL.  II. — 7 


74        SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    III. 

platoon  of  tlie  first  platoon  columns  will  place 
himself  two  paces  outside  liis  platoon,  and  on  its 
directing  flank. 

321.  At  the  command  march.,  the  eighth  com- 
pany will  stand  fast,  its  captain  will  align  it  by 
the  left,  and  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace 
on  the  rear  rank.  The  other  companies  will  put 
themselves  in  march,  and,  as  each  arrives  at  pla- 
toon distance  from  the  one  established  before  it, 
its  captain  will  halt  it  and  face  it  to  the  fronL 
At  the  moment  that  each  company  halts,  the 
left  guide,  remaining  faced  to  the  rear,  will  place 
himself  promptly  on  the  direction  of  the  guides 
already  established.  Immediately  after,  the  cap- 
tain will  align  his  company  by  the  left,  and  the 
file  closers  Avill  close  one  pace  on  the  rear  rank. 
If  this  movement  be  executed  in  double  quick 
time,  each  captain,  in  turn,  wiU  halt,  and  com- 
mand: Such  coynpany.,  rigTit  about — Halt.  At 
this  command,  the  company  designated  will  fac« 
to  the  right  about  and  halt. 
0-322.  At  the  command  marc\  the  first  platoon 
of  the  second  platoon  colujnn  will  stand  fast ; 
the  others  will  put  themselves  in  march  with  the 
guide  on  the  side  of  the  battalion  column  ;  when 
tlie  second  platoon  of  the  first  platoon  column 
has  arrived  at  a  distance  from  the  second  bat- 
talion company,  equal  to  the  difference  between 
the  platoon  front  and  six  paces,  it  will  be  halted 
and  faced  about  by  its  chief;  when  the  first  bat- 
talion company  halts,  the  first  platoon  wiU  be 
halted  and  faced  about  by  its  chief,  the  platoons 
will  be  dressed  to  the  left  by  their  respective 
chiefe,  the  secoud  at  six  paces  from  the  first. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET   III.         75 

The  second  platoon  of  the  second  platoon  column, 
will  close  in  mass  on  its  first  platoon. 

323.  AH  the  companies  being  aligned,  the 
colonel  will  cause  the  guides,  who  stand  faced 
to  the  rear,  to  face  about. 

324.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placing  himself 
behind  the  rearmost  guide,  wOl  assure  succes- 
sively the  positions  of  the  other  guides,  as  pre- 
scribed Xo.  304 ;  the  senior  major  will  remain 
abreast  with  the  rearmost  company.  The  junior 
major  will  keep  abreast  with  the  color  company. 

325.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  tho 
colonel  shall  wish  to  close  it  on  the  eighth  com- 
pany, he  will  command : 

1.  On  the  eighth  company^  to  half  distance^  close 
column.  2.  Battalion  right  about.  3.  March 
(or  double  quicJc — Maech).     4.  Guide  right. 

326.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the 
eighth  company  will  caution  his  company  that 
it  will  remain  faced  to  the  front ;  the  captains 
of  the  other  companies  will  caution  their  com- 
panies that  they  will  have  to  face  about. 
0-327.  At  the  same  command  each  chief  of 
platoon  of  the  second  platoon  column  will  cau- 
tion his  platoon  that  it  will  have  to  remain  faced 
to  the  front ;  the  chiefs  of  platoon  of  the  first 
platoon  column  will  caution  them  that  they  will 
have  to  face  about. 

328.  At  the  command  march^  the  captain  of 
the  eighth  company  will  halt  his  company  and 
align  it  by  the  left ;  the  file  closers  will  close  one 
pace  upon  the  reai*  rank. 


76  SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALIOlf — PAET   in. 

329.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies,  at  the 
same  command,  will  place  themselves  on  the  flank 
of  the  column  ;  the  subdivisions  will  face  about, 
the  guides  remaining  in  the  front  rank,  now  be- 
come the  rear,  ana  as  each  arrives  at  platoon  dis- 
tance from  the  company  immediately  preceding 
it,  its  chief  Mill  face  it  to  the  front  and  halt  it  as 
prescribed  Xo.  321.  The  instant  each  company 
halts,  the  guide  on  the  directing  flank,  remaining 
faced  to  the  rear,  will  quickly  place  himself  on 
the  direction  of  the  guides  already  established. 
After  which,  the  captain  will  align  the  company 
by  the  left,  and  the  file  closers  will  close  one 
pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

0-330.  At  the  command  marc\  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon  of  the  second  platoon  column  will 
halt  his  platoon  and  align  it  to  the  left;  the 
chief  of  the  second  platoon  will  close  his  platoon 
in  mass  upon  the  first ;  the  chiefs  of  platoons 
of  the  first  platoon  column  will  place  themselves 
on  the  flank  of  the  platoons ;  the  platoons  will 
face  about,  and  execute  what  is  prescribed  No. 
322. 

331.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  follow  the 
movement  abreast  of  the  first  company.  The 
senior  major  will  place  himself  a  few  paces  in 
rear  of  tiie  guide  of  the  eighth  company,  and 
will  assure  successively  the  position  of  the  other 
guides.  The  junior  major  will  keep  the  position 
prescribed  No.  305. 

BEMABKS. 

332.  A  column  by  division  at  fall  distance  will 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET  HI.  77 

close  to  half  distance  by  the  same  means  and  the 
same  commands. 

333.  A  column,  by  company,  or  by  division, 
being  at  full  or  half  distance,  the  colonel  will 
cause  it  to  close  in  mass  by  the  same  means  and 
commands,  substituting  the  indication,  column^ 
close  in  mass,  for  that  of  to  half  distance  close 
column.  Each  chief  of  subdivision  will  conform 
himself  to  all  that  has  just  been  prescribed,  ex- 
cept that  he  will  not  halt  his  subdivision  till  its 
guide  shall  be  at  a  distance  of  six  paces  from  the 
guide  of  the  subdivision  next  preceding. 

334.  In  a  column,"  left  in  front,  these  various 
movements  will  be  executed  on  the  same  princi- 
ples. 

Aeticle  VI. 

To  march  in  column  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in 
mass. 

335.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass 
being  at  a  halt,  the  colonel  will  put  it  in  march 
by  the  commands  prescribed  for  a  column  at  full 
distance. 

336.  The  means  of  direction  will  also  be  the 
same  for  a  column  at  half  distance,  or  in  mass,  as 
for  a  column  at  full  distance.  If  tlie  column  is  in 
mass,  the  junior  major  will  occupy  the  position 
prescribed  Xo.  259. 

337.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass, 
being  in  march,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
halt  it,  he  will  give  the  commands  prescribed  for 
baiting  a  column  at  full  distance,  and  if,  after- 
ward, he  judge  it  necessary  to  give  a  general 
direction  to  the  guides  of  the  column,  he  will 


78  SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET   III. 

employ,  to  this  end,  the  commands  and  means  in- 
dicated, ISTo.  290  and  following. 

338.  In  columns  at  half  distance  or  closed  in 
mass,  cliiefs  of  subdivision  will  repeat  the  com- 
mands march  and  halt^  as  in  columns  at  full  dis- 
tance. 

339.  The  colonel  will  often  march  the  column.' 
to  the  rear,  by  the  means  and  the  commands  pre- 
scribed Nos.  225  and  226. 

340.  A  column  by  division  or  company, 
whether  at  full  or  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass, 
at  a  halt  or  marching,  can  be  faced  to  the  right 
or  left,  and  marched  off  in  the  new  direction. 

341.  If  in  the  case  above  indicated  the  com- 
panies of  skirmishers  are  present,  the  platoon 
columns  as  also  the  battalion  column  will  be  di- 
rected as  prescribed  Nos.  140,  141  and  142. 


0-342-  "When  one  or  more  platoons  of  the  com- 
panies of  skirmishers  are  deployed,  to  cover  a 
battalion  w^liile  in  column  by  company  or  division 
at  half  distance,  and  the  colonel  desires  their  re- 
call, but  not  with  a  view  to  forming  square,  it 
will  be  executed  as  prescribed  ISTo.  95 ;  observing 
what  follows,  the  platoon  '"columns  on  reaching 
their  positions  will  be  closed  in  mass,  instead  of 
keeping  their  full  distances. 

Aetiole   VII. 

To  change  direction  in  column  at  half  distance. 

343.  A  column  at  half  distance,  being  in  march, 


roi.  2. 


Scliool  of   tlte   Battalion.  PI.  7. 


Fuji. 


^ 


1. 1  ih.,.„  i,:..j,i,j„, 

D 

'Ji!i!lli;iii'ili!ILillll,:iJill!i' 

..lE'iiiiiiiiriJiiiiiiiitiii^ 

t  ig'^. 


>A1 


$    I 


1  i 


iuJ 


To  diange   dire.tioiL  i/i  colxnm?   athd/fdistamr 


Vol.j^.  ScKool  of   tLe  BattalioiL.  ^Z-^ 


Fiq  1 


^,1                  °     ^~ 

-  -^ 

■       ri         , 

jT 

□   ~  ~ 

C 

1                         H 

H 

^                           H 

c 

H                    H 

•i       1 

1 1 

11 


Fig.  2 


7'o  f/ia/if^e  fJirertiofi    i/i    ( ola/rin    olo-yed  in   man. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALIOX — PAET   IH.         79 

will  change  direction  by  the  same  commands  and 
according  to  the  same  principles  as  a  column  at 
full  distance ;  but  as  the  distance  between  the 
subdivisions  is  less,  the  pivot  man  in  each  subdi- 
vision, will  take  steps  of  fourteen  inches  instead 
of  nine,  and  of  seventeen  inches  instead  of  eleven, 
according  to  the  gait,  in  order  to  clear,  in  time, 
the  wheeling  point,  and  the  marching  flank  will 
describe  the  arc  of  a  larger  circle,  the  better  to 
facilitate  the  mos'ement. 

0-344.  At  the  command  march  bv  the  colonel, 
the  platoon  columns  of  the  companies  of  skir- 
mishers, will  change  direction  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  Xo.  279  and  following: 


Aeticle  YIIL 
To  change  direction  in  column  closed  in  mass. 
1st.   To  change  direction  in  marching. 

345.  A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass, 
being  in  march,  will  change  direction  bj  the  front 
of  subdivisions. 

346.  Whether  the  change  be  made  to  the  re- 
verse, or  to  the  pivot  flank,  it  will  always  be  exe- 
cuted on  the  principle  of  wheeling  in  marching; 
to  this  end,  the  colonel  will  first  cause  the  bat- 
talion to  take  the  guide  on  the  flank  opposite  to 
the  intended  change  of  direction,  if  it  be  not  al- 
ready on  that  flank. 

347.  A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass, 
right  in  front,  having  to  change  direction  to  the 
.right,  the  colonel,  after  having  caused  a  marker 


80  SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET   III. 

to  be  placed  at  the  point  where  the  change  ought 
to  commence,  will  command: 

1.  Battalion^  right  wheel.     2.  Maech. 

348.  At  the  command  marcA,  the  leading  divis- 
ion will  wheel  as  if  it  were  part  of  a  column  at 
half  distance. 

349.  The  instant  that  this  division  commences 
the  wheel,  all  the  others  will,  at  once,  conform 
themselves  to  its  movement ;  to  this  end  the  left 
guide  of  each,  advancing  slightly  the  left  shoulder, 
and  lengthening  a  little  the  step,  will  incline  to 
the  left,  and  will  observe,  at  the  same  time,  to 
gain  so  much  ground  to  the  front  that  there  may 
constantly  be  an  interval  of  four  paces  between 
his  division  and  that  which  precedes  it ;  and  as 
soon  as  he  shall  cover  the  preceding  guide,  he 
will  cease  to  incline  and  then  march  exactly  in 
his  trace. 

350.  Each  division  will  conform  itself  to  the 
movement  of  its  guide ;  the  men  will  feel  lightly 
the  elbow  toward  hini  and  advance  a  little  the 
left  shoulder  the  instant  the  movement  commen- 
ces ;  each  file,  in  inclining,  will  gain  so  much  the 
less  ground  to  the  front  as  the  file  shall  be  near- 
er to  the  pivot,  and  the  right  guide  will  gain  only 
80  much  as  may  be  necessary  to  maintain  be- 
tween his  own  and  the  preceding  division  the 
same  distance  which  separates  their  marching 
flanks. 

351.  Each  chief  of  division,  turning  to  it,  will 
regulate  its  march,  and  see  that  it  remains  coiv 
stantly  included  between  its  guides,  that  its  aligB<- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    IIL         81 

ment  continues  nearly  parallel  to  that  of  the  pre- 
ceding division,  and  that  the  centre  hends  only  a 
little  to  the  rear. 

352.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  move- 
ment, and  cause  the  pivot  of  the  leading  division 
to  lengthen  or  to  shorten  the  step,  conforming  to 
the  principle  established  in  the  S.  C.^  ISo.  232 — 
if  either  be  necessary  to  facilitate  the  movement 
of  the  other  divisions. 

353.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  near  the 
left  guide  of  the  leading  division,  will  regulate 
his  march,  and  take  care,  above  all,  that  he  does 
not  throw  himself  wrz^Ain  the  arc  he  ought  t^  de- 
scribe. 

354.  The  senior  major,  placed  in  the  rear  of 
the  guides,  will  see  that  the  last  three  con- 
form themselves,  each  by  slight  degrees,  to  the 
movement  of  the  guide  immediately  preceding, 
and  that  neither  inclines  too  much  in  the  endeav- 
or to  cover  too  promptly  the  guide  in  his  front ; 
he  will  rectify  any  serious  fault  that  may  be  com- 
mitted in  either  of  those  particulars. 

355.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  wheel  nearly  end- 
ed, -ftill  command : 


1.  Forward.     2.  Maech. 

356.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be 
given  at  the  instant  the  leading  division  completes 
its  wheel,  it  will  resume  the  direct  march ;  the 
other  divisions  will  conform  themselves  to  this 
movement ;  and  if  any  guide  find  himself  not 
covering  his  immediate  leader,  he  will,  by  alight 


aa      SCHOOL  or  the  battalion — part  in. 

degrees,  bring  himself  on  the  trace  of  thatgnide 
by  advancing  the  right  shoulder. 

357.  If  the  column,  right  in  front,  has  to  change 
direction  to  the  left,  the  colonel  will  first  cause 
it  to  take  the  guide  to  the  right,  and  then  com- 
mand: 

1.  Battalion,,  left  icJieel.     2,  Maech. 

358.  At  the  command  w?ar^/^,  the  battalion  will 
change  direction  to  the  left  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples just  prescribed,  and  bj  inverse  means. 

359.  When  the  battalion  shall  have  resumed 
the  direct  march,  the  colonel  will  change  the 
guide  to  the  left,  on  seeing  the  last  three  guides 
nearly  in  the  direction  of  the  one  in  front. 

360.  The  foregoing  changes  of  direction  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  in 
a  column,  left  in  front. 

361.  A  column  bv  company,  closed  in  mass, 
will  change  direction  in  marching,  by  the  com- 
mands and  means  indicated  for  a  column  by  di- 
vision, 

362.  The  guide  who  is  the  pivot  of  the  partic- 
ular wheel,  ought  to  maintain  himself  at  his  usual 
distance  of  six  paces  from  the  guide  who  pre- 
cedes him ;  if  this  distance  be  not  exactly  pre- 
served, the  divisions  would  necessarily  become 
confounded,  which  must  be  carefully  avoided. 
0-363.  The  platoon  columns  of  the  companies  of 
skirmishers  will  change  direction  as  prescribed 
for  the  battalion  column,  the  leading  platoons  pre- 
serving their  alignment  with  the  first  and  last  di- 
visions respectively. 


83 


Dm- 
r  a 
.  or 


OD, 

nel 
ich 

his 
he 

nt, 
ge 
to 
to 

^^ 
)m 
rst 
:ht 
he 


HI 

e. 


Scliool    „t'    Ibe     P,.vUF.Uon. 


f 


h 


»H 


7'«  rharigr    directiim  in    rnhimrl    r/osr,/ 
in    rrui^s  from  n  hnl,   .V/IS.J 


r 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PART    III.         83 

PwEMARKS. 

0-364.  When  one  or  more  platoons  of  the  com- 
panies of  skirmishers  are  deployed  to  cover  a 
battalion  closed  in  mass,  either  by  company,  or 
division,  and  the  colonel  desires  their  recall,  it  will 
be  executed  as  prescribed  JSTo.  342. 

2c?.  To  change  direction  from  a  halt. 

365.  A  column  by  company,  or  by  division, 
closed  in  mass,  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  give  it  a  new  direction,  and  in  which 
it  1*3  to  remain,  he  Avill  cause  it  to  execute  this 
movement  by  the  flanks  of  subdivisions,  in  the 
following  manner: 
^66.  The  battalion  having  the  right  in  front, 
v'hen  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change 
direction  by  the  right  flank,  he  will  indicate  to 
the  lieutenant-colonel  the  point  of  direction  to 
tlie  right ;  this  officer  will  immediately  establish, 
on  the  new  direction,  two  markers,  distant  from 
each  other  a  little  less  than  the  front  of  the  first 
subdivision,  the  first  marker  in  front  of  the  right 
file  of  this  subdivision  ;  which  being  executed,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Change  direction  ly  tlie  right flanlc.  'i.  Bat- 
talion^ right — Face.  3.  Maech  (or  double 
quich—M.AJiC'n). 

367.  At  the  second  command,  the  column  will 
face  to  the  right,  and  each  chief  of  subdivision 
will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 


84        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    ILL 

0-368.  At  the  same  command  the  platoon  col- 
umns of  the  companies  of  skirmishers  will  face 
to  the  right,  the  guides  will  place  themselves  on 
the  right  of  their  platoons  respectivelj,  and  each 
chief  of  platoon  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of 
his  guide. 

369.  At  the  command  march^  all  the  subdivis- 
ions will  step  oif  together ;  the  right  guide  of 
tlie  leading  one  will  direct  himself  from  the  first 
step,  parallelly  to  the  markers  placed  in  advance 
on  the  new  direction ;  the  chief  of  the  subdivis- 
ion will  not  follow  the  movement,  but  see  it  file 
past,  and  as  soon  as  the  left  guide  shall  have  pass- 
ed he  will  command : 

1.  First  company  (pv  first  division).     2.  Hali. 
3.  Feoxt.     4.  Left — Dkess. 

370.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  subdivision 
will  place  itself  against  the  two  markers,  and  be 
promptly  aligned  by  its  chief. 

371.  The  right  guide  of  each  of  the  following 
subdivisions  will  conform  himself  to  the  direction 
of  the  right  guide  of  the  subdivision  preceding 
his  own  in  the  column,  so  as  to  enter  on  the  new 
direction  parallelly  to  that  subdivision,  and  at  the 
distance  of  four  paces  from  its  rear  rank. 

372.  Each  chief  of  subdivision  will  halt  in  his 
own  person,  on  arriving  opposite  to  the  left 
guides  already  placed  on  the  new  direction,  see 
his  subdivision  file  past,  and  conform  himself,  in 
halting  and  aligning  it,  to  what  is  prescribed  Is'o- 
869. 

G-373.  At  the  command  march,  by  the  colonel, 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALIOX PART    III.        S5 

the  platoon  columns  will  step  off  together,  each 
chief  of  platoon  placed  by  the  side  of  his  guide 
will  conduct  it  to  its  new  position,  which  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
for  the  battalion  column.  When  the  movement 
is  completed,  the  relative  positions  of  platoons 
and  the  battalion  column,  will  be  the  same  as  be- 
fore the  change  of  direction. 

374.  If  the  change  of  direction  be  by  the  left 
flank,  the  colonel  will  cause  markers  to  be  estab- 
lished as  before,  the  first  in  front  of  the  left  fil« 
of  the  leading  subdivision,  and  then  give  the 
same  commands,  substituting  the  indication  lej% 
for  right, 

375.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  subdiv- 
isions will  face  to  the  left,  and  each  chief  will 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  his  left  guide. 
0-376.  At  the  same  command,  the  platoon  col- 
umns will  face  to  the  left,  and  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon will  place  himself  by  tlie  side  of  his 
guide. 

377.  At  the  command  march^  all  the  subdivis- 
ions will  step  off  together,  each  conducted  by 
its  chief. 

378.  The  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  will 
direct  himself,  from  the  first  step,  parallelly  to 
the  markers ;  the  subdivision  will  be  conducted 
by  its  chief;  and  as  soon  as  its  left  guide  shall 
have  passed  the  second  marker,  it  will  be  halted 
and  aligned  as  prescribed  above ;  and  so  of  each 
of  the  following  subdivisions. 

0-379.  At  the  command  march,  the  platoon  col- 
umns will  step  off  together,  and  each  platoon, 
conducted  by  its  chief,  will  confonu  to  the  prin- 
voL.  n.— 8 


86    SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PAET  m. 

ciples  prescribed  No.  873,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
taking  care  so  to  conduct  tliem,  that  when  they 
file  to  the  riglit,  to  march  on  the  prolongation  of 
the  subdivisions  of  the  battalion  column,  they 
"Will  have  sufficient  distance  to  march  over,  so  as 
to  enter  on  the  ne^t  direction  in  then*  full  length 
before  halting. 

380.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  on  the  des- 
ignated flank,  to  see  that  each  subdivision  enters 
the  new  direction  parallelly  to  the  leading  one, 
and  at  the  prescribed  distance  from  that  which 
precedes. 

381.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself 
in  front  of,  and  facing  to,  the  guide  of  the  lead- 
ing subdivision,  and  will  assure  the  positions  of 
the  following  guides,  as  they  successively  arrive 
on  the  new  direction. 

382.  The  senior  major  will  follow  the  move- 
ment abreast  with  the  last  subdivision;  the 
junior  major  will  occupy  the  position  prescribed 
No.  336. 

383.  In  order  that  this  movement  may  be  exe- 
cuted with  facility  and  precision,  it  is  necessary 
that  the  leading  subdivision  should  entirely  un- 
mask the  column ;  for  example,  the  movement 
bemg  made  by  the  right  flank,  it  is  necessary, 
before  halting  the  leading  subdivision,  that  its 
left  guide  shall,  at  least,  have  arrived  at  the 
place  previously  occupied  by  its  right  guide,  in 
order  that  each  following  subdivision  Avhich  has 
to  pass  over  a  space  at  least  equal  to  its  front,  to 
put  itself  in  the  new  direction,  and  whose  left 
ought  to  pass  the  point  at  which  the  right  had 
rested,  may,  at  the  command  halt,  find  itself- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAKT    IlL         87 

in  its  whole  front,  parallel  to  the  leading  sub- 
division. 

384.  By  this  method  there  is  no  direction  that 
may  not  be  given  to  a  column  in  mass. 

Article   IX. 

Being  in  column  at  half  distance,  or   closed   in 
mass,  to  take  distances. 

385.  A  column  at  half  distance  vrill  take  full 
distances  hy  the  head  of  the  column  when  it  has 
to  prolong  itself  in  a  column  of  route  ;  it  may 
also  take  full  distance  by  the  head  of  the  colunm 
for  the  purposes  of  instruction,  breaking  into 
platoons,  forming  divisions,  &c.,  &c.  If  it  has 
to  form  itself  in  line  of  battle  on  the  ground  it 
occupies,  it  will  take  distances  on  the  leading  or 
on  the  rearmost  subdivision,.according  as  the  one 
or  other  may  find  itself  at  the  ])oint  where  tlie 
right  or  left  of  the  battalion  ought  to  rest  in  line 
of  battle. 

\st.  To  take  distances  by  the  head  of  the  column. 

386.  The  column  being  by  company  at  half 
distance  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  take  full  distances  by  the 
head,  he  will  command : 

By  the  head  of  column^  take  wheeling  distance. 

387.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  the  lead- 
ing company  will  put  it  in  march;  to  this  end, 
he  will  command : 


e»        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAST    IIL 

1.  First  company^  forward.     2.   Guide  left. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

388.  When  the  second  shall  have  nearly  its 
wheeling  distance,  its  captain  will  command : 

1.  Second  company.,  forward.     2.   Guide  left. 
3.  March  (or  double  quiclc — March). 

389.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  b'e 
pronounced  at  the  instant  that  this  company 
shall  have  its  wheeling  distance,  it  will  step  off 
smartly,  taking  the  step  from  the  preceding  com- 
pany. Each  of  the  other  companies  will  suc- 
cessively execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed 
for  the  second. 

390.  The  colonel  will  see  that  each  company 
puts  itself  in  march  ^t  the  instant  it  has  its  dis- 
tance. 

391.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  hold  himself 
at  the  head  of  the  column,  and  direct  the  march 
of  the  leading  guide. 

392.  The  senior  major  will  hold  himself 
abreast  with  the  Rearmost  guide.  The  junior 
major  will  take  post  as  prescribed  Nos.  94  or 
259,  as  the  column  may  be  in  the  cadence  or 
route  step. 

393.  If  the  column,  instead  of  being  at  a  halt, 
be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  give  the  same  com- 
mands, and  add : 

March. 

394.  If  the   column   be    marching   in   quick 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION — PAET   lU.        89 

time,  at  the  first  command  given  by  the  colonel, 
the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  com- 
mand: DouMe  quick.  At  the  command  march, 
the  company  will  take  the  dou]»le-quick  step, 
which  will  also  bo  done  by  the  other  captains  as 
their  companies  successively  attain  their  proper 
wheeling  distances.  Should  it  be  the  wish  of 
the  colonel  to  resume  the  quick  time  after  attain- 
ing the  wheeling  distances,  he  will  give  the  ne- 
(Jessary  commands. 

395.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  dovll-e 
quick  time,  the  leading  company  will  continue 
to  march  at  the  same  gait.  At  the  first  com- 
mand by  the  colonel,  the  captains  of  the  other 
companies  will  command:  quich  time.  At  the 
command  march,  these  companies  will  take  the 
quick  Uep,  and  as  each  company  gains  its  proper 
distance  its  captain  will  cause  it  to  retake  the 
double-quick  step. 

SEMASK8. 

0-396.  If  the  companies  of  skirmishers  are  pres- 
ent with,  but  do  not  march  in  the  column,  in 
taking  full  distance,  at  the  first  command  by  the 
colonel,  the  chief  of  the  leading  platoon  will  give 
the  same  commands  as  prescribed  for  the  cap- 
tain of  the  leading  battalion  company,  and  march 
abreast  with  that  company ;  the  other  platoons 
will  take  their  distances  by  the  means  prescribed 
for  the  battalion  companies,  the  leading  platoon 
of  the  last  platoon  column  taking  up  the  march 
at  the  same  time,  and  marching  abreast  with  the 
l^t  battalion  company. 
8* 


90    SOnOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PAET  IH. 

2d.   To  take  distances  on  tJie  rear  of  the  column. 

387.  If  the  colonel  wish  to  take  distances  on 
the  rearmost  company,  he  will  estahlish  two 
markers  on  the  direction  he  shall  wish  to  give 
to  the  line  of  Lattle,  the  first  opposite  to  the  rear- 
most company,  the  second  marker  toward  the 
head  of  the  column,  at  company  distance  from 
the  first,  and  both  facing  to  the  rear ;  at  the  same 
time,  the  right  general  guide,  on  an  intimation 
from  the  lieutenant-colonel,  will  move  rapidly  a 
little  beyond  the  point  to  which  the  head  of  the 
column  will  extend,  and  place  himself  correctly 
on  the  prolongation  of  the  two  markers.  These 
dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  Oft  the  eighth  company,  take  wheeling  distance. 
2.  Column  forward.  3.  Guide  left.  4.  March 
(or  double  quick — Maech). 

398.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  tt» 
eighth  company  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast.  At 
the  third  command,  the  captains  will  place  them- 
selves two  paces  outside  of  the  directing  flank. 
0-399.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the 
second  platoon  of  the  second  platoon  column 
will  face  his  platoon  about.  At  the  third  com- 
mand, he  will  command  guide  rig?it,  and  place 
himself  two  paces  outside  of  its  directing  flank; 
at  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
of  the  same  column,  and  the  chief  of  the  second 
platoon  of  the  first  platoon  column,  will  caution 
their  platoons  to  stand  fast. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    III.         91 

400.  At  the  command  inarch^  repeated  bj  all 
the  captains,  except  the  captain  of  the  eighth 
company,  this  latter  company  will  stand  last; 
its  chief  will  align  it  by  the  left  on  the  first 
marker,  who  is  opposite  to  this  comj^any,  the 
left  guide  stepping  in  rear  of  the  left  file  for  this 
purpose,  and  place  himself  before  its  centre,  after 
commanding :  Feoxt.  At  this  command,  the 
marker  will  retire,  and  the  left  guide  will  take 
his  place. 

401.  All  the  other  companies  will  put  them- 
selves in  march,  the  guide  of  tlie  leading  one 
directing  himself  a  little  wifhin  the  right  general 
guide ;  when  the  seventh  company  has  arrived 
opposite  the  second  marker,  its  captain  will  halt, 
and  align  it  on  this  marker,  in  the  manner  pre- 
scribed for  the  eighth  company. 

402.  When  the  captain  of  the  sixth  company 
shall  see  that  there  is,  between  his  company  and 
the  seventh,  the  necessary  space  fur  wheeling 
into  line,  he  will  halt  his  company ;  the  guidje 
facing  to  the  rear  will  place  himself  j^romptly  on 
the  direction,  and  the  moment  lie  shall  be  assured 
in  his  position,  the  captain  will  align  the  company 
by  the  left,  and  then  place  himself  two  paces  be- 
fore its  centre  ;  the  other  comj)anies  will  succes- 
sively conform  themselves  to  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  sixth  company. 

0-403.  At  the  command  march  repeated  by  all 
the  chiefs  of  platoon  of  the  companies  of  skir- 
mishers, except  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon, 
first  platoon  column  and  the  first  platoon  second 
platoon  column,  these  two  latter  platoons  will 
stand  fast,  the  other  platoons  will  put  themselves 


92      SCHOOL  or  the  battaliox — paet  in. 

in  march,  the  first  platoon  first  platoon  column 
keeping  aligned  with  the  first  battalion  company. 
"When  the  second  platoon  of  the  first  platoon  col- 
umn shall  have  nearly  its  full  distance,  its  chief 
will  command  :  1.  Second  platoon  forward ; 
2.  Q-uide  left;  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March)  ;  at  which  the  platoon  will  step  oflP,  its 
left  guide  following  in  the  trace  of  the  guide  of 
the  first  jdatoon.  When  the  second  platoon 
of  the  second  platoon  column  shall  have  attained 
its  distance,  it  will  be  halted,  and  faced  about, 
its  guide  will  cover  the  guide  of  the  platoon  in 
front,  and  the  platoon  will  be  dressed  to  the 
left. 

(M104.  Tlie  captain  of  the  first  company  of  skir- 
mishers will  halt  his  platoon  column  at  the  same 
time  the  first  battalion  company  halts.  Each 
chief  of  platoon  will  dress  his  platoon  to  the  left, 
the  first  in  a  line  with  the  first  battalion  com- 
pany. 

405.  The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement, 
and  see  that  each  company  halts  at  the  prescribed 
distance;  he  will  promptly  remedy  any  fault  that 
may  be  committed,  and,  as  soon  as  all  the  com- 
panies shall  l>e  aligned,  he  will  cause  the  guides, 
who  are  faced  to  the  rear,  to  face  about. 

406.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  successively 
assure  the  left  guides  on  the  direction,  placing 
himself  in  their  rear,  as  they  arrive. 

407.  The  senior  major  will  hold  himself  at  the 
head  of  the  column,  and  will  direct  the  march  of 
the  leading  guide.  The  junior  major  will  hold 
himself  as  prescribed  No.  94. 


9S 


on 
ers 
itli 
ic© 
it; 
:ho 
ijar 
on 
to 
dse 
m- 


or- 


to 

ra- 
nt, 
be- 

the 

v-m 

the 
the 
re- 


nll 


n 


Scliool  of   tKe   Battalion  pi  ^q 


Tiff  J. 


t 

•[ 

J — 

-ig.!. 

h 

-- 

":.^ 

7'o  Aa/tf  w/uvliHf/  distaiicea   on    heail  of  totiir. 
XoMS. 


c 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET   HI.         9B 

3(L  To  take  distances  on  the  head  of  the  column. 

408.  The  colonel,  wisliing  to  take  distances  on 
the  leading  company,  will  establish  two  markers 
m  the  manner  just  prescribed,  one  abreast  Avith 
this  company,  and  the  other  at  company  distance 
in  rear  of  the  first,  but  both  facing  to  the  front ; 
the  left  general  guide,  on  an  intimation  from  the 
lieutenant-colonel,  will  move  rapidly  to  the  rear 
and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  two  markers,  a  little  beyond  the  point  to 
which  the  rear  of  the  colmnn  will  extend :  these 
dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  On  the  first  company,  take  uheeling  distance^ 
2.  Battalion,  about — Face.  3.  Column,  for- 
ward. 4.  Guide  right.  5.  Maech  (or  double 
quick — Maech). 

409.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the 
first  company  will  caution  it  to  remain  faced  to 
the  front.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  com- 
panies, except  the  one  designated,  will  face  about, 
the  guides  remaining  in  the  front  rank,  now  be- 
come the  rear. 

0-410.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon  of  the  first  platoon  column,  will 
caution  it  to  remain  faced  to  the  front.  At  the 
second  command,  all  the  platoons  except  the 
one  designated,  will  face  about,  the  guides  re- 
maining as  indicated  JSTo.  409. 

411.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  captains  will 
place  themselves  outside  of  their  guides. 


94        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX PAET   III. 

0-412.  At  the  same  command,  the  chief  of  each 
second  platoon  of  the  platoon  column,  will  place 
himself  two  paces  outside  his  guide. 

413.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of 
the  designated  company  will  align  it,  as  pre- 
scribed. No.  400,  on  the  marker  placed  by  its 
side. 

414.  The  remaining  companies  will  put  them- 
selves in  march,  the  guide  of  the  rearmost  one 
will  direct  himself  a  little  within  the  left  general 
guide ;  when  the  second  company  shall  have  ar- 
rived opposite  the  second  marker,  its  captain 
will  face  it  about,  conforming  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed, No.  321,  and  align  it,  as  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  first  company.  Should  the 
movement  be  performed  in  quick  time  at  the 
command  halt  by  the  captain,  the  guide  will  face 
about  and  place  himself  on  the  line. 

415.  The  instant  that  the  third  company  shall 
have  its  wheeling  distance,  its  captain  will  halt 
it,  facing  it  about  as  prescribed  No.  321,  and 
align  it  by  the  left ;  the  captains  of  the  remain- 
ing companies  will  each,  in  succession,  conform 
himself  to  Avhat  has  just  been  prescribed  for  tho 
captain  of  the  third. 

0-416.  At  tlie  same  command,  the  first  platoon 
of  the  first  ])latoon  column,  will  stand  fast ;  aU 
the  other  platoons  will  put  themselves  in  march ; 
the  second  platoon  of  the  first  platoon  column 
having  attained  its  distance,  will  be  halted  by  its 
chief,  faced  about  and  dressed  to  the  left ;  the 
first  platoon  of  the  second  platoon  column  wiU 
march  on  a  line  with  the  last  battalion  company, 
will  be  halted  and  faced  about  at  the  same  time 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    HI.         95 

with  that  company,  and  dressed  to  the  left ;  the 
second  platoon  of  this  same  column  having  at- 
tained its  distance  will  execute  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  second  platoon  of  the 
first  platoon  column. 

417.  The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement,  as 
indicated  No.  405 ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  and 
senior  major  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is 
prescribed,  No.  406  and  407 ;  the  junior  major 
will  hold  himself  abreast  with  the  color  company 
on  the  reverse  flank. 

418.  These  various  movements  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles  in  a  column  with 
the  left  in  front. 

419.  They  will  be  executed  in  like  manner  in 
a  column  closed  in  mass ;  but,  if  it  be  the  wish 
of  the  colonel  to  open  out  the  column  to  half, 
instead  of  full  distance,  he  will  substitute,  in  the 
commands,  the  indication  lialf^  for  that  of  wheel- 
ing distance. 

420.  In  a  column  by  division,  distances  will  be 
taken  according  to  the  same  principles. 


0~421.  The  platoon  columns  will  retain  the  close 
order  when  the  battalion  column  takes  half  dis- 
tajice  from  being  closed  in  mass. 

Aeticle  X. 
Countermarch  of  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance. 
422.  In  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance,  the 


9G        SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    III. 

countermarch  will  be  executed  by  the  means  in- 
dicated, scliool  of  the  company;^  to  this  end, 
the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Countermarch.  2.  Battalion  right  (or  left) — 
Face.  3.  By  file  left  (or  right).  4.  Maech 
(or  double  quick — ^Mabch). 

0-423.  If  the  column  is  at  full  distance  right  or 
left  in  front,  in  countermarching  the  platoon  col- 
umns will  countermarch  at  the  commands  given 
for  the  battalion  column  and  by  the  means  pre- 
scribed in  the  8.  (7.,  No.  350,  observing  what 
follows  ;  at  the  second  command  by  the  colonel, 
the  guides  of  the  platoons  before  facing  about, 
will  advance  on  the  prolongation  of  the  line, 
passing  through  them  a  distance  equal  to  the 
front  of  a  platoon.  At  the  command  march., 
each  platoon  will  file  to  the  fi-ont  a  platoon  dis- 
tance before  filing  to  the  left  or  right,  for  the 
purpose  of  being  dressed  on  its  guide. 

To  countermarch  a  column  closed  in  mass. 

424.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  the 
countermarch  will  be  executed  by  the  commands 
and  means  subjoined. 

425.  The  column  being  supposed  formed  by 
division,  right  in  front,  the  colonel  wiU  com- 
mand: 

1.  Countermarch.  2.  Battalion.,  right  and  left — 
Face.  3.  By  file  left  and  right.  4.  Maech 
(or  double  quick — Maech). 


Vol.Z.       School   of   tite    BaltalioTL.       riLl. 


1^      •  .^v"      rrT> 


Fig-t. 


0^- 


Ftff.2. 


-^CS^- 


.^M7M 


Fvg3 


f^WWW^^        -^^ 


To   <onjiliT'/narth    e/   col-u/n/t 
clii-'s^d  i/i    /na.s-ir.  A  o.  ^  i^  If . 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET   HI.  97 

426.  At  the  iirst  command,  the  chiefs  of  the 
odd-nmnbered  divisions  will  caution  them  to  face 
to  the  right,  and  the  chiefs  of  the  others  to  face 
to  the  left. 

427.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  divisions 
will  face  to  the  right,  and  the  even  to  the  left ; 
the  right  and  left  guides  of  all  the  divisions  will 
face  about ;  the  chiefs  of  odd  divisions  will  has- 
ten  to  their  right  and  cause  two  files  to  break  to 
the  rear,  and  each  chief  place  himself  on  the 
left  of  the  leading  front-rank  man  of  his  division ; 
the  chiefs  of  even  divisions  will  hasten  to  their 
left,  and  cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and 
each  chief  place  himself  on  the  right  of  his  lead- 
ing front-rank  man. 

428.  At  the  command  march^  all  the  divisions, 
each  conducted  by  its  chief,  will  step  ofi"  smartly, 
the  guides  standing  fast;  each  odd  division  will 
wheel  by  file  to  the  left  around  its  right  guide ; 
each  even  division  will  wheel  by  file  to  the  right 
around  its  left  guide,  each  division  so  directing 
its  march  as  to  arrive  behind  its  opposite  guide, 
and  when  its  head  shall  be  up  with  this  guide, 
the  chief  will  halt  the  division,  and  cause  it  to 
face  to  the  front. 

429.  Each  division,  on  facing  to  the  front, 
will  be  aligned  by  its  chief  by  the  right;  to  this 
end,  the  chiefs  of  the  even  divisions  will  move 
rapidly  to  the  right  of  their  respective  divisions. 

430.  The  divisions  being  aligned,  each  chief 
will  command,  Feont;  at  this,  the  guides  will 
shift  to  their  proper  flanks. 

431.  In  a  column  with  the  left  in  front,  the 
oountermarch  will  be  executed  by  the  same  com- 

VOL.  II. — 9 


98  SCUOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX PAET    IH. 

mands  and  means ;  but  all  the  divisions  will  be 
aligned  bv  the  left ;  to  this  end,  the  chiefs  of  the 
odd  divisions  will  hasten  to  the  left  of  their  re- 
spective divisions  as  soon  as  the  latter  shall  have 
been  faced  to  the  front. 

432.  The  colonel,  placed  on  the  directing  flank, 
will  superintend  the  general  movement. 

433.  The  countermarch  being  ended,  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel will  always  place  himself  abreast 
with  the  leading,  and  the  senior  major  abreast 
with  the  rearmost  division,  the  junior  major 
will  hold  himself  abreast  with  the  color  company. 

434.  In  a  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass, 
the  countermarch  will  be  executed  by  the  same 
means  and  commands,  applying  to  companies 
what  is  prescribed  for  divisions. 

435.  The  countermarch  will  always  take  place 
from  a  halt,  Avhether  the  column  be  closed  in 
mass,  or  at  full  or  half  distance. 

0-436.  If  the  column  is  at  half  distance  or 
closed  in  mass,  right  or  left  in  front,  in  counter- 
marching, the  first  platoon  of  each  platoon  col- 
umn, will  face  to  the  right,  and  the  second  platoon 
to  the  left.  At  the  first  command  by  the  colonel, 
each  chief  of  platoon  will  give  the  necessary 
caution ;  at  the  second  command  the  platoons 
will  face  at  the  same  time  with  the  battalion 
column ;  the  platoon  guides  before  facing  about 
will  advance  on  the  prolongation  of  the  line, 
passing  through  them  a  distance  of  six  paces. 
At  the  command  march^  each  platoon  conducted 
by  its  chief  will  file  to  the  front  a  distance  of 
six  paces  before  filing  to  the  left  or  right,  for  the 
purpose  of  being  dressed  on  its  guide. 


Vol. '2.      ScIlooI    of    tLe   Battalioru.       TIJ? 


Fig.  2 


flriiifi  in    folu/nrt    by   company   c/o.<ted 
//ni.ysr    to   ro/m    flivi.-,niii,S'. 
Xo.  i.'J7. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAKT  III.  99 

Aeticle  XL 

Being  in  coliomn  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  to 
form  divisions. 

437-  The  column  being  closed  in  mass,  right  in 
front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish 
to  form  divisions,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Formdhisions.     2.  Left  companies^  left — Face. 
3.  Maech  (or  double  quick — Maech.) 

438.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the 
left  companies  will  caution  them  to  face  to  the 
left. 

439.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  com- 
panies will  face  to  the  left,  and  their  captains 
will  place  themselves  by  the  side  of  their  respec- 
tive left  guides. 

440.  The  right  companies,  and  their  captains, 
will  stand  fast ;  but  the  right  and  left  guides  of 
each  of  these  companies  will  place  themselves  re- 
spectively before  the  right  and  left  files  of  the 
company,  both  guides  facing  to  the  right,  and 
each  resting  his  right  arm  gently  against  the 
breast  of  the  front-rank  man  of  the  file,  in  order 
to  mark  the  direction. 

441.  At  the  command  march^  the  left  com- 
panies only  will  put  themselves  in  march,  their 
captains  standing  fast ;  as  each  shall  see  that  his 
company,  filing  past,  has  nearly  cleared  the 
column,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Such  company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Feont. 


iOO       SCHOOL    OF   TIIE   BATTALION PAET   IH, 

442.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when 
the  company  shall  yet  have  four  paces  to  ma^h  ; 
the  second  at  the  instant  it  shall  have  cleared  its 
right  company :  and  the  third  immediately  after 
the  second. 

443.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  front, 
the  files,  if  there  be  intervals  between  them,  will 
promptly  incline  to  the  right ;  the  captain  will 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  company  of 
the  division,  and  align  himself  correctly  on  the 
front  rank  of  that  company. 

444.  The  left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the 
same  time  before  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his 
company,  face  to  the  right,  and  cover  corre<!tly 
the  guides  of  the  right  company  ;  the  moment 
his  captain  sees  him  established  on  the  direction, 
he  will  command: 


Bight — Deess. 

445.  At  this,  the  left  company  will  dress  for- 
ward on  the  alignment  of  the  right  company ;  the 
front-rank  man,  who  may  find  himself  opposite 
to  the  left  guide,  will,  without  preceding  his  rank, 
rest  lightly  his  breast  against  the  right  arm  of  this 
guide ;  the  captain  of  the  left  company  will  di- 
rect its  alignment  on  this  man,  and  the  alignment 
being  assured,  he  will  command,  Feont  ;  but  not 
quit  his  position. 

446.  The  colonel  seeing  the  divisions  formed, 
will  command  : 

Chiides — ^Pobts. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE   BATTALION PAET   III.      101 

447.  At  this,  the  guides  who  have  marked  the 
fronts  of  divisions  will  return  to  their  places  in 
column,  the  left  guide  of  each  right  company 
passing  through  the  interval  in  the  centre  of  the 
division,  the  captains  and  covering  sergeants 
stepping  out  for  that  purpose  as  hereinafter  pre- 
scribed No.  470,  and  the  captains  will  place  them- 
selves as  prescribed  No.  87. 

448.  The  colonel,  from  the  directing  flank  of 
the  column,  will  superintend  the  general  execu- 
tion of  the  movement. 

449.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  instead  of  at 
a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  divis- 
ions, he  will  command : 

1.  Form  divisions.     2.  Left  companies^  ly  the  left 
flank.     3.  March  (or  double  quick— '}iLa:rcb). 

450.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the 
nght  companies  will  command,  Mark  time,  the 
captains  of  the  left  companies  will  caution  their 
companies  to  face  ly  the  left  flank. 

451.  At  the  third  command,  the  right  com- 
panies will  mark  time,  the  left  companies  will 
&ce  to  the  left ;  the  captains  of  the  left  companies 
will  each  see  his  company  file  past  him,  and  when 
it  has  cleared  the  column,  will  command  : 

Su^h  company^  by  the  right  flank — Makch. 

As  soon  as  the  divisions  are  formed,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

4.  Forward.    5.  Maeoh. 
9* 


102       SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET   III. 

452.  At  the  fifth  comraand,  the  cohimn  will 
resume  the  gait  at  which  it  was  marching  pre- 
vious to  the  commencement  of  the  movement. 
The  guides  of  each  division  will  remain  on  the 
right  and  left  of  their  respective  companies;  the 
left  guide  of  the  right  company  will  pass  into  the 
line  of  file  closers,  before  the  two  companies  are 
united ;  the  right  guide  of  the  left  company  will 
step  into  the  rear  rank.  The  captains  will  place 
themselves  as  prescribed  In"o.  87. 

453.  If  the  column  be  at  a  halt  and  at  full  or 
half  distance  instead  of  closed  in  mass,  divisions 
will  be  formed  in  the  same  manner ;  but  the  cap- 
tains of  the  left  companies,  if  the  movement  be 
made  in  quick  time,  after  commanding  Feont, 
will  each  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his 
company,  and  command,  1.  Such  company,  for- 
ward. 2.  Guide  right.  3.  Maech.  If  the 
movement  be  made  in  double  quick  time,  each 
will  command  as  soon  as  his  company  has  cleared 
the  column : 

1.  Such  company.^  iy  the  right  Jlank.     2.  Maech. 

454.  The  right  guide  of  each  left  company  will 

so  direct  his  march  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of  the 
man  on  the  left  of  the  right  company.  The  left 
company  being  nearly  up  with  the  rear  rank  of 
the  right  company,  its  captain  will  halt  it,  and 
the  movement  will  be  finished  as  prescribed  No. 
444  and  following. 

455.  If  the  left  be  in  front,  the  movement  will 
be  executed  by  inverse  means ;  the  right  com- 
panies will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALIOX PAET    III,      103 

scribed  above  for  tlie  left  companies;  and  the 
two  guides,  placed  respectively,  before  the  right 
and  left  files  of  each  left  company,  will  face  to 
the  left.  At  the  command,  Guides,  2^osts,  given 
by  the  colonel,  the  guides,  who  have  marked  the 
front  of  divisions,  and  the  captains,  will  quickly 
retake  their  places  in  the  column. 

456.  If  the  column  be  marching  at  full  dis- 
tance, the  divisions  will  be  formed  as  prescribed 
No.  236.  If  it  be  marching  at  half  distance,  the 
formation.  wiU  take  place  by  the  commands  and 
•according  to  the  principles  indicated  No.  449  ;  if 
the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  the 
companies  which  should  mark  time  will  march  in 
quick  time  by  the  command  of  their  captams. 

EEMAEK3    OX   THE   FOEMATIOX   OF   DIYISIOXS   FEOM 
A    HALT. 

457.  As  this  movement  may  be  considered  as 
the  element  of  deployments,  it  ought  to  be  exe- 
cuted with  the  utmost  accuracy. 

458.  If  companies  marching  by  the  flank  do 
not  preserve  exactly  their  distances,  there  will  be 
openings  Ijetween  the  files  at  the  instant  of  facing 
to  the  front. 

459.  If  captains  halt  their  companies  too  early, 
they  will  want  space,  and  the  files  which  have  not 
cleared  the  flanks  of  the  standing  companies  wiU 
not  be  able  to  dress  into  line  without  pushing  their 
ranks  laterally. 

4@0.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  companies  be  halt- 
ed too  late,  it  will  be  necessary  for  them  to  incline 
to  the  right  or  left  in  dressing ;  and,  in  deploy- 


104     SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIO^"■ PAET   IV. 

ments,  either  of  these  faults  would  lead  to  error 
in  the  following  companies. 

,461.  As  often  as  the  guide  shall  have  to  step 
out  to  place  himself  before  his  subdivision  in  or- 
der to  mark  the  direction,  he  will  be  particularly 
careful  to  place  himself  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one 
of  the  three  outer  files  of  the  subdivision  when 
thej  shall  be  aligned :  if  he  take  too  much  dis- 
tance, and  neither  of  those  files  finds  itself  against 
him,  the  chiefs  of  the  subdivision  will  have  no 
assured  point  on  which  to  direct  the  alignment. 
0-462.  In  the  formation  of  divisions  either  from 
a  halt  or  on  a  march,  the  platoon  columns  of  the 
companies  of  skirmishers  will  retain  their  relative 
position^  to  the  battalion  column,  and  to  this  end 
the  captain  of  the  second  yjlatoon  column,  when 
the  right  is  in  front,  will  move  his  column  up 
until  his  leading  platoon  is  on  a  line  with  the  last 
division  ;  and  when  the  left  is  in  front,  the  cap- 
tain of  the  first  platoon  column  will  move  his 
column  up  until  his  leading  platoon  is  on  a  line 
with  the  first  division. 

PART   rOUETH. 

DIFFERENT  MODES  OF  PASSING  FROM 
THE  ORDER  IN  COLUMN  TO  THE  OR- 
DER IN  BA.TTLE. 

Aeticle  I. 
Manner  of  determining  the  line  of  battle. 

463.  The  line  of  battle   may  be   marked  or 
determined  in  three  different  manners:  Ist^  by 


17,1.2.  Sckool  of    tKe   Battalion.      j.>j  ^-^ 


m 


^m 


¥^-i. 


'?^' 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PAET  IV.   105 

placing  two  markers  eighty  or  a  hundred  paces 
apart,  on  the  direction  it  is  wished  to  give  to  the 
line ;  2(Z,  by  placing  a  marker  at  the  point  at  which 
it  may  be  intended  to  rest  a  flank,  and  then 
choosing  a  second  point  toward  the  opposite 
flank,  and  there  posting  a  second  marker  distant 
from  the  first  a  little  less  than  the  front  of  the  sul)- 
division  ;  Sdy  by  choosing  at  first  the  points  of 
direction  for  the  flanks,  and  then  determining, 
by  intermediate  points,  the  straight  line  between 
Ihoso  selected  points,  both  of  which  may  some- 
times be  beyond  reach. 

Article  II. 

Mode  of  passing  from   coliimn  at  full  distance 
into  line  of  battle. 

To  the  left  (or  right)  into  line  ofhattle. 

Column  at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  to  the  left  into 
line  of  battle. 

464.  A  column,  right  in  front,  being  at  a  halt, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  to  the  left 
into  line,  he  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  guides 
by  the  means  previously  indicated,  and  then  com- 
mand: 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.     2.  March  (or  double 
quich — March). 

465.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  of 
the  leading  company  will  hasten  to  place  himself 


106      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET   it. 

on  the  direction  of  the  left  guides  of  the  column, 
face  to  them,  and  jjlace  himself  so  as  to  be  oppo- 
site to  one  of  the  three  right  files  of  his  company, 
when  they  shall  be  in  line :  he  will  be  assured  in 
this  position  by  the  lieutenant-colonel. 

466.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated 
by  the  captains,  the  left  front-rank  man  of  each 
company  will  face  to  the  left,  and  rest  his  breast 
lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  his  guide ;  the 
companies  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  the  principle 
of  wheeling  from  a  halt,  conforming  themselves 
to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  S.  0.,  5I"o.  244: 
each  captain  will  turn  to  his  company,  to  ob- 
serve the  execution  of  the  movement,  and,  when 
the  right  of  the  company  shall  arrive  at  three 
paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  command : 

1.  Such  company.     2.  Halt. 

467.  The  company  being  halted,  the  captain 
will  place  himself  on  the  line  by  the  side  of  the 
left  front-rank  man  of  the  company  next  on  th« 
right,  align  himself  correctly,  and  command : 

3.  Right — Deess. 

468.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  dress 
up  between  the  captain  and  the  front-rank  man 
on  its  left,  the  captain  directing  the  alignment  on 
that  man ;  the  front-rank  man  on  the  right  of  the 
right  company,  who  finds  himself  opposite  to  its 
right  guide,  will  lightly  rest  his  breast  against  the 
left  arm  of  this  guide. 


SCHOOL    OF    TIIE   BATTALION PAET    IT.      107 

469.  Each  captain,  having  aligned  hia  company, 
will  command  Feoxt,  and  the  colonel  will  add : 

Guides — ^Posts. 

470.  At  this  command,  the  gnides  will  return  to 
their  places  in  line  of  battle,  each  passing  through 
the  nearest  captain's  interval ;  to  permit  him  to 
pass,  the  captain  will  momentarily  step  before  the 
first  file  of  his  company,  and  the  covering  ser- 
geant beliind  the  same  file.  This  rule  is  general 
for  all  the  formations  into  line  of  battle. 

471.  When  companies  form  line  of  battle,  file 
closers  will  always  place  themselves  exactly  two 
paces  from  the  rear  rank,  which  will  sufliciently 
assure  their  ahgnment, 

472.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  the 
colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  and  majors,  as  well  as 
the  adjutant  and  sergeant-major,  will  return  to 
their  respective  places  in  line  of  battle.  Th  is  rule 
is  general  for  all  the  formations  into  line  of  hat- 
tie  ;  nevertheless,  the  battalion  being  in  the  school 
of  elementary  instruction,  the  colonel  will  go  to 
any  point  he  may  deem  necessary. 

473.  A  column,  with  the  left  in  front,  will  form 
itself  to  the  right  into  line  oflattle^  according  to 
the  same  principles ;  the  left  guide  of  the  left 
company  will  place  himself,  at  the  first  command, 
on  the  direction  of  the  right  guides,  in  a  manner 
corresponding  to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  465,  for 
the  right  guide  of  the  right  company. 

474.  At  the  command  guides  posts,  the  cap- 
tains will  take  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  as 
well  as  the  guides.     This  rule  is  general  for  all 


108     SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PART    IV. 

formations  into  line  of  dattle,  in  wTiich  the  com- 
panies are  aliened  dy  the  left. 

475.  A  column  by  division  may  form  itself  into 
line  of  battle  by  the  same  commands  and  means, 
but  observing  what  follows :  if  the  right  be  in 
front,  at  the  command  halt,  given  by  the  chiefs 
of  division,  the  left  guide  of  each  right  company 
will  plac^  himself  on  the  alignment  opposite  t» 
one  of  the  three  files  on  the  left  of  his  company ; 
tie  left  guide  of  the  first  company,  facing  tow- 
ard the  right,  will  be  assured  on  the  direction 
by  the  lieutenant-colonel ;  the  left  guides  of  the 
other  right  companies  will  align  themselves  cor- 
rectly on  the  division  guides ;  to  this  end  the  di- 
vision guides  (on  the  alignment)  will  invert,  and 
hold  their  pieces  up  perpendicularly  before  the 
centre  of  their  bodies,  at  the  command  left  into 
line,  wheel.  If  the  column  by  division  be  with 
the  left  in  front,  the  right  guides  of  left  compa- 
nies will  conform  themselves  to  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  left  guides  of  right  com- 
panies, and  place  themselves  on  the  line  opposite 
to  one  of  the  three  right  files  of  their  respective 
campanies. 

476.  A  column  in  march  will  be  formed  into 
line,  without  halting,  by  the  same  commands  and 
means.  At  the  command  march,  the  guides  will 
halt  in  their  places,  and  the  lieutenant-colonel 
will  promptly  rectify  their  positions. 

0-477.  The  platoon  columns  of  the  companies 
of  skirmishers  will  be  wheeled  into  line  by 
the  means  prescribed  in  the  S.  C,  No.  262, 
and  following,  observing  what  follows :  if  the 
battalion    column    be    at    a  halt,  at   the    first 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PART  IV.   109 

command  by  the  colonel,  the  captain  of  each  pla- 
toon column  will  command  forward^  guide  left 
(or  right),  and  at  the  command  march,  by  the 
colonel,  each  platoon  column  will  march  to  the 
front  a  platoon  distance,  and  then  be  wheeled 
into  line  as  above  indicated ;  if  the  battalion 
column  is  on  a  march,  at  the  first  command  by  the 
colonel,  the  captain  of  each  platoon  column  will 
caution  his  column  to  continue  the  march  to  the 
front,  and  at  the  command  march,  by  the  colo- 
nel, they  will  continue  the  march,  and  wheel 
into  line  as  above  indicated. 

478.  If.  in  forming  the  column  into  line,  the 
colonel  should  wish  to  move  forward,  ^vithout 
halting,  he  will  command : 

1.  By  companies  left  wheel.     2.  MARcn  (or  douhle 
quick — Maech). 

479.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated 
by  the  captain,  each  company  will  wheel  to  the 
left  on  a  fixed  pivot,  as  prescribed  in  the  >S'.  C, 
No.  266;  the  left  guides  will  step  back  into 
the  rank  of  file  closers  before  the  wheel  is  com- 
pleted, and  when  the  right  of  the  companies 
shall  arrive  near  the  line,  tho  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 

3.  Forward.     4.    Maech.      5.   Guide  centre. 

480.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  in- 
stant the  wheel  is  completed,  the  companies  will 
march  directly  to  the  front.  At  the  fifth  com- 
mand, the  color  and  the  general  guides  will  move 

roi*  XL— to  .     ' 


110      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX — PART    IT, 

rapidly  six  paces  to  the  front.  The  colonel  will 
assure  the  direction  of  the  color ;  the  captains  of 
companies  and  the  men  will,  at  once,  conform 
themselves  to  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line 
of  battle,  to  be  hereinafter  indicated,  Ko.  648  and 
following. 

0-481.  At  the  first  command  by  the  colonel,  the 
captain  of  each  platoon  column  will  caution  his 
column  to  march  straight  to  the  front;  at  the 
second  command  by  the  colonel  each  platoon  col- 
umn, after  marching  to  the  front  a  platoon  dis- 
tance, will  be  wheeled  into  line  by  the  commands 
and  means  prescribed  in  the  S.  C.,  No.  265  and 
following. 

0-482.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  men  of  each 
company  of  skirmishers  will  move  olf  together, 
each  captain  placing  himself  two  paces  in  front 
of  the  centre  of  his  company ;  the  first  sergeant 
will  step  into  the  front-rank.  At  the  fifth  com- 
mand, tlie  captains  of  the  first  and  second  compa- 
nies of  skirmishers  will  commsLnd guide  rigJit^  and 
left,  respectively,  and  the  right  guide  of  the  first, 
will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  right  guide  of  the 
first  battalion  company,  and  at  a  distance  from  the 
latter  of  thirty-three  paces ;  the  left  guide  of  the 
second  will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  left  guide 
of  the  left  battalion  company,  and  at  the  distance 
above  indicated. 

483.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a 
column  left  in  front. 


By  inversion  to  the  right   (or  left)  into  line  of 
battle. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    IT.      Ill 

484.  When  a  column,  right  in  front,  shall  be 
under  the  necessity  of  forming  itself  into  line  fac- 
ed to  the  reverse  riank,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish 
to  execute  this  formation  by  the  shortest  move- 
ment, he  will  command: 

1.  By  inversion^  right  into  line,  wheel.  2.  JBat- 
talion  guide  right. 

485.  At  the  first  command,  the  lieutenant-col- 
onel will  place  himself  in  front,  and  facing  to  the 
right  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  :  at  the 
second  command,  he  will  rectify,  as  promptly  as 
possible,  the  direction  of  the  right  guides  of  the 
column ;  the  captain  of  the  odd  company,  if 
there  be  one,  and  the  column  be  by  di%ision,  will 
promptly  bring  the  right  of  his  company  on  the 
direction,  and  at  company  distance  from  the  divis- 
ion next  in  front ;  the  left  guide  of  the  leading 
subdivision  will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of 
the  right  guides,  and  will  be  assured  in  his  posi- 
tion by  the  lieutenant-colonel ;  which  being  exe- 
cuted, the  colonel  will  command  : 

3.  March  (or  douMe  quiclc — Makch). 

486.  At  this  the  right  front-rank  man  of  each 
subdivision  will  face  to  the  right,  rest  his  breast 
lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  his  guide,  and  the 
battalion  will  form  itself  to  the  right  into  line  of 
battle,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed ; 
which  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 

Guides — Posts. 


112  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PAET  IV. 

487.  If  the  column  be  with  the  left  in  front,  it 
will  form  itself,  bj  inversion,  to  the  left  into  line, 
according  to  the  same  principles. 

488.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  the  battalion, 
when  formed  into  line  of  battle,  to  be  moved  for- 
ward, the  movement  Avill  be  executed  by  the 
commands,  and  according  to  the  principles  indi- 
cated in  ^o.  478  ;  always  preceding  the  com- 
mand, bi/  companies  riglit  (or  left)  wheel^  by  the 
command,  ly  inversion. 

Q-489.  When  the  column  wheels  into  line  by  in- 
version, either  at  a  halt,  or  on  a  march,  at  the  first 
command  by  the  colonel,  the  first  platoon  column 
will  be  faced  to  the  right  and  filed  to  the  left,  and 
the  second  platoon  column  will  be  faced  to  the 
left,  and  filed  to  the  right  around  the  flanks  of  the 
column,  and  take  post  as  prescribed  No.  61. 
When  the  line  again  breaks  into  column,  at  the 
first  command  by  the  colonel,  each  company  of 
skirmishers  will  be  broken  by  platoon,  either  by 
wheeling  or  ploying,  and  at  the  command  march^ 
they  will  be  moved  into  their  proper  positions  in 
column,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for 
similar  movements. 

Successive  Formations 

490.  Under  the  denomination  of  successive 
formations  are  included  aU  those  formations 
where  the  several  subdivisions  of  a  colunm  arrive 
one  after  another  on  the  line  of  battle ;  such  are 
formations  on  the  right,  or  left,  and  faced  to  the 
rear  into  line  of  battl^  as  weU  as  deployments  of 
columns  in  mass. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAKT    IV.      113 

491.  The  successive  formations  which  may  be 
ordered  when  the  column  is  marching,  and  is  to 
continue  marching,  will  be  executed  by  a  combi- 
nation of  the  two  gaits,  quick  and  double  quick 
time. 

Aetiole  III. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  half 
distance,  into  line  of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  (or  right)         ] 

2.  On  the  right  (or  left)  I  •  4.    i-      ^fv„+fi« 
c    -c^           1   u     1     1            i.    ^  into  hne  ot  battle. 

3.  Forward,  by  deployment, 

4.  Faced  to  the  rear,  J 

l5^.  Column  at  half  distance^  to  Vie  left  {or  right)  into  lirte 
of  battle. 

492-  A  column  at  half  distance  having  to  form 

itself  to  the  left  (or  right)  into  line  of  battle,  the 
colonel  will  cause  it  to  take  distances  by  one  of 
the  means  prescribed,  Article  IX.,  Part  Third,  of 
this  school ;  which  being  executed,  he  will  form 
the  column  into  line  of  battle,  as  has  been  indi- 
dated,  ^o.  404,  and  following. 

493.  If  a  column  by  company,  at  half  distance 
be  in  march,  and  it  be  necessary  to  form  rapidly 
into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  By  the  rear  of  column  left  (or  riglit)  into  line^ 
wheel.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — Maech). 

494.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  general 
10* 


114  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALiON PAET  IT. 

guide  will  move  rapidlv  to  the  front,  and  place 
himself  a  little  beyond  the  point  where  the  head 
of  the  column  will  rest,  and  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  guides.  The  captain  of  the  eighth  company 
will  command  :  Left  into  line,  wheel;  the  other 
captains  will  caution  their  companies  to  continue 
to  march  to  the  front. 

0-495.  At  the  same  command,  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon of  the  companies  of  skirmishers,  will  cau- 
tion his  platoon  to  continue  its  march  to  the 
front. 

496.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated 
by  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company,  the  guide 
of  this  company  will  halt  short,  and  the  company 
will  wheel  to  the  left,  conforming  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  for  wheeling  from  a  halt ;  when 
its  right  shall  arrive  near  the  line,  the  captain 
will  halt  the  company,  and  align  it  by  the  left. 
Tlie  other  captains  will  place  themselves  briskly 
on  the  flank  of  the  column ;  when  the  captain  of 
the  seventh  sees  there  is  sufficient  distance  be- 
tween his  company  and  the  eighth  to  form  the 
latter  into  line,  he  will  command :  Left  into  line, 
wheel — March  ;  the  left  guide  will  halt  short,  and 
facing  to  the  rear,  will  place  himself  on  the  line; 
the  company  will  wheel  to  the  left,  the  man  on 
tlie  left  of  the  front  rank  will  face  to  the  left,  and 
place  his  breast  against  the  left  arm  of  the  guide ; 
tjie  captain  will  halt  the  company  when  its  right 
shall  arrive  near  the  line,  and  will  align  it  by  the 
left.  The  other  companies  will  conform  succes- 
sively to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
seventh. 

497,  Each  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  of 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PABT    IV.      115 

his  company  on  the  left  man  in  the  front  rank  of 
the  company  next  on  his  right. 

498.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  be  watchful 
that  the  leading  guide  marches  accurately  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  line  of  battle,  and  directs 
himself  on  the  right  general  guide.  The  senior 
major,  placed  in  rear  of  the  left  guide  of  the 
eighth  company,  will,  as  soon  as  the  guide  of 
the  seventh  company  is  established  on  the  di- 
rection, hasten  in  rear  of  the  guides  of  the  other 
companies,  so  as  to  assure  each  of  them  in  suc- 
cession on  the  line.  The  junior  major,  will  hold 
his  position  abreast  with  the  color  company. 
0-499.  At  the  command  viarch^  by  the  colonel, 
the  chief  of  each  platoon  of  the  platoon  columns 
will  place  liimself  on  its  directing  flank  ;  the 
chief  of  the  second  platoon  of  the  second  platoon 
column,  will  command,  left  into  line.,  wheel.,  and 
he  will  add  march,  aa  soon  as  his  guide  is  abreast 
with  the  left  file  of  itie  last  battalion  company ; 
at  this  the  guide  of  the  platoon  will  halt  fast, 
the  platoon  will  wheel  to  the  left,  and  will  be 
aligned  to  the  left  by  its  chief ;  when  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon  of  the  same  column  judges 
there  is  sufficient  distance  between  his  platoon 
and  the  second  to  form  the  latter  into  line,  will 
command,  left  into  line,  wheel  —  March;  the 
guide  of  this  platoon  will  hasten  to  the  right  of 
the  company,  and  place  himself  abreast  with  one 
of  the  three  right  files,  face  toward  and  cover  the 
left  guide,  the  captain  will  then  dress  the  com- 
pany to  the  left.  When  the  chief  of  the  second 
platoon  of  the  first  platoon  column  arrives  abreast 
with  the  left  file  of  the  first  battalion  company, 


116      SCHOOL    OF   THE   BATTALION PABT    lY. 

it  will  be  wheeled  into  line,  as  also  its  first  pla- 
toon, in  the  manner  prescribed  for  the  platoons 
of  the  second  platoon  column. 

2d.    Column  at  half  distance,  on  the  right  (or  on  the 
left\  into  line  of  battle, 

500.  A  column  by  company,  at  half  distance 
and  right  in  front,  having  to  form  itself  on  the 
right  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  indicate 
to  the  lieutenant-colonel  a  little  in  advance,  the 
point  d'appui,  or  rest,  for  the  right,  as  well  as 
the  point  of  direction  to  the  left ;  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  hasten  with  two  markers,  and  estab- 
lish them  in  the  fallowing  manner  on  the  direc- 
tion indicated.       ** 

501.  The  first  marker  will  be  placed  at  the 
point  d''appui  for  the  right  front-rank  man  of 
the  leading  company ;  the  second  will  indicate 
the  point  where  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  the 
same  company  will  rest  when  in  line ;  they  will 
be  placed  so  as  to  present  the  right  shoulder  to 
the  battalion  when  formed. 

502.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.    On  the  right  into  line.     2.    Battalion^  guide 
right. 

503.  At  the  second  command,  the  right  will 
become  the  directing  flank,  and  the  touch  of  the 
elbow  wUl  be  to  that  side ;  the  right  guide  of  the 
leading  company  will  march  straight-forward 
until  up  with  the  turning  point,  and  each  follow- 


Vol.2. 


Scluiol   111    llv*'    Malliiliini  p^    y -j 


fU^ 


%. 


ij 


Fig.l 


Fig, 


% 


m 


Coiain n   ai  half  d i^tance 
on  tfht  right,  into  tirif  of  battle . 
.VSOO. 


' J 


I 


fri 


rr  It 


SCHOOL    OP   THE    BATTALION' PAET    lY.      117 

ing  guide  will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  one  im- 
mediately preceding. 

0-504.  -A-t  the  same  command  the  chief  of  each 
platoon  column  of  the  companies  of  skirmish- 
ers will  command,  company^  hy  the  leftJlanTc. 

505.  The  leading  company  being  nearly  up 
with  the  first  marker,  its  captain  will  command : 
1.  Right  turn^  and  when  the  company  is  precisely 
up  with  this  marker,  he  will  add :  2.  Maeoh. 

506.  At  the  command  marcli^  the  company 
will  turn  to  the  right;  the  right  guide  will 
so  direct  himself  as  to  bring  the  man  next  to 
him  opposite  to  the  right  marker,  and  when 
at  three  paces  from  him,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  First  company  ;    2.  Halt. 

507.  At  the  second  command,  the  company 
will  halt ;  the  files,  not  yet  in  line,  will  form 
promptly ;  the  left  guide  will  retire  as  a  file 
closer ;  and  thd  captain  will  then  command  : 

3.  UigM — DsESS. 

508.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  align 
itself;  the  two  men  who  find  themselves  oppo- 
site to  the  two  markers,  will  each  lightly  rest 
his  breast  against  the  right  arm  of  his  marker ; 
the  captain,  passing  to  the  right  of  the  front  rank, 
will  direct  the  alignment  on  these  two  men. 
These  rules  are  general  for  all  successive  forma- 
tions. 


118     SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    IV. 

509.  The  second  company  will  continue  to 
marcli  straight-forward ;  when  arrived  opposite 
to  the  left  flank  of  the  preceding  company,  it 
will  turn  to  the  right,  and  be  formed  on  the  line 
of  battle,  as  has  just  been  prescribed;  the  right 
guide  will  direct  himself  so  as  to  come  upon  that 
line  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the  left  of  the 
first  company. 

510.  At  the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the 
line  of  battle,  the  company  will  be  halted  by  its 
captain,  who  will  place  himself  briskly  by  the 
side  of  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  preceding 
company,  and  align  himself  correctly  on  its  front 
rank. 

511.  The  left  guide  will,  at  the  same  time,  place 
himself  before  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his 
company,  and,  facing  to  the  right,  he  will  place 
himself  accurately  on  the  direction  of  the  two 
markers  of  the  preceding  company. 

512.  The  captain  will  then  command : 

ItigJit — ^Deess. 

513.  At  this  command,  the  second  company 
will  dress  forward  on  the  line ;  the  captain  will 
direct  its  alignment  on  the  front-rank  man  who 
has  rested  his  breast  against  the  left  guide  of  the 
company. 

514.  The  following  companies  wUl  thus  come 
successively  to  form  themselves  on  the  line  of 
battle,  each  conforming  itself  to  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  one  next  to  the  right ; 
and  when  they  shall  all  be  established,  the 
colonel  wUl  command: 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    IV.      119 

Guides — Posts. 

515.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  take 
their  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  markers 
placed  before  the  right  company  will  retire. 

516.  If  the  column  be  inarching  in  quick  time, 
and  the  colonel  should  Avish  to  cause  the  move- 
ment to  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  he 
will  add  the  command:  Doulle  quicJc — Maech. 
At  the  command  march,,  all  the  companies  will 
take  the  double-quick  step,  and  the  movement 
will  be  executed  as  prescribed  Xo.  503  and  fol- 
lowing. 

0-517.  At  the  command  march,  \>j  the  captain 
of  the  first  battalion  company,  and  briskly  re- 
peated by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  platoon 
columns  will  face  by  the  left  flank,  and  each  chief 
will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  his  guide  to 
conduct  his  platoon ;  the  first  platoon  column 
taking  the  guide  to  the  right  will  move  straight- 
forward, and  when  its  head  has  arrived  near  the 
flank  of  the  battalion  column,  it  will  be  halted 
until  the  column  has  passed.  When  the  last  com- 
pany has  passed,  the  jjlatoon  column  will  be  put  in 
march,  When  the  first  platoon  column  shall 
have  arrived  at  a  perpendicular  distance  of  thirty- 
three  paces  from,  and  abreast  with  the  marker 
established  on  the  right  of  the  line,  its  chief  will 
command :  Bij  file  right ;  halt  in  his  own  person, 
and  let  his  platoon  file  around  him  parallel  to  the 
line  of  battle,  and  when  the  last  file  has  passed, 
it  will  be  halted  and  faced  to  the  front.  The 
second  platoon  will  pass  to  the  rear  of  the  first, 
and  when  its  right  file  shall  arrive  abreast  with 


120     SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET   IT. 

the  left  file  of  the  first,  it  will  be  halted  by  its 
chief  and  faced  to  the  front.  The  company  will 
be  dressed  to  the  right  by  its  captain. 
0-513.  The  second  platoon  column  will  move  to 
tlie  front,  and  when  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
shall  arrive  abreast  with  the  right  file  of  the  last 
battalion  company  (when  on  the  line  of  battle), 
and  thirty  paces  from  its  file  closers,  he  will  halt 
in  his  own  person  and  let  his  platoon  file  past. 
This  platoon  column  will  then  execute  what  is 
prescribed  for  the  first.  The  company  will  be 
dressed  to  the  left  by  its  captain. 

619.  The  colonel  will  follow  up  the  formation, 
passing  along  the  front,  and  being  always  oppo- 
site to  the  company  about  to  turn :  it  is  thus  that 
he  will  be  the  better  able  to  see  and  to  correct  the 
error  that  would  result  from  a  command  given  too 
soon  or  too  late  to  the  preceding  company. 

520.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will,  with  the  great- 
est care,  assure  the  direction  of  the  guides ;  to  this 
end,  the  instant  that  the  markers  are  established 
for  the  leading  company,  he  will  move  a  little  be- 
yond the  point  at  which  the  left  of  the  next  com- 
pany will  rest,  establish  himself  correctly  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  two  markers,  and  assure  the 
guide  of  the  second  company  on  this  direction ; 
this  guide  being  assured,  the  lieutenant-colonel 
will  place  himself  farther  to  the  rear,  in  order  to 
assure,  in  like  manner,  the  guide  of  the  third  com-, 
pany,  and  so  on,  successively,  to  the  left  of  the 
battalion.  In  assuring  the  guides  in  their  posi- 
tions on  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  take  care  to  let 
them  first  place  themselves,  and  confine  himself 
to  rectifying  their  positions  if  they  do  not  cover 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    IT.      121 

accurately,  and  at  the  proper  distance,  tlie  pre- 
ceding guides  or  markers.  This  rule  is  general^ 
for  all  successive  formations. 

521.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself 
on  the  left  into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same 
principles :  the  captains  will  go  to  the  left  of  their 
respective  companies  to  align  them,  and  shift  af- 
terward to  their  proper  flanks,  as  prescribed  No. 
474. 

522.  In  a  column  left  in  front,  the  platoon  col- 
umns will  be  governed  by  the  same  principles  as 
are  prescribed  for  them  in  a  column  right  in  front. 

EEifARKS    ON    THE    FORMATION    ON   THE    EIGHT,    OB 
LEFT,    INTO    LINE    OF   BATTLE. 

523.  In  order  that  this  movement  may  be  exe- 
cuted with  regularity,  it  is  necessary  to  establish 
the  line  of  battle  so  that  the  guide  of  each  com- 
pany, after  turning,  may  have  at  least  ten  steps  to 
take,  in  order  to  come  upon  that  line. 

524.  In  the  first  exercises,  the  line  of  battle 
wUl  be  established  on  a  direction  parallel  to  that 
of  the  column;  but,  when  the  captains  and  guides 
shall  comprehend  the  mechanism  of  the  move- 
ment, the  colonel  will  generally  choose  oblique 
directions,  in  order  to  habituate  the  battahon  to 
form  itself  in  any  direction. 

525.  When  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle 
forms  a  sensible  angle  with  that  of  the  march  of 
the  column,  the  colonel,  having  changed  the  guide 
as  indicated  No.  502,  will,  before  it  arrives  oppo- 
site the  right  of  the  line,  give  the  head  of  the  col- 

voL.  n. — 11 


122     SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PAET  IT. 

umn  a  new  direction  pai-allel  to  that  line ;  to  tliis 
end,  he  will  indicate  to  the  guide  of  the  leading 
company  a  point  in  advance,  on  which  this  guide 
will  immediately  dkect  himself,  and  the  company 
will  conform  itself  to  the  direction  of  its  guide,  at 
the  command,  or  on  a  mere  caution,  of  the  captain, 
according  as  the  change  of  direction  may  require ; 
each  following  company  will  make  the  same  move- 
ment, on  the  same  ground,  as  it  shall  successively 
arrive.  By  this  means  the  guides  of  all  the  com- 
panies in  the  column  will  have,  after  turning, 
nearly  the  same  number  of  paces  to  take  in  order 
to  come  upon  the  line  of  battle. 

526.  Every  captain  will  always  observe,  in  plac- 
ing himself  on  that  line,  not  to  give  the  command 
dress,  until  after  the  guide  of  his  company  shall 
have  been  assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel. This  rule  is  general,  for  all  succes- 
sive formations. 

527.  Each  captain  will  cause  his  company  to 
support  arms,  the  instant  that  the  captain,  who 
follows  him,  shall  have  commanded  y>'o;if.  This 
r^de  is  general  for  all  successive  formutimis. 

528.  When,  in  the  execution  of  this  movement, 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  commence  firing,  he  wiU 
give  the  order  to  that  effect  to  the  captain  whose 
company  is  the  first  in  line  of  battle ;  this  captain 
will  immediately  place  himself  behind  the  centre 
of  his  company,  and  as  soon  as  the  next  captain 
shall  have  commanded  front,  he  will  commence 
the  fire  by  file,  by  the  commands  prescribed,  school 
of  the  company.  At  the  commnndfire  Ijyfile,  the 
marker  at  the  outer  file  of  this  first  company  wiU 
retire,  and  the  other  will  place  himself  against  the 


Vol.2. 

Scliool 

of 

tlie 

Ball 

alioii^. 

Pi 

/.5 

-t^ 

I      i 

-g' 

= 

:     ■.                                                       ^ 

S                        ri_ 

;          .          .                                                     V 

m' 

1\         ~-                                                            -«     • 

■ 

:  \       \                                               >-  ^ 

1 

■    \        ■       ■                                        sj  "5:^ 

g 

.                •                                     ^  -c 

S    53 

= 

5    r<!! 

i| 

1'=;? 

>   ^  »-^ 

^■5B- 

?^  <5  ^ 

-$     SJ      ^ 

1 

1 

■         •                               s^ 

1 

ss 

21 

1 

t     % 

1 
1 

■         .\^^ 

1 
1 

i 

v^- 

.           % 

%          X 

^--r-^-J 

- ""Ti-f  \  -^  X  --^  ■'  tin 

■ 

1 

<-«<f--i 

^  "■ 

h  '■■ 

l"'- 

-1    ^^' 

h  T 

1 

-1  "^ 

-1  '■ 

-1 

i 

i 

i 

i  ■ 

V 

1 
tr 

1 

1 

i 

-' 

J 

^ 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX PAET    IT.      123 

nearest  man  of  the  next  company.  Tlie  captain 
of  the  latter  will  commence  firing  as  soon  as  the 
captain  of  the  third  company,  in  line,  shall  have 
comman(led/r(9wi;  the  marker  before  the  nearest 
file  of  the  second  company,  in  line,  will  now  re- 
tire, and  the  guide  before  the  opposite  flank  will 
place  himself  before  the  nearest  file  of  the  third 
company,  in  line,  and  so  on,  in  contmuation,  to  the 
last  company  on  the  left  or  right  of  the  battalion, 
according  as  the  formation  may  have  commenced 
with  the  right  or  left  in  front. 

529.  In  all  the  successive  formations,  the  same 
principles  wUl  be  observed  for  the  execution  of 
the  fire  by  file.  This  fire  will  always  be  executed 
by  the  command  of  each  captain  of  company. 

3(L  ColumnathcUfdistaTjice,  forward,  into  line  of  battle.  ■ 

530.  If  it  be  wished  to  form  a  column  by  com- 
pany or  division  at  half  distance,  forward  into  line 
of  battle,  the  colonel  will  first  cause  it  to  close  in 
mass,  and  then  deploy  it  on  the  leading  subdivis- 
ion. 

4ih.  Column  at  half  distance,  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line 
of  battle. 

531.  A  column  being  by  company  at  half  dis- 
tance, right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  line  faced  to 
the  rear,  he  and  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  con- 
form themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  N'os.  500 
and  501,  and  the  colonel  wUl  then  command : 


124      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART   IV, 

1.  Into  line^  faced  to  the  rear.    ^:^  Battalion^  right 
— Face.    3.  Maech  (or  double  quick — Maech). 

532.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the 
leading  company  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right, 
and  put  it  in  march,  causing  it  to  wheel  by  file  to 
the  left,  and  direct  its  march  toward  the  line  of 
battle  which  it  will  pass  in  rear  of  the  left  mark- 
er ;  the  first  file  hf^ving  passed  three  paces  beyond 
the  line,  the  company  will  wheel  again  by  file  to 
the  left,  in  order  to  place  itself  in  rear  of  the  two 
markers ;  being  in  this  position,  its  captain  will 
halt  it,  face  it  to  the  front,  and  align  it  by  the  right 
against  the  markers. 

0-533.  At  the  same  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon  column  of  the  companies  of  skir- 
mishers will  face  his  column  to  the  right,  and 
file  it  to  the  left,  as  prescribed  in  the  S.  C 
Xo.  174;  observing  what  follows,  the  chief 
of  the  second  platoon  will  cause  his  platoon  to 
mark  time  until  the  left  of  the  first  has  arrived 
abreast  with  his  right  file.  The  company,  con- 
ducted by  its  chief,  will  take  position  in  rear  of 
the  first  battalion  company,  as  has  been  hereto- 
fore prescribed. 

534.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  other 
companies  will  face  to  the  right,  each  captain 
placing  himself  by  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 
0-535.  At  the  same  command,  the  second  pla- 
toon column  will  face  to  the  right,  the  chiefs  and 
guides  placing  themselves  as  prescribed  in  the 
8.  a.  No.  174. 

536,  At  the  command  march^  the  companies 
will  put  themselves  in  movement ;  the  left  guide 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    IV.      125 

of  the  second,  who  is  nearest  to  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, Avill  hasten  in  advance  to  mark  that  line  ;  he 
•vnll  place  himself  on  it  as  prescribed  above  for 
successive  formations,  and  thus  indicate  to  his 
captain  the  point  at  which  he  ought  to  pass  the  line 
of  battle  by  three  paces,  in  order  to  wheel  by  file 
to  the  left,  and  then  to  direct  his  company  par- 
allelly  to  that  line. 

537.  As  soon  as  the  first  file  of  this  company 
shall  have  arrived  near  the  left  file  of  the  pre- 
ceding one  already  on  the  line  of  battle,  its  cap- 
tain will  command : 

1.  Second  company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 
4.  Right — Dekss. 

638.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when 
the  company  shall  yet  have  four  paces  to  take  to 
reach  the  halting  point. 

539.  At  the  second  command,  the  company 
will  halt. 

540.  At  the  third,  the  company  will  face  to 
the  front,  and  if  there  be  openings  between  the 
files,  the  latter  will  promptly  close  to  the  right ; 
the  captain  will  immediately  place  himself  by 
the  side  of  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  preceding 
company,  and  align  himself  on  its  front  rank, 

541.  The  fourth  command  will  be  executed  as 
prescribed  No.  513. 

542.  The  following  companies  will  be  con- 
ducted and  estabhshed  on  the  line  of  battle,  as 
just  prescribed  for  the  second,  each  regulating 
itself  by  the  one  that  precedes  it ;  the  left  guides 
will  detach  themselves  in  time  to  precede  their 

11* 


126      SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    IT. 

respective  companies  on  the  line  by  twelve  or 
fifteen  paces,  and  each  place  himself  so  as  to  be 
opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  com- 
pany, when  in  line.  If  the  movement  be  exe- 
cuted in  double  quick  time,  the  moment  it  is 
commenced,  all  the  left  guides  will  detach  them- 
selves at  the  same  time  from  the  column,  and 
will  move  at  a  run,  to  establish  themselves  on  the 
line  of  battle. 

0-543.  At  the  command  march.^  by  the  colonel, 
the  second  platoon  column  will  be  put  in  march  ; 
it  will  be  filed  to  the  left,  and  conducted  by  its 
chief  to  its  position  in  rear  of  the  last  bat- 
talion companv,  according  to  means  prescribed, 
No.  533. 

544.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Guides — ^Posts. 

545.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel,  in 
this  formation,  will  each  observe  what  is  pre- 
scribed for  him  in  that  of  on  the  right,  into  line 
of  battle. 

546.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself 
faced  to  the  rear  into  line  of  battle  according  to 
the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

547.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  should 
arrive  in  front  of  the  right  of  the  line  on  which 
it  is  to  form  into  battle,  the  colonel  and  lieuten- 
ant-colonel will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed, 
Nos.  500  and  501. 

548.  When  the  head  of  the  column  shall  he 
nearly  at  company  distance  from  the  two  mark- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART   IV.      127 

ers  established  on  the  line,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Into  line^  faced  to  the  rear.  2.  Battalion^  hy 
the  right  fiank.  3.  Maech  (or  double  quick — 
Maech). 

549.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will 
caution  their  companies  to  face  bj  the  right 
flank. 

0-550.  At  the  same  command,  the  chief  of  each 
platoon  column  will  caution  it  to  face  by  the 
right  flank. 

551.  At  the  command  march^  briskly  repeated 
by  the  captains  of  companies,  all  the  companies 
will  face  to  the  right ;  the  first  company  will 
then  wheel  by  file  to  the  left,  and  be  directed  by 
its  captain  a  little  to  the  rear  of  the  left  marker ; 
then  pass  three  paces  beyond  the  line,  and  wheel 
again  by  file  to  the  left ;  having  arrived  on  the 
line,  the  captain  wUl  halt  the  company,  and 
ahgn  it  by  the  right.  The  remaining  part  of  the 
movement  will  be  executed  as  heretofore  ex- 
plained. 

0-552.  At  the  same  command,  each  platoon  col- 
umn will  be  faced,  filed  to  the  left,  and.  marched 
into  its  new  position  as  has  been  heretofore  ex- 
plained. 

553.  The  foregoing  principles  are  applicable 
to  a  column,  left  in  front,  and  also  to  a  column 
by  division. 

554.  As  the  subdivisions  approach  the  line  of 
battle,  it  is  necessary  that  their  chiefs  should  so 
du-ect  the  march  as  to  cross  that  line  a  little  in 


128      SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    IT. 

rear  of  their  respective  guides,  who  are  faced  to 
the  basis  of  the  formation;  hence  each  guide 
ought  to  detach  himself  in  time  to  find  himself 
correctly  established  on  the  direction  before  his 
subdivision  shall  come  up  with  him. 

Aeticle  TV. 
Deployment  of  columns  closed  in  mass. 

555.  A  column  in  mass  maj  be  formed  into 
line  of  battle : 

1.  Faced  to  the  front,  by  the  deployment. 

2.  Faced  to  the  rear,  by  the  countermarch 

and  the  deployment. 

3.  Faced  to  the  right  and  faced  to  the  left, 

by  a  change  of  direction  by  the  flank, 
and  the  deployment. 

556.  When  a  column  in  mass,  by  division,  ar- 
rives behind  the  line  on  which  it  is  intended  to 
deploy  it,  the  colonel  will  indicate,  in  advance, 
to  the  lieutenant-colonel,  the  direction  of  the 
line  of  battle,  as  well  as  the  point  on  which  he 
may  wish  to  direct  the  column.  The  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  immediately  detach  himself  with 
two  markers,  and  establish  them  on  that  line, 
the  first  at  the  point  indicated,  the  second  a 
little  less  than  the  front  of  a  division  from  the 
first. 

557.  Deployments  will  always  be  made  upon 
lines  parallel,  and  lines  perpendicular  to  the  line 
of  battle ;  consequently,  if  the  head  of  the  col- 


Sckool   of  tlie   BattaHon. 


^ 


h 


i 

li    ^ 

In 

1      1      ! 

» *  * 

5 

"5 

?■ 

\ 

T  no  1 

^ 

1   ;          "^ 

^ 

1   :    ■  1 
J    '       1    ■ 
-J 

,  .^ 

.     ^■' 

— ■ .-g' 

_:  Ei:  ■  ■' 

h  r"'i 


I     -I      |:      1       " 


<     I 


h.l 


r, 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    IV.      139 

umn  be  near  the  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will 
commence  by  establishing  the  direction  of  the 
column  perpendicularly  to  that  line,  if  it  be  not 
already  so,  by  one  of  the  means  indicated  No. 
291  and  following,  or  Xo.  366  and  following. 
If  the  column  be  in  march,  he  will  so  direct  it 
that  it  may  arrive  exactly  behind  the  markers, 
perpendicularly  to  the  line  of  battle,  and  halt  it 
at  three  paces  from  that  line. 

558.  The  column,  right  in  front,  being  halted, 
it  is  supposed  that  the  colonel  wishes  to  deploy 
it  on  the  first  di\nsion ;  he  will  order  the  left 
general  guide  to  go  to  a  point  on  the  line  of  bat- 
tle a  little  beyond  that  at  which  the  left  of  the 
battalion  will  rest  when  deployed,  and  place  him- 
self correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  markers 
established  before  the  first  division. 

559.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
wiU  command : 

1.   On  the  first  division^  deploy  column.     2.  Bat- 
taliony  left — Face. 

560.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  the  chiefe 
of  the  three  other  divisions  will  remind  them 
that  they  will  have  to  face  to  the  left. 

0-561.  At  the  same  command  the  chief  of  each 
platoon  column  will  caution  it  that  it  will  have 
to  face  to  the  left. 

562.  At  the  second  command,  the  three  last 
divisions  will  face  to  the  left;  the  chief  of  each 
division  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  left 
guide,  and  the  junior  captain  by  the  side  of  the 


130      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET   IT. 

covering  sergeant  of  the  left  company,  who  will 
have  stepped  into  the  front  rank. 

563.  At  the  same  command,  the  lieutenant-col- 
onel will  place  a  third  marker  on  the  alignment 
of  the  two  first,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  lefi 
dies  of  the  right  company,  first  division,  and  then 
place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle  a  few  paces 
beyond  the  point  at  which  the  left  of  the  second 
division  will  rest. 

0-564.  At  the  same  command  the  platoon  columns 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  each  chief  of  platoon 
will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  his  guide. 

565.  The  colonel  will  then  command ; 

3.  Maech  (or  double  quich — Maeoh). 

566.  At  this  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  di- 
vision will  go  to  its  right,  and  command : 

Bight — Deess. 

567.  At  this,  the  division  will  dress  up  against 
the  markers ;  the  chief  of  the  division,  and  its 
junior  captain,  will  each  align  the  company  on 
his  left,  and  then  command  : 

Feont. 

568.  The  three  divisions,  faced  to  the  left,  will 
put  themselves  in  march ;  the  left  guide  of  the 
second  will  direct  himself  parallelly  to  the  line  of 
battle;  the  left  guides  of  the  third  and  fourth  di- 
visions will  march  abreast  with  the  guide  of  the 
second ;  the  guides  of  the  third  and  fourth,  each 


BOHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    IV.      131 

preserving  the  prescribed  distance  between  him- 
self and  the  guide  of  the  division  which  preceded 
his  own  in  the  column, 

569.  The  chief  of  the  second  division  will  not 
follow  its  movement ;  he  will  see  it  file  bj  him, 
and  when  its  right  guide  shall  be  abreast  with 


1.  Second  division.     2.  Halt.      3.  Feoxt. 

570.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
division  shall  yet  have  seven  or  eight  paces  to 
march ;  the  second  when  the  right  guide  shall 
be  abreast  with  the  chief  of  the  division,  and  the 
third  immediately  after  the  second. 

571.  At  the  second  command,  the  division  will 
halt ;  at  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front,  and  if 
there  be  openings  between  the  files,  tlie  chief  of 
the  division  will  cause  them  to  be  promptly  closed 
to  the  right ;  the  left  guides  of  both  companies 
will  step  upon  the  line  of  battle,  face  to  the- right, 
and  place  themselves  on  the  direction  of  the 
markers  established  before  the  first  division,  each 
guide  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his 
company. 

572.  The  division  having  faced  to  the  front,  its 
chief  will  place  himself  accurately  on  the  line  of 
battle,  on  the  left  of  the  first  division ;  and  when 
he  shall  see  the  guides  assured  on  the  direction, 
he  will  command,  Eight — Deess.  At  this,  the 
division  will  be  aligned  by  the  right  in  the  man- 
ner indicated  for  the  first. 

573.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  con- 
tinue to  march ;  at  the  command  halt,  given  to 


132     SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION PABT   IV. 

the  second,  the  chief  of  the  third  will  halt  in  his 
own  person.  j)lace  himself  exactly  opposite  to  the 
guide  of  the  second,  after  this  division  shall  have 
faced  to  the  front  and  closed  its  files;  he  will 
8ee  his  division  tile  past,  and  when  his  right  guide 
shall  be  abreast  with  him,  he  will  command : 

1.   Third  divvsion.     2.  Halt.    3.  Fbont. 

574.  As  soon  as  the  division  faces  to  the  front, 
its  chief  will  place  himself  two  paces  before  its 
eentre,  and  command : 


1.    Third  division,  fontard.     2.    Guide  right. 
3.  Makcu. 


575.  At  the  third  command,  the  division  will 
march  toward  the  line  of  battle ;  the  right  guide 
will  so  direct  himself  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of 
the  inJin  on  the  left  of  the  second  division,  and 
when  the  division  is  at  three  paces  from  the  line 
of  battle,  its  chief  will  halt  it  and  align  it  by  the 
right. 

576.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  con- 
form himself  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed 
for  the  third. 

0-577.  At  the  command  march,  by  the  colonel, 
the  platoon  columns  will  be  put  in  motion ;  the 
first  column,  conducted  by  its  chief,  will  wheel  by 
file  to  the  left,  and  having  marched  a  distan'ce  of 
thirty-three  paces,  counting  from  the  guide  of  the 
first  platoon,  it  will  be  filed  to  the  right  and  es- 
tablislied  in  its  proper  position  in  rear  of  the  first 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAKT    IV.      133 

battnliou  company,  the  second  platoon  passing  in 
renr  of  the  first,  as  indicated  No.  517.  The  sec- 
ond column  will  be  marched  obliquely  forward 
until  the  right  tiles  of  the  platoons  are  abreast 
witii  the  riglit  hie  of  tiie  last  battalion  company 
anil  thirty-three  paces  from  it,  when  its  chief  will 
halt  and  deploy  it  on  its  first  platoon,  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  for  deploying  a  bat- 
talion column. 

578.  Tlie  deployment  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

GuUUs — Post. 

579.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  resume 
tiieir  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  markers  will 
retire. 

580.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  first  division  with- 
out halting  the  ('(thunn,  he  will  make  the  dispo- 
sitions iruiicated  Nos.  557  and  55.S,  and  when  the 
firstdivision  shall  have  arrived  at  a  short  distance 
from  the  line,  he  will  command: 

1,  On  tfiejirst  dicisiofi,  deploy  column.  2.  Bat- 
talion^ hy  the  leftfiank.  3.  Maech  (or  double 
quick  March). 

581.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  caution  it  to  remain  faced  to 
the  front  and  will  command,  First  division ;  the 
other  chiefs  will  caution  their  divisions  to  face  by 
the  left  tlank. 

0-582.  At  the  same  command  the  chiefs  of  the 
VOL.  IL — 12 


134    SCHOOL  OF  the  battalion — part  IV. 

platoon  columns  will  caution  them  to  face  bv  the 
left  flank. 

583.  At  the  command  march,  given  when  the 
first  division  of  the  battalion  companies  is  three 
paces  from  the  markers,  and  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  the  rear  divisions,  the  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  command  Halt,  and  the  divis- 
ion will  be  aligned  by  the  right  against  the 
markers  as  prescribed  Xos.  50(i  and  5G7 ;  the 
other  divisions  will  face  to  the  left,  their  chiefs 
hastening  to  the  left  of  their  divisions.  The 
second  division  will  conform  its  movements  to 
what  is  prescribed  Nos.  569  and  following.  The 
third  and  fourth  divisions  will  execute  what  is 
prescribed  Xo.  573  and  following  ;  but  the  chief 
of  the  fourth  division  will  halt  in  his  own  per- 
son at  the  command  march  given  by  the  chief 
of  the  division  which  precedes  him,  and  when 
the  right  of  each  division  arrives  abreast  with 
its  cliief,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Such  division,  hy  the  right  Jlanh — Makch. 
2.  Guide — Right. 

0-584.  At  the  command  march,  by  the  colonel, 
each  platoon  column  will  face  by  the  left  flank, 
and  be  conducted  to  its  proper  place  inline  by  the 
means  prescribed  Xo.  577. 

585.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  the  po- 
sition of  the  guides,  conforming  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  520.  The  senior  major  will  follow 
the  movement  abreast  with  the  fourth  division. 
The  junior  major  will  hold  himself  abreast  with 
the  third  division. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    lY.       135 

586.  If  the  colonel  sliall  wish  to  deploy  the 
fuluiiHi  without  halting  it,  and  to  continue  the 
march,  the  markers  will  not  be  posted;  the 
movement  will  bo  executed  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  the  same  means  as  the  foregoing,  but 
with  the  following  modifications: 

587.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  connnand,  1.  Guide  right.  2. 
Quirk  time.  At  the  command  "SUKiicn  (ot  double 
quick — Makch),  given  by  the  colonel,  the  first 
division  will  march  in  quick  time  and  will  take 
the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right;  the  captains 
will  jdaco  themselves  on  the  right  of  their  re- 
Bj>octive  companies;  the  captain  on  the  right  of 
tiie  battalion  will  take  points  on  the  ground  to 
assure  the  direction  of  the  nuirch.  The  chief 
of  the  seeond  division  will  allow  his  division  to 
file  jiast  him,  and  when  he  sees  its  right  abreast 
of  liim,  he  will  command,  1.  Second  dirisfion  hy 
the  rif/ht  Jiank.  2.  March.  8.  Guide  right., 
and  when  this  division  shall  arrive  on  the  align- 
ment of  the  first,  ho  will  cause  it  to  march  in 
quick  time.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions  will 
deploy  according  to  the  same  principles  as  the 
second. 

Q-588.  At  the  first  command,  the  platoon  col- 
mnns  will  bo  cautioned  by  their  chiefs  as  indi- 
cated No.  5S2.  At  the  command  march  (or 
donhle  quick — Makch),  the  platoons  will  face  by 
the  left  fiank,  each  chief  placing  himself  as  pre- 
scribed No.  50-4;  each  platoon  column  will  be 
moved  forward  parallel  to  the  line  and  when  the 
right  file  of  the  first  column  is  abreast  with  the 
right   file   of    the   first   battalion   company,    its 


136      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    IV. 

chief  will  cause  it  to  execute  what  is  prescribed 
for  the  second  platoon  column.  No.  577,  and 
when  the  company  shall  have  attained  its  dis- 
tance, it  will  take  the  quick  step.  Tlie  second 
platoon  column  will  he  moved  jjarallel  to  the 
line,  and  when  its  right  files  shall  arrive  abreast 
witli  the  right  file  of  the  last  battalion  company, 
it  will  be  faced  by  the  right  tlank,  and  execute 
what  lias  been  prescribed  for  the  first  platoon 
column. 

689.  The  colonel  will  command,  Guide  centre, 
and  at  this  the  color-bearer  and  right  general 
guide  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  in  advance  of 
the  line,  the  colonel  will  assure  the  direction  of 
the  color-bearer.  The  lieutenant- colonel,  junior 
major,  and  the  right  comi)anies,  will  immedi- 
ately conform  themselves  to  the  principles  of  the 
march  in  line  of  battle.  The  senior  major,  left 
companies,  and  the  left  general  guide,  as  they 
arrive  on  the  line,  will  conform  themselves  to 
the  same  principles.  If  the  column  bo  march- 
ing in  double  quicTc  time,  when  the  last  company 
shall  liave  arrived  on  the  line,  should  the  colonel 
wish  to  resume  the  double  quick  he  will  so  com- 
mand. 

590.  The  colonel  will  see,  pending  the  move- 
ment, that  the  principles  just  prescribed  are  duly 
observed,  and  particularly  that  the  divisions,  in 
deploying,  be  not  halted  too  soon  nor  too  late. 
He  will  correct  promptly  and  quickly  the  faults 
that  may  be  committed,  and  prevent  their  prop- 
agation. This  rule  is  general  for  all  deploy- 
ments. 

59L  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  instead  of 


SCnOOL    OF    THB    BATTALIOX PAET    IV.      137 

deploying  it  on  tlie  first,  the  colonel  shall  wish 
to  deploy  it  on  the  rearmost  division,  he  will 
cause  the  dispositions  to  be  made  indicated  No. 
55G  and  followinfr;  but  it  will  be  the  right  gen- 
eral guide  wlioni  he  will  send  to  place  himself  be- 
yond the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the  bat- 
talion will  re>t  when  deployed. 

592.  The  colonel  will  then  command: 

1 .  On  the  fourth  (or  such)  division,  deploy  column. 
2.  Battalion,  right — Face. 

593.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the 
fourth  divisi«^n  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast;  tho 
chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will  caution  them 
that  they  will  have  to  face  to  the  right. 

0  594.  At  the  same  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon  column  will  caution  it  that  it  will 
have  to  face  to  the  right;  the  chief  of  the  sec- 
ond j)latoon  column  will  caution  it  that  it  wiU 
have  to  face  to  the  left. 

595.  At  tho  second  command,  the  first  three 
divisions  will  face  to  tho  right;  and  the  chief  of 
each  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  right 
guide. 

596.  At  tho  same  command,  the  lieutenant-col- 
onel will  ])lace  a  third  marker  between  the  first 
two,  so  that  this  marker  may  be  opposite  to  one 
of  the  three  right  tiles  of  the  left  company  of 
tlio  division;  the  lieutenant-colonel  wiU  then 
place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle  a  few  paces 
beyond  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the 
third  division  will  rest  when  deployed. 

0-597    At  the  same  command,  the  first  platoon 
12* 


138      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    IV. 

column  will  face  to  the  right  and  the  second  to 
the  left;  the  chief  of  each  platoon  will  place 
himself  bj  the  side  of  liis  guide. 

598.  The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — Makoh). 

599.  At  this  command,  the  three  right  divis- 
ions will  put  themselves  in  inarch,  the  guide  of 
the  first  so  directing  himself  as  to  pass  three 
paces  within  the  line  marked  by  the  right  gen- 
eral guide.  The  chief  of  the  third  division  will 
not  follow  its  movement;  he  will  see  it  file  past, 
halt  it  when  its  left  guide  shall  be  abreast  with 
him,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front ;  and,  if 
there  be  openings  between  the  files,  he  will  cause 
thorn  to  be  promptly  closed  to  the  left. 

600.  The  cliief  of  the  fourth  division,  when 
he  sees  it  nearly  unmasked  by  the  three  others, 
will  command: 

1.   Fourth  division^  forward.     2.    Guide  left.     3. 
Mabch. 

601.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be 
given  the  instant  the  fourth  is  unmasked,  this 
division  will  approach  the  line  of  battle,  and 
when  at  three  paces  from  the  markers  on  that 
line,  its  chief  will  halt  it,  and  command  : 

Left — Dress. 

602.  At  this  command,  the  division  will  dress 
forward  against  the  markers;  the  chief  of  the 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    IV.      139 

division  and  the  junior  captain  will  each  align 
the  company  on  his  right,  and  then  command : 

Fbont. 

603.  The  instant  that  the  third  division  is  un- 
masked, its  chief  will  cause  it  to  approach  the 
lino  c)f  battle,  and  halt  it  in  the  manner  just  pre- 
scribed for  the  fourth. 

604.  The  moment  the  division  halts,  its  right 
guide  and  the  covering  sergeant  of  its  left  com- 
pany will  step  on  the  line  of  battle,  placing  them- 
selves on  the  prolongation  of  the  markers  estab- 
lished in  front  of  the  fourth  division  ;  as  soon  as 
they  shall  be  assured  in  their  positions,  the  divis- 
ion will  be  aligned  as  has  just  been  prescribed 
for  the  fouriii. 

605.  The  second  and  first  divisions  which  will 
have  continued  to  march,  will,  in  succession,  be 
halted  and  aligned  by  the  left,  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  the  third ;  the  chiefs  of  these  divisions 
will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed 
No.  573.  The  second  being  near  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, the  command  will  not  be  given  for  it  to 
move  on  this  line,  but  it  will  be  dressed  up  to  it. 
0-606.  At  the  command  march,  by  the  colonel, 
the  platoon  columns  will  be  put  in  motion,  the 
first  conducted  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  will 
move  straight-forward,  the  guide  of  the  first  pla- 
toon being  so  directecT  as  to  pass  three  paces 
within  the  line  marked  by  the  right  general 
guide ;  when  the  column  has  arrived  near  that 
gui.le,  the  chief  will  command :  1.  By  the  right 
flank.     2.  March  ;  and  having  moved  such  dis- 


140      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART   IV. 

tance  that  the  first  platoon  is  thirty  paces  from 
the  battalion  line  of  file  closers,  its  chief  will 
command  right  about,  halt.  The  guides  will  be 
established  on  a  line  passing  through  the  right 
guide  of  the  first  battalion  company,  and  each 
platoon  dressed  to  the  right  by  its  chief.  The 
column  will  then  be  deployed  on  its  first  platoon. 
The  second  platoon  column  will  be  put  in  march, 
and  conducted  so,  that  the  right  files  of  the  pla- 
toons shall  cover  the  right  file  of  the  last  battal- 
ion company,  when  the  column  will  be  halted, 
faced  to  the  front,  and  deployed  on  its  first 
platoon. 

607.  The  deployment  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Guides — Posts. 

608.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  division 
and  the  guides  will  resume  their  places  in  line  of 
battle,  and  the  markers  will  retire. 

609.  The   lieutenant-colonel  will   assure  the 

Sositions  of  the  guides  by  the  means  indicated, 
lO.  520,  and  the  senior  major  will  follow  the 
movement  abreast  with  the  fourth  division.  The 
junior  major  will  hold  himself  abreast  with  the 
third  division. 

610.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colo- 
nel shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  fourth  division, 
he  will  make  tlie  dispositions  indicated  No.  557, 
and  following;  and  when  the  head  of  the  column 
shall  arrive  within  a  short  distance  of  the  line,  he 
will  command : 

1.  On  the  fourth  duision,  deploy  column.    2.  Bat- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IT.   141 

talion,  ly  the  right  flank.    3.  March  {or  doulle 
quick — March). 

611.  At  the  first  command,  the  cliief  of  the 
fourth  division  will  caution  it  to  remain  faced  to 
the  front,  and  will  command,  Fourth  division  : 
the  chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will  caution 
their  divisions  to  face  to  the  right. 
0-612.  At  the  same  command,  the  chiefs  of  the 
first  platoon  column  will  caution  it  that  it  will 
have  to  iacQ  l»y  the  right  flank,  and  the  chiefs  of 
the  second  ]>latoon  column  will  caution  it  that  it 
will  liave  to  tace  l»y  tlio  left  flank. 

613.  At  the  connnand  march,  briskly  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  the  first  three  divisions,  the 
chief  of  the  fourth  will  command  :  Halt.  The 
first  three  divisions  will  face  to  the  right,  and  be 
directed  parallelly  to  tlie  line  of  battle.  The 
chief  of  each  of  these  dixisions  will  jdace  him- 
self by  the  side  of  its  riglit  guide.  The  chief  of 
the  third  division  will  see  his  division  file  past 
him,  and  when  his  left  guide  is  abreast  of 
him,  he  will  halt  it,  and  face  it  to  the  front. 
The  chief  of  the  fourth  division,  when  he  shall 
see  it  nearly  unmasked,  will  command :  1. 
Fourth  dirisioji,  forzcard ;  2.  Guide  left;  3. 
March  (or  double  quick — March).  This  divis- 
ion will  move  toward  the  line  of  battle,  and 
when  at  tliree  paces  from  this  line,  it  will  be 
halted  by  its  chief,  and  aligned  by  the  left. 

614.  the  chief  of  the  third  division  will  move 
his  division  forward,  conforming  to  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  by  the  fourth. 

615.  The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  first  divia- 


142      BCnOOL    OF    THE    T5ATTALI0N PART    IV. 

ions,  after  haltinj:^  their  divisions,  will  conform 
to  what  is  prescribed  No.  605. 
0-616.  At  the  command  march,  by  the  colonel, 
the  platoon  colunms  will  be  moved  and  estab- 
lished by  the  means  prescribed  Nos.  597  and  606. 
617.  if  the  colonel  should  wish  to  deploy  on 
tlie  fourth  di\-ision  without  halting  the  column, 
and  to  continue  to  march  forward,  he  will  not 
have  markers  posted,  and  the  movement  will  bo 
executed  by  the  same  commands  and  the  same 
means,  witli  tlie  following  modifications :  the 
fourth  di\nsion,  when  unmasked,  will  be  moved 
forward  in  quick  time,  and  will  continue  to 
march,  instead  of  being  halted,  and  will  take  the 
touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  The  third  division, 
on  being  unmasked,  will  be  moved  to  the  front 
in  double  quick  time,  but  when  it  arrives  on  the 
alignment  of  the  fourth  it  will  take  the  quick 
step,  and  dress  to  the  left  until  the  command 
Guide  centre,  is  given  by  the  colonel.  The  chiefs 
of  the  second  and  first  divisions  will  conform  to 
what  has  been  prescribed  for  tlie  third.  When 
the  first  division  shall  arrive  on  the  line,  the  col- 
onel may  cause  the  battalion  to  take  the  double 
quick  step. 

0-618.  The  platoon  columns  will  be  moved  and 
established  as  has  l)een  already  prescribed,  ob- 
serving what  follows :  the  first  platoon  column, 
in  marching  by  the  flank,  will  incline  to  the  right, 
BO  as  to  permit  the  first  division  to  pass,  and  when 
that  division  faces  by  the  left  flank,  it  will  also  face 
by  the  same  flank,  deploy  on  its  first  platoon,  and 
shorten  the  step  until  the  proper  distance  ia  at- 
tained. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTA.LI05^ — PART  IV.   143 

619.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  will 
conforiji  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  589. 

620.  It  is  not  necessary  that  the  movement  be 
entirely  completed  before  halting  tlie  battalion. 
As  soon  as  the  part  of  the  battalion  already 
fonned,  shall  have  arrived  on  the  line  of  battle, 
the  colonel  will  lialt  the  battalion;  the  divisions 
not  in  line  will  each  comjilete  the  movement. 

621.  To  dejiloy  the  colunm  on  an  interior  divis- 
ion, the  colonel  will  cause  the  line  to  be  traced  by 
tlie  means  above  indicated,  and  the  general  guides 
will  move  briskly  on  the  line,  as  prescribed  Nos, 
558  and  501.  This  being  executed,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.  On  such  division,  deploy  column.  2.  Battalion 
ovticard — Face.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

622.  Whether  the  column  be  with  the  right  or 
left  in  front,  the  divisions  which,  in  the  order  in 
battle,  belong  to  the  right  of  the  directing  one, 
will  face  to  the  right ;  the  others,  except  the 
directing  division,  will  tace  to  the  left ;  the  divis- 
ions in  front  of  the  latter  will  deploy  by  the 
means  indicated  No.  593  and  following ;  those  in 
its  rear  will  deploy  as  is  prescribed  No.  560  and 
following. 

623.  The  directing  division,  the  instant  it  finds  . 
itself  unmasked,  will  approach  the  line  of  battle, 
taking  the  guide  left  or  right,  according  as  the 
right  or  left  of  the  column  may  be  in  front.  The 
chief  of  this  division  will  align  it  by  the  directing 
flank,  and  then  step  back  into  the  rear,  in  order 


144      SCHOOL    OP    THE    IJATTALION PAKT    IT. 

momentarily  to  pive  place  to  the  chief  of  the  next 
for  aligninf:^  the  next  division. 
0-624.  Tiie  platoon  columns  will  bo  moved  and 
established  accordinfr  to  the  principles  which  have 
been  already  jtroscrihed. 

625.  T'le  lictitcnant-colonel  will  assure  the  po- 
sitions of  the  ^Miides  of  divisions,  which,  in  the  lino 
of  battle  take  the  ri^dit  of  the  directing'  division, 
and  the  senior  niajor  will  assure  the  positions  of 
tlio  other  ii:ui<les.  The  Junior  major  will  hold  him- 
self abreast  with  the  third  division. 

626.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel 
will  command: 

1,  On  such  division^  deploy  coluvin.  2.  Bntt<iUoj\^ 
hy  the  rifjht  and  leftjianks.  3.  Makcu  (or  rfou- 
hU  quick — March). 

627.  The  divisions  which  are  in  front  of  the 
directing:  one  will  deploy  by  the  means  indicated 
No.  (511  and  followinj,';  tiiose  in  rear,  as  j)re- 
scribed  No.  581  and  following. 

628.  The  directing  division,  when  unnnisked, 
will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  fourth 
division,  No.  013. 

0-629.  The  platoon  columns  will  be  moved  and 
established  according  to  the  means  already  indi- 
cated. 

630.  The  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  senior  and 
junior  majors,  will  conform  to  wliat  has  been  pre- 
scribed Nos.  581>  and  02o. 

631.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  deployments 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles, 
and  by  inverse  means. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    IJATTALIOX — PAKT    IV.      145 

BKMARKS    OX    THE    DEPLOYMENT    OF    COLUMNS, 
CLOSED    IN    MASS. 

632.  All  the  divisions  ought  to  deploy  rect- 
angularly, t(»  march  off  abreast,  and  to  preserve 
their  distaufcs  toward  the  line  of  battle. 

633.  Each  division,  the  instant  that  it  is  un- 
iniisktd,  ouL'lit  to  ])e  marched  toward  the  line  of 
battle,  and  to  be  aligned  upon  it  by  the  Hank  next 
to  the  directing  division  ;  the  latter,  whether  the 
right  or  left  \>v  in  front,  -will  always  be  aligned  by 
the  Hank  next  to  the  poi7U  iVuppui,  when  the 
dei)loynient  is  made  on  the  first  or  last  division  ; 
but  if  the  column  be  deployed  on  an  interior  divis- 
ion, this  division  will  be  aligned  by  the  flank 
which  %taH  that  of  direction. 

634.  The  chiefs  of  division  will  see  that,  in 
deploying,  the  princijdes  prescribed  for  marching 
by  the  flank  are  "well  observed,  and  if  openings 
l)etween  the  files  occur,  which  ought  not  to  hap- 
pen except  on  broken  or  difficult  grounds,  the 
oi)enings  ought  to  bo  promjitly  closed  toward  the 
directing  flank  as  soon  as  tie  divisions  face  to 
the  front. 

635.  If  a  chief  of  division  give  the  command 
halt^  or  the  conunand  Jjy  the  r'ujlit  or  left  Jlank^ 
too  siKjn  or  too  late,  his  division  will  be  obliged 
to  obliijue  to  the  right  or  left  in  approaching  the 
lino  of  battle,  and  his  fault  may  lead  the  follow- 
ing subdivision  into  error. 

636.  In  the  divisions  which  deploy  by  the  left 
fliink,  it  is  always  the  left  guide  of  each  company 
who  ought  to  place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle, 

VOL.  n. — 13 


146    ecnooL  of  the  battalion — part  it. 

to  mark  the  direction ;  in  divisions  whicli  deploy 
by  the  right  flank,  it  is  the  right  guide. 

637.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass, 
may  be  formed  to  the  left  or  to  the  riglit  into  line, 
in  the  same  manner  as  a  column  at  half  distance, 
and  by  the  means  indicated  No.  494  and  following. 

638.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass, 
may  be  formed  on  the  right  or  on  the  left  into 
line  of  battle,  as  a  column  at  half  distance ;  but 
in  order  to  execute  this  movement,  without  ar- 
resting the  march  of  the  column,  it  is  necessary 
that  the  guides  avoid,  with  the  greatest  care, 
shortening  the  step  in  turning,  and  that  the  men 
near  them,  respectively,  conform  themselves  rap 
idly  to  the  movements  of  their  guides.  A  column 
by  company  or  division,  closed  in  mass,  can  be 
formed  into  line  faced  to  the  rear,  but  the  guide 
will  move  at  double  quick  or  a  run. 

KEMAEKS    ON    INTERSIONS. 

639.  Inversions  giving  frequently  the  means 
of  forming  line  of  battle,  in  the  promptest  man- 
ner, are  of  great  utility  in  the  movements  of  an 
army. 

640.  The  application  that  may  be  made  of  in- 
versions in  the  formations  to  the  right  and  to  the 
left  in  line  of  battle,  has  been  indicated  No.  484 
and  following.  They  may  also  be  advantageously 
employed  in  the  successive  formations. 

641.  Formations,  by  inversion,  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles  as  formations  in 
the  direct  order ;  but  the  colonel's  first  command 
will  always  begin  hy  inversion. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    BATTALION — PAET   IV.      147 

642.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle  by 
inversion,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish,  by  form- 
ing it  into  roluinn,  to  bring  it  back  to  the  direct 
order,  he  will  cause  it  either  to  hreak  or  to  ploy  by 
company,  or  by  di^^sion,  accordingly  as  the  col- 
umn may  have  been  by  company  or  by  division 
before  it  had  been  formed  into  line  of  battle  by 
inversion. 

643.  When  a  battalion  in  line  of  battle,  formed 
by  inversion,  has  to  be  ployed  into  column,  the 
movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
same  princijiles  as  if  the  line  were  in  the  direct 
order,  but  observing  wliat  follows. 

644.  If  it  be  intended  that  the  column  shall  be 
by  division,  with  the  first  in  front,  or  by  com- 
pany, with  the  first  company  in  front,  the  colonel 
will  announce  in  the  second  command — left  in 
front,  because  the  battalion  being  in  line  of 
battle  by  inversion,  that  subdivision  is  on  the  left. 

645.  Each  chief  whose  subdivision  takes  posi- 
tion in  the  cohnnn  in  front  of  the  directing  one, 
will  conduct  his  subdivision  till  it  halts;  and 
each  chief  whose  subdivision  takes  position  in 
rear  of  tiie  directing  one,  will  halt  in  his  own 
person  when  up  with  the  preceding  right  guide, 
and  see  his  subdivision  file  past;  and  each  chief 
will  align  his  subdivision  by  the  right.  "When 
the  column  is  to  be  put  in  march,  the  second 
command  will  be — guide  left^  because  the  proper 
right  is  in  front. 

646-  For  the  same  reason,  if  it  be  intended  that 
the  last  subdivision  shall  be  in  front,  right  in 
front,  will  be  announced  in  the  second  command ; 
the  subdivisions  will  be  aligned  by  the  left,  and 


148     scnooL  OF  the  battalion — paet  t. 

to  put  the  column  in  marcli,  the  second  command 
will  be,  guide  right^  because  the  proper  left  is  in 
front. 

0-647.  Whenever  the  line  is  formed  by  inversion, 
the  companies  of  skirmishers  will  occupy  the 
relative  positions  in  rear  of  the  first  and  last 
battalion  companies  respectively,  as  prescribed 
No.  489.  When  the  column  is  formed,  from  a 
battalion  in  line  by  inversion,  the  platoon 
columns  will  be  moved,  and  established  on  the 
proper  reverse  flank. 

PART  FIFTH. 

Articlb  I. 

To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

648.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  and 
supposed  to  be  the  directing  one,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  march  in  line  of  battle,  he  will  give 
the  lieutenant-colonel  an  intimation  of  his  pur- 
pose, place  himself  about  forty  paces  in  rear  of 
the  color-file,  and  face  to  the  front. 

649.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself 
a  like  distance  in  front  of  the  same  file,  and  face 
,to  the  colonel,  who  will  establish  him  as  correctly 
as  possible,  by  signal  of  the  sword,  perpendicu- 
iarly  to  the  line  of  battle  opposite  to  the  color- 
bearer.  The  colonel  will  next,  above  the  heads 
of  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  color-bearer,  take  a 
point  of  direction  in  the  field  beyond,  if  a  distinct 
one  present  itself,  exactly  in  the  prolongation  of 
those  first  two  points. 


l^bl.  2. 


ira.2      ^^     School   of    tlie    Brtttali 


t  _       i 


!._.._  Ji a i  .___-^ 


ulvaiuu-  II,  line  of  iM/ll,       X"- iiU  „„,/    fitW. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART   V.       149 

650.  The  colonel  will  then  move  twenty  paces 
farther  to  the  rear,  and  establish  two  niai'kers  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  straight  line  passing 
through  the  color-bearer  and  the  lieutenant- colo- 
nel ;  these  markers  will  face  to  the  rear,  the  first 
placed  about  twenty-five  paces  behind  the  rear 
rank  of  the  battalion,  and  the  second  at  the  same 
distance  from  the  first. 

651.  The  color-bearer  will  be  instructed  to 
take,  the  moment  the  lientenant-colonel  shall  be 
established  on  the  perpendicular,  two  points  on 
the  ground  in  the  straight  line  which,  drawn 
from  himself,  would  pass  between  the  heels  of 
that  officer ;  the  first  of  these  points  will  be 
taken  at  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  the  color- 
bearer. 

652.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1 .  Batta lion^  foricard. 

653.  At  this,  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard 
will  advance  six  paces  to  the  front;  the  corporals 
in  the  rear  rank  will  place  themselves  in  the 
front  rank,  and  these  will  be  replaced  by  those  in 
the  rank  of  file  closers ;  at  the  same  time  the  two 
general  guides  will  move  in  advance,  abreast 
with  the  color-bearer,  the  one  on  the  right,  op- 
posite to  the  captain  of  the  right  company,  the 
other  opposite  to  the  sergeant  who  closes  the  left 
of  the  battalion. 

0-654.  At  this  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant 
of  each   of  the   companies   of  skirmishers   will 
place  themselves  as  prescribed  iTo.  483,  and  each 
13* 


150      SCHOOL    or    THE    BATTALION PAJKT   T. 

captain   will  command :    such  company    of  skir- 
mishers, forward. 

655.  The  captains  of  the  left  wing  will  shift, 
passing  before  the  front  rank,  to  the  left  of  their 
respective  companies ;  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of 
the  battalion  will  step  back  into  the  rear  rank. 
The  covering  sergeant  of  the  company  next  on 
the  left  of  the  color-company,  will  step  into  the 
front  rank. 

656.  The  lieutenant-colonel  having  assured  the 
color-bearer  on  the  line  between  himself  and  the 
corporal  of  the  color-file,  now  in  the  front  rank, 
will  go  to  tlie  position  which  will  be  hereinafter 
indicated,  Xo.  665. 

657.  The  senior  major  will  place  himself  six  or 
eight  paces  on  either  flank  of  the  color-rank. 
The  junior  major  Avill  hold  himself  in  the  position 
prescribed  Ko.  35,  Title  I. 

658.  The  colonel  will  then  command : 

2.  Maech  (or  double  quick — Maech) 

659.  At  this  command,  the  battalion  will  step 
off  with  life ;  the  color-bearer,  charged  with  the 
step  and  direction,  will  scrupulously  observe  the 
length  and  cadence  of  the  pace,  marching  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  two  points  previously  taken, 
and  successively  taking  others  in  advance  by  the 
means  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company ; 
the  corporal  on  his  right,  and  the  one  on  his  left, 
will  march  in  the  same  step,  taking  care  not  to 
turn  the  head  or  shoulders,  the  color-bearer  sup- 
porting the  color-lance  against  the  hip. 

0-660.  At  the  same  command,  briskly  repeated 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX PAET    V.       151 

by  their  chiefs,  the  companies  of  skirmishers  will 
slip  oft',  taking  the  guides  as  indicated  Xo.  482. 

661-  The  two  general  guides  will  march  in  the 
same  step  with  the  color-rank,  each  maintaining 
himself  abreast,  or  nearly  so,  with  that  rank,  and 
neither  occupying  himself  with  the  movement  of 
the  other. 

662-  The  three  corporals  of  the  color-guard, 
now  in  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion,  will  march 
well  aligned,  elbow  to  elbow,  heads  direct  to  the 
front,  and  witljout  deranging  the  line  of  their 
shoulders  ;  the  centre  one  will  follow  exactly  in 
the  trace  of  the  color-bearer,  and  maintain  the 
same  step,  without  lengthening  or  shortening  it, 
except  on  an  intimation  from  the  colonel  or  lieu- 
tenant-colonel, although  he  should  find  himself 
more  or  less  than  six  paces  from  the  color-rank. 

663.  The  covering  sergeant  in  the  front  rank 
between  the  color-company  and  the  next  on  the 
left,  will  march  elbow  to  elbow,  and  on  the  same 
line,  with  the  three  corporals  in  the  centre,  his 
head  well  to  the  front. 

664.  The  captains  of  the  color-company,  and 
the  company  next  to  the  left,  will  constitute, 
with  the  three  corporals  in  the  centre  of  the 
front  rank,  the  basis  of  alignment  for  both  wings 
of  the  battalion ;  they  will  march  in  the  same 
step  w^ith  the  color-bearer,  and  exert  themselves 
to  maintain  their  shoulders  exactly  in  the  square 
with  the  direction.  To  this  end,  they  will  keep 
their  heads  direct  to  the  front,  only  occasionally 
casting  an  eye  on  the  three  centre  corporals, 
with  the  slightest  possible  turn  of  the  neck,  and 
if  they  perceive  themselves  in  advance,  or  in  rear 


152       SCHOOL    OF    TUE    BATTALION — PAKT    X. 

of  these  corporals,  the  captain,  or  two  captains, 
will  almost  insensibly  shorten  or  lengthen  the 
step,  so  as,  at  the  end  of  several  paces,  to  regain 
the  true  alignment,  Avithout  giving  sudden  checks 
or  impulsions  to  the  wings  beyond  them  respect- 
ively. 

665.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  twelve  or 
fifteen  paces  on  the  right  of  the  captain  of  the 
color-company,  will  maintain  this  captain  and 
the  next  one  beyond,  abreast  with  the  three 
centre  corporals ;  to  this  end,  he  will  caution 
either  to  lengthen  or  to  shorten  the  step,  as  may 
be  necessary,  which  the  captain,  or  two  captains, 
will  execute  as  has  just  been  explained. 

666.  AH  the  other  captains  will  maintain 
themselves  on  the  prolongation  of  this  basis; 
and,  to  this  end,  they  will  cast  their  eyes  toward 
the  centre,  taking  care  to  turn  the  neck  but 
slightly,  and  not  to  derange  the  direction  of  their 
shoulders. 

667.  The  captains  will  observe  the  march  of 
their  comjjanies,  and  prevent  the  men  from  get- 
ting in  advance  of  the  line  of  captains;  they 
will  not  lengthen  or  shorten  step  except  when 
evidently  necessary;  because,  to  correct,  with 
too  scrupulous  attention,  small  faults,  is  apt  to 
cause  the  i)roduction  of  greater — loss  of  calm- 
ness, silence,  and  equality  of  step,  each  of  which 
it  is  so  important  to  maintain. 

668.  The  men  will  constantly  keep  their  heads 
well  directed  to  the  front,  feel  lightly  the  elbow 
toward  the  centre,  resist  pressure  coming  from 
the  flank,  give  the  greatest  attention  to  the 
squareness  of  the  shoulders,  and  hold  themselves 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    Y.        153 

always  very  slightly  behind  the  line  of  the  cap- 
tains, in  order  never  to  shut  out  from  the  view 
of  the  latter  the  basis  of  alignment;  tliey  will, 
from  time  to  time,  cast  an  eye  on  the  color-rank, 
or  on  the  general  guide  of  the  wing,  in  order  to 
march  constantly  in  the  same  step  with  those 
advanced  j)ersons. 

669.  Pending  the  march,  the  line,  determined 
by  two  markers,  will  be  prolonged,  by  placing  in 
proportion  as  the  battalion  advances,  a  third 
marker  in  the  rear  of  the  first,  then  the  second 
marker  will  quit  his  place  and  go  a  like  distance 
in  rear  of  the  third ;  the  first  marker  will,  in  his 
turn,  do  the  like  in  respect  to  the  second,  and  bo 
on,  in  succession,  as  long  as  the  battalion  con- 
tinues to  advance;  each  marker,  on  sliifting  posi- 
tion, taking  care  to  face  to  the  rear,  and  to  cover 
accurately  the  two  markers  already  established 
on  the  direction.  A  staff  officer,  or  the  quarter- 
master-sergeant, designated  for  the  purpose,  and 
"who  will  hold  himself  constantly  fifteen  or  twenty 
paces  facing  the  marker  farthest  from  the  bat- 
talion, will  caution  each  marker  when  to  shift 
place,  and  assure  him  on  the  direction  behind 
tlie  other  two. 

670.  The  colonel  will  habitually  hold  himself 
about  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  his 
battalion,  taking  care  not  to  put  himself  on  the 
lino  of  markers  ;  if,  for  exam])le,  by  the  slanting 
of  the  battalion,  or,  the  indications  which  will  be 
given,  Nos.  680  and  following,  he  finds  that  the 
march  of  the  color-bearer  is  not  perpendicular, 
he  will  promptly  command: 


154     SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PABT    V. 

Point  of  direction  to  the  right  (or  left). 

671.  At  this  command,  the  senior  major  will 
hasten  thirty  or  forty  paces  in  advance  of  the 
color-rank,  halt,  face  to  the  colonel,  and  place 
himself  on  the  direction  which  the  latter  will  in- 
dicate by  si^'nal  of  the  sword;  the  corporal  in 
the  centre  of  the  battalion  will  then  direct  him- 
self upon  the  senior  major,  on  a  caution  from  the 
colonel,  advancing,  to  that  end,  the  opposite 
shoulder ;  the  corporals  on  liis  right  and  left 
will  conform  themselves  to  his  direction. 

672.  The  color-bearer  will  also  direct  himself 
upon  the  senior  major,  advancing  the  opposite 
shoulder,  the  senior  major  causing  him,  at  the 
same  time,  to  incline  to  the  right  or  left,  until  ha 
shall  exactly  cover  the  corporal  of  his  file ;  the 
color-bearer  will  then  take  points  on  the  ground 
in  this  new  direction. 

673.  The  two  general  guides  will  conform 
themselves  to  the  new  direction  of  the  color- 
rank. 

674.  The  officer  charged  with  observing  the 
successive  replacing  of  the  markers  in  the  rear 
of  the  centre,  will  establish  them  promptly  on  the 
new  direction,  taking  for  a  basis  the  color-bearer 
and  the  corporal  of  his  file  in  the  centre  of  the 
battalion  ;  the  colonel  will  verify  the  new  direc- 
tion of  the  markers. 

675.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  from  the  position 
given  Ko.  005,  will  see  that  the  two  centre  com- 
panies, and  successively  all  the  others,  conform 
themselves  to  the  new  direction  of  the  centre, 
but  without  precipitancy  or  disorder;    he   will 


Pol 


155 

ign- 
tho 

tho 
ains 
5  of 

the 
zap- 

lOUt 

rect 

tho 

that 
'Ctly 
ihed 
xact 

will 
)lor- 
>iQts 
•r. 

ad- 
te  as 
bat^ 
•hor- 
i  iU 


irses 
ints, 
■med 
s,  as 


■  111*    BnUalioil  . 


-1 


i   ^ 


m  H H M F 


''M 


1 


//(/•  rfff/il  i,r  Irif  y"(i7l. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BaTTaUOX PATTT    T.        155 

then  endeavor  to  maintain  that  basis  of  align- 
ment for  the  battalion,  perpendicnlarlj  to  tbe 
direction  pursued  bv  the  color-t^earer. 

676.  He  will  often  observe  the  march  of  the 
two  wing3 ;  and.  if  he  discover  that  the  captains 
neglect  to  conform  themselves  to  tlie  basis  of 
alignment,  he  will  recall  their  attention  by  the 
command — captain  of  isuch)  company^  or  cap- 
tains of  (such)  companies^  on  the  line — without 
however,  endeavoring  too  scrupulotislj  to  correct 
small  faults. 

677.  The  senior  major  on  the  flank  of  the 
color-rank  wilL  dtiring  the  march,  place  himself, 
from  time  to  time,  twenty  paces  in  front  of  that 
rank,  face  to  the  rear,  and  place  himself  correctly 
on  the  prolongation  of  the  markers  established 
behind  the  centre,  in  order  to  verily  the  exact 
march  of  the  color-bearer  on  that  line ;  he  wHl 
rectify,  if  necessary,  the  direction  of  the  color- 
bearer,  who  will  immediately  take  two  new  points 
on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the  major. 

678.  All  the  principles  applicible  to  the  ad- 
vance in  line,  are  the  same  for  a  suhordinate  as 
for  the  directing  battalion ;  but  when  the  bat- 
talion under  instruction  is  supposed  to  be  suI-ot- 
dinate^  no  markers  "will  be  placed  behind  ita 
centre. 

EE30JBXS  ON  THE  ADVANCE  IN  LIXE  OF  BATTLE. 

679.  If.  in  the  exercises  of  detaik  or  courses 
of  elementary  instruction,  the  officers,  sergeants, 
corporals,  and  men.  have  not  been  well  confirmed 
in  the  principles  of  the  position  under  arms,  as 


156       SCHOOL    OF  THE    BATTALION PAET   V. 

well  as  in  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  the 
march  of  the  battalion  in  line  will  he  floating, 
unsteady,  and  disunited. 

680.  If  the  color-bearer,  instead  of  marching 
perpendicularly  forward,  pursue  an  oblique  di- 
rection, the  battalion  will  slant;  crowdings  in 
one  wing,  and  openings  in  the  other,  will  follow, 
and  these  defects  in  the  march,  becoming  more 
and  more  embarrassing  in  proportion  to  the  de- 
viation from  the  perpendicular,  will  commence 
near  the  centre. 

681.  It  is  then  of  the  greatest  importance  that 
the  color-bearer  should  direct  himself  perpendic- 
ularly forward,  and  that  the  basis  of  alignment 
should  always  be  perpendicular  to  the  line  pur- 
sued by  him. 

682.  If  openings  be  formed,  if  the  files  crowd 
each  other,  if,  in  short,  disorder  ensue,  the  reme- 
dy ought  to  be  applied  as  promptly  as  possible, 
but  calmly,  with  few  words,  and  as  little  noise  as 
practicable. 

683.  The  object  of  the  general  guides,  in  the 
march  in  line  of  battle  is,  to  indicate  to  the  com- 
panies near  the  flanks  the  step  of  the  centre  of 
the  battalion,  and  to  afi'ord  more  facility  in  es- 
tablishing the  wings  on  the  direction  of  the  cen- 
tre if  they  should  be  too  much  in  the  rear ;  hence 
the  necessity  that  these  guides  should  maintain 
the  same  step,  and  march  abreast,  or  very  nearly 
so,  with  the  color-rank,  which  it  will  be  easy  for 
them  to  do  by  casting  from  time  to  time  an  eye 
on  that  rank. 

684.  If  the  battalion  happen  to  lose  the  step, 
the  colonel  will  recaU  its  attention  by  the  com- 


Tol.\ 


PI.L9 


mmm.mmmmAmmmi 


w^m- 


m^t^^m^^ 


1     tl J__ T 


ni!inmifi';i','i!i!ih'i!-!,i:jr.i:r^;^!KH.-'!'-iffig 


'-BW'.'c'-.t^ 


T..-^ 


i t i 


.Sohool    of     rhp 


c 


b   i 


ffllL Jl. 


-h  n    H X- r 


£■ 


ri 


SCHOOL     OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    Y.       157 

mand,  to  the — Step;  captains  and  tlieir  compa- 
nies will  immediately  cast  an  eye  on  the  color- 
rank,  or  one  of  the  general  guides,  and  promptly 
conform  themselves  to  the  step. 

685.  Finally,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  to 
the  attainment  of  regularity  in  the  march  in  line 
of  battle,  to  habituate  the  battalion  to  execute 
with  as  much  order  as  promptness  the  movements 
prescribed  Xo.  GTO  and  following,  for  rectifying 
the  direction  ;  it  is  not  less  essential  that  com- 
manders of  battalions  should  exercise  themselves, 
with  the  greatest  care,  in  forming  their  own  coup 
d'cBil,  in  order  to  be  able  to  judge  with  precision 
the  direction  to  be  given  to  their  battalions. 

Aeticle  II. 
Oblique  maxch  in  line  of  battle. 

686.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  oblique, 
he  will  command  : 

1.  Bight  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

687.  At  the  first  command,  the  senior  major 
will  place  himself  in  front  of,  and  faced  to  the 
color-bearer. 

688-  At  the  command  march^  the  whole  bat- 
talion will  take  the  oblique  step.  The  companies 
and  captains  will  strictly  observe  the  principles 
established  in  the  school  of  the  company. 

689.  The  first   command  will  be   briskly  re- 

VOL.  u. — 14 


158      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET   T. 

peated  bj  the  captains  of  the  companies  of  skir- 
mishers. At  the  command  march  tliej  will  step 
off,  and  be  governed  by  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  company. 

690-  The  senior  major  in  front  of  the  color- 
bearer  ought  to  maintain  the  latter  in  a  line  with 
the  centre  corporal,  so  that  the  color-bearer  may 
oblique  neither  more  nor  less  than  that  corporal. 
He  will  carefully  observe  also  that  they  follow 
parallel  directions  and  preserve  the  same  length 
of  step. 

691-  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  take  care  that 
the  captains  and  the  three  corporals  in  the  centre 
keep  exactly  on  a  line  and  follow  parallel  direc- 
tions, 

692-  The  colonel  will  see  that  the  battalion 
preserves  its  parallelism ;  he  will  exert  himself  to 
prevent  the  tiles  from  opening  or  crowding.  If 
he  perceive  the  latter  fault,  he  will  cause  the  files 
on  the  flank,  to  which  the  battalion  obliques,  to 
open  out. 

693.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  direct  march  to 
be  resumed,  wall  command : 

1.  Forward.     2.  Maech. 

694.  At  the  command  march^  the  battalion 
will  resume  the  direct  march.  The  senior  major 
will  place  himself  thirty  paces  in  front  of  the 
oolor-bearer,  and  face  to  the  colonel,  who  will 
establish  him,  by  a  signal  of  the  sword,  on  the  di- 
rection wliich  the  color-bearer  ought  to  pursue. 
The  latter  will  immediately  take  two  points  on 
the  ground  between  himself  and  the  senior  major. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX PABT    V         159 

695-  In  resuming  the  direct  rncarch,  care  will 
be  taken  that  the  men  do  not  close  the  intervals 
which  may  exist  between  the  tiles  at  once ;  it 
chould  be  done  almost  insensibly. 

Remarks  on  the  oblique  march- 

696-  The  object  of  the  oblique  step  is  to  gain 
ground  to  the  right  or  left,  preserving  all  the 
while  the  primitive  direction  of  the  line  of  battle, 

697.  It  is  then  essential  that  tlie  corporals  in 
the  centre  of  the  battalion,  and  the  captaing  of 
companies,  should  follow  parallel  directions,  and 
maintain  themselves  at  the  same  height ;  without 
which  they  will  give  a  false  direction  to  the  bat- 
talion. 

698-  The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  will 
exert  themselves  to  prevent  the  files  from  crowd- 
ing; for,  without  such  precaution  the  oblique 
march  cannot  be  executed  with  facility, 

Abticle  III. 

To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
and  to  align  it. 

699.  The  battalion,  marching  in  the  line  of 
battle,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  h© 
will  command  : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt. 

700.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion 
will  halt ;  the  color-rank  and  the  general  guides 
will  remain  in  front ;    but  if  the  colonel  should 


160      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    T. 

not  wish  immediately  to  resume  the  advance 
in  line,  nor  to  give  a  general  alignment,  he  will 
command : 

Color  and  general  guides — Posts. 

701.  At  this  command,  the  color-rank  and 
general  guides  will  retake  their  places  in  line  of 
battle,  the  captains  in  the  left  wing  will  shift  to 
the  right  of  their  companies. 

702.  If  the  colonel  should  then  judge  it  ne- 
cessary to  rectify  the  alignment,  he  will  com- 
mand: 

Captains^  rectify  the  alignment. 

703.  The  captains  will  immediately  cast  an 
eye  toward  the  centre,  align  themselves  accu- 
rately on  the  basis  of  the  alignment,  which  the 
lieutenant-colonel  will  see  well  directed,  and  then 
promptly  dress  their  respective  companies.  The 
lieutenant-colonel  will  admonish  such  captains 
as  may  not  be  accurately  on  the  alignment,  by 
the  command :  Captains  of  (such)  company^  or 
captains  of  (such)  companies^  move  up  or  fall 
hack. 

704.  But  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give 
the  battalion  a  general  alignment,  either  parallel 
or  oblique,  instead  of  rectifying  it  as  above,  he 
will  move  some  paces  outside  of  one  of  the 
general  guides  (the .  right  will  here  be  supposed) 
and  caution  the  right  general  guide  and  the 
color-bearer  to  face  him,  and  then  establish  them 
by  signal  of  the  sword,  on  the  direction  which 


Vol.  2.      Sckool  of    the  Battalion.     I'L20 


^ 


?5 


5,  5 


BCHOOL    07    THE   BATTAUO:^ — PAET    Y.       161 

ho  may  wish  to  give  to  the  battalion.  As  soon 
as  they  shall  be  correctly  established,  the  left 
general  guide  will  place  himself  on  their  direc- 
tion, and  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the  senior 
major.  The  color-bearer  will  carry  the  color- 
lanco  perj)endicularly  between  his  eyes,  and  the 
two  cor[)orals  of  his  rank  will  return  to  their 
places  in  the  front  rank  the  moment  he  shall  face 
to  the  colonel. 

705.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command  : 

1.   Guides — On  the  Lvse. 

706.  At  this  command,  the  right  guide  of  each 
conii)any  in  the  right  wing,  and  the  left  guide  of 
each  com])any  in  the  left,  will  each  j)lace  himself 
on  the  direction  of  the  color-bearer  and  the  two 
general  guides,  tace  to  the  color-bearer,  place 
himself  in  rear  of  the  guide  who  is  next  before 
him  at  a  distance  equal  to  the  front  of  his  com- 
pany, afid  align  himself  upon  the  color-bearer 
and  the  general  guide  beyond. 

707.  The  captains  in  the  right  wing  will  shift 
to  the  left;  of  their  companies,  except  the  captain 
of  the  color-company,  who  will  remain  on  its 
right,  but  stej)  into  the  rear  rank ;  the  captains 
in  the  left  wing  will  shift  to  the  right  of  their 
companies. 

708.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  promptly  rec- 
tify, if  necessary,  the  positions  of  the  guides  of 
tlie  right  wing,  and  the  senior  major  those  of 
the  other ;  which  being  executed,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

14* 


162      SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION PABT   Y. 

2.   On  the  centre — Dress. 

709.  At  this  command,  the  companies  will 
move  np  in  quick  time  against  the  guides,  where, 
having  arrived,  each  captain  will  align  his  com- 
pany according  to  prescribed  principles,  the  lieo- 
tenant-colonel  aligning  the  color-company. 

710.  If  the  alignment  be  oblique,  tlie  captains 
will  take  care  to  conform  their  companies  to  it 
in  conducting  them  toward  the  line. 

711.  The  battalion  being  aligned,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

3.   Color  and  guides — Posts. 

712.  At  this  command,  the.  color-bearer,  the 
general  and  company  guides,  and  the  captains  in 
the  right  wing,  will  take  their  places  in  the  line 
of  battle,  and  the  color-bearer  wiJl  rejdace  the 
heel  of  the  color-lance  against  the  right  hip. 

713.  If  the  new  direction  of  the  line  of  bat- 
tle be  such  that  one  or  more  companies  find 
thofnselves  in  advance  of  that  line,  the  colonel, 
before  establishing  the  general  guides  on  the 
line,  will  cause  such  companies  to  be  moved  to 
the  rear,  either  by  the  back  step,  or  by  first 
facing  about,  according  as  there  may  be  less  or 
more  ground  to  be  repassed  to  bring  the  com- 
panies in  rear  of  the  new  direction. 

714.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give  a 
general  alignment,  and  the  color  and  general 
guides  are  not  on  the  line,  he  wiU  cause  them  to 
move  out  by  the  command : 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    Y.      163 

1.    Color  and  general  guides — On  the  Line, 

715.  At  this  command,  the  color-hearer  and 
the  general  guides  will  place  themselves  on  the 
line,  conforming  to  what  is  prescrihed  No.  704. 
0-716.  In  the  alignments,  the  companies  of  skir- 
mishers will  conform  to  the  movements  of  the 
first  and  last  battalion  companies  respectively, 
and  preserve  their  relative  positions  to  them. 

Article  IV. 
Change  of  direction  in  marching  in  line  of  battle 

717.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  change  direction 
to  the  right,  he  will  command: 

1.    Change  direction  to  the  right.     2.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

718.  At  the  command  march^  the  movement 
will  commence ;  the  color-rank  will  shorten  the 
step  to  fourteen  or  seventeen  inches,  and  direct 
itself  circularly  to  the  right,  taking  care  to  advance 
the  left  shoulder,  but  only  insensibly  ;  the  senior 
major  will  place  himself  before  the  color-bearer, 
facing  him,  and  so  direct  his  march  that  he  may 
describe  an  arc  of  a  circle  neither  too  large  nor 
too  small ;  ho  will  also  see  that  the  color-bearer 
takes  steps  of  fourteen  or  seventeen  incheSj  ac- 
cording to  the  gait. 

719.  The  right  general  guide  will  wheel  on 
the  right  captam  of  the  battalion  as  his  pivot; 


164     sonooL  OF  the  battalion — part  y. 

the  left  general  guide  will  circularly  march  in 
the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches  or  thirty-three 
inches,  according  to  the  gait,  and  will  align  him- 
self upon  the  color-bearer  and  the  right  general 
guide. 

720.  The  corporal  placed  in  the  centre  of  the 
battalion,  will  take  steps  of  fourteen  or  seventeen 
inches,  and  will  wheel  to  the  right  by  advancing 
insensibly  the  left  shoulder ;  the  battalion  will 
conform  itself  to  the  movement  of  the  centre ; 
to  this  end,  the  captain  of  the  color-company, 
and  the  captain  of  the  next  to  the  left,  will  at- 
tentively regulate  their  march,  as  well  as  the  di- 
rection of  their  shoulders,  on  the  three  centre 
corporals.  All  the  other  captains  will  regulate 
the  direction  of  their  shoulders  and  the  length 
of  their  step  on  this  basis. 

721.  The  men  will  redouble  their  attention  in 
order  not  to  pass  the  line  of  captains. 

722.  In  the  left  wing,  the  pace  will  be  length- 
ened in  proportion  as  the  file  is  distant  from  the 
centre  ;  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company  who 
closes  the  left  flank  of  the  battalion  will  take 
steps  of  twenty-eight  or  thirty-three  inches,  ac- 
cording to  the  gait, 

723.  In  the  right  wing  the  pace  will  be  short- 
ened in  proportion  as  the  file  is  distant  from  the 
centre ;  the  captain  who  closes  the  right  flank  will 
only  slowly  turn  in  his  person,  observing  to  yield 
ground  a  little  if  pushed. 

724.  The  colonel  will  take  great  care  to  pre- 
vent the  centre  of  the  battalion  from  describing 
an  arc  of  a  circle,  either  too  great  or  too  small, 
in  order  that  the  wings  may  conform  themselves 


SCHOOL    OF  THE    BATTALION PART    T.        165 

to  its  movement.  He  will  see  also  that  the  cap- 
tains keep  their  companies  constantly  aligned 
upon  the  centre,  so  that  there  may  be  no  open- 
ing and  no  crowding  of  files.  He  will  endeavor 
to  prevent  faults,  and,  should  they  occur,  correct 
them  without  noise. 

725.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  before  the 
battalion,  will  give  his  attention  to  the  same  ob- 
jects. 

726.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  direct 
march  to  be  resumed,  he  will  command  : 

1,  Forward.     2,  Makch. 

727.  At  the  command  march  the  color-rank, 
the  general  guides  aad  the  battalion,  will  resume 
the  direct  march ;  the  senior  major  will  immedi- 
ately place  himself  thirty  or  forty  paces  in  front, 
face  to  the  colonel,  placed  in  rear  of  the  centre, 
who  will  establish  him  by  signal  of  the  sword  on 
the  perpendicular  direction  which  the  corporal  in 
the  centre  of  the  battalion  ought  to  pursue;  the 
senior  major  will  immediately  cause  the  color- 
bearer,  if  necessary,  to  incline  to  the  right  or  left, 
so  as  to  be  exactly  opposite  to  his  file ;  the  color- 
bearer  will  then  take  two  points  on  the  ground 
between  himself  and  the  major. 

728.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  endeavor  to 
give  to  the  color-company  and  the  next  on  the 
left  a  direction  perpendicular' to  that  pursued  by 
the  centre  corporal ;  and  all  the  other  companies, 
without  precipitancy,  will  conform  themselves  to 
that  basis. 

0-729.  In  changing  direction,  the  companies  of 


160   SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PAET  V. 

skirmishers  will  execute  what  is  prescribed  No. 
Y22. 

Aeticlk  V. 

To  march  in  retreat,  in  line  of  battle. 

730.  The  battalion  being  halted,  if  it  be  the 
wish  of  tiie  colonel  to  cause  it  to  march  in  retreat, 
ho  will  command : 

1.   Face  to  the  rear.     2,    Battalion^  about — Face, 

731.  At  the  first  command  the  color-rank  and 
general  guides,  if  in  advance,  will  take  their  places 
in  line.  At  the  second  command  the  battalion 
will  face  about,  the  color-bearer  will  j)as3  into 
the  rear  rank,  now  leading;  the  corporal  of  his 
file  will  step  behind  the  corporal  next  on  his 
own  right,  to  let  the  color-bearer  pass,  and  then 
step  into  the  front  rank,  now  rear,  to  re-form  the 
color-file;  the  colonel  will  i)lace  himself  behind 
the  front  rank,  become  the  rear  ;  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  and  senior  major  will  place  themselves 
before  the  rear  rank,  now  leading. 

732.  At  the  second  command  the  companies 
of  skirmishers  will  face  about  with  the  battal- 
ion. 

733.  The  colonel  will  take  post  forty  paces  be- 
hind the  color-file,!,'in  order  to  assure  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel on  the  perpendicular,  who  will  place 
himself  at  a  like  distance  in  front,  as  prescribed 
fai-  the  advance  inline  of  battle. 

T34.  If  the  battalion  be  the  one  charged  with 
the  direction,  the  colonel  will  establish  markers  in 


BOnOOL    OP    THE    BATTALION PAET    Y.       167 

the  manner  indicated  No.  G50,  except  that  they 
will  face  to  the  battalion.  If  the  markers  be  al- 
ready established,  theofficer  charged  with  replac- 
ing them  in  succession  will  cause*  them  to  face 
about,  the  moment  that  the  battalion  executes 
this  movement,  and  then  the  marker  nearest  to 
the  battalion  will  hasten  to  the  rear  of  the  two 
others. 

735.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colo- 
nel will  coiiiinand: 

;;.   lUittalion^  forward. 

736.  At  this  command,  the  color-bearer  will 
advance  six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of  file  closers, 
accompanied  by  the  two  corporals  of  his  guard 
of  that  rank,  the  centre  corporal  stepping  back 
to  let  the  color-bearer  pass ;  the  corporal  of  the 
color-file  in  the  front-rank,  now  rear,  will  re- 
place the  color-bearer  when  the  latter  steps  out, 
the  two  file  closers  nearest  this  centre  corporal 
will  unite  on  him  behind  the  color-guard  to  serve 
as  a  basis  of  alignment  for  the  line  of  file  closers; 
the  two  general  guides  Avill  place  themselves 
abreast  with  the  color-rank,  the  covering  ser- 
geants will  ])l:ice  themselves  in  the  line  of  file 
closers,  and  the  captains  in  the  rear  rank,  now 
leading  ;  the  captains  in  the  left  wing,  now  right, 
will,  if  not  already  there,  shift  to  the  left  of  their 
coin|)anies,  now  become  the  right. 

737.  The  colonel  will  then  command : 

4.  MAEcn  (or  double  quick — Maech). 


168       SCHOOL   OF    THE   BATTALION PART   Y. 

738.  Tlie  battalion  will  march  in  retreat  on  the 
same  principles  which  govern  the  advance  in  line: 
the  centre  corporal  behind  the  color-bearer  will 
march  exactly  in  his  trace. 

739.  If  it  be  the  directing  battalion,  the  color- 
bearer  will  direct  himself  on  the  markers,  who 
will  of  their  own  accord,  each  i)lace  himself  in 
succession  beiiind  tlie  marker  most  distant,  on 
being  aj)i)roached  by  the  battalion  ;  the  officer 
charged  wkh  the  superintendence  of  the  marker* 
will  carefully  assure  them  on  the  direction, 

740.  Ill  the  case  of  a  subordinate  battalion, 
the  color-bearer  will  maintain  himself  on  the  per- 
pendicular by  means  of  points  taken  on  the 
ground. 

0  741-  At  the  fourth  command  by  the  colonel, 
the  companies  of  skirmishers  will  march  to  the 
rear,  retaining  their  relative  positions  with  refer- 
ence to  the  first  and  last  battalion  companies, 

742.  The  colonel,  lientenant-colonel,  senior  and 
junior  majors  will  each  discharge  the  same  func- 
tions as  in  the  advance  in  line. 

743.  Tiie  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  on  the  out- 
side of  the  file  closers  of  the  color  company,  will 
also  maintain  the  three  tile  closers  of  the  basis  of 
alignment  in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction  : 
the  other  tile  closers  will  keep  themselves  align- 
ed on  this  basis. 

Aeticle  YI. 

To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in  retreat,  and  to 
face  it  to  the  front. 

744.  The  colonel  having  halted  the  battalion, 


SCHOOL    OF  THE    BATTALION PART    T.       169 

and  wishinir  to  face  it  to  the  front,  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Face,  to  the  front.    1.  Battalion^  about — Face. 

745.  At  the  second  command,  the  color-rank, 
general  gui<les,  captains,  and  covering  sergeants, 
will  all  retake  their  hal)itual  places  in  line  of  bat- 
tle, and  the  color-bearer  will  repass  into  the  front 
rank. 

0-746.  At  the  second  command  the  companies 
of  skinni>hers  will  face  al>out  with  the  battalion. 

747.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle 
by  the  front  rank,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command: 

1.  Battalion^  right  about.      2.    Maiicil 

748.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion 
will  face  to  the  rear  and  move  off  at  the  same 
gait  by  the  rear  rank.  The  principles  prescribed 
Nos.  TST)  and  following  will  be  carefully  observed. 

749.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  the  battalion 
to  march  again  by  the  front,  he  will  give  the  same 
commands. 

0-750.  At  the  command  march,  the  companies 
of  skirmishers  will  come  to  the  right  about  with 
the  battalion,  taking  care  to  preserve  their  rela- 
tive positions  with  regard  to  the  battalion  com- 
panies. 

VOL.  IL — 15 


l70      SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION — PABT    V. 

Aeticle  Vll. 

Change  of  direction  in  marching  in  retreat, 

751-  A  battalion  retiring  in  line  will  change  di- 
rection by  the  commands  and  means  indicated 
No.  717  and  following;  the  three  file  closers,  uni- 
tedbehind  the  color-rank,  will  conform  themselves 
to  the  movement  of  this  rank  and  wheel  like  it; 
the  centre  file  closer  of  the  three  will  take  steps 
of  fourteen  or  seventeen  inches,  according  to  the 
gait,  and  keep  himself  steadily  at  the  same  dis- 
tance from  the  color-bearer  ;  the  line  of  file  clos- 
ers will  conform  themselves  to  the  movements 
of  its  centre,  and  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  main- 
tain it  on  that  basis. 

0-752-  The  comj)anie9  of  skirmishers,  when  the 
battalion  changes  direction,  will  conform  to  the 
movements  of  the  first  and  last  battalion  com- 
panies. 

AjiTiCLE  yill. 

Passage  of  obstacles,  advancing  and  retreating. 

753.  The  battalion  advancing  in  line  will  be 
supposed  to  encounter  an  obstacle  which  covers 
one  or  more  companies ;  the  colonel  will  cause 
them  to  ploy  into  column  closed  in  mass,  in  rear 
of  the  next  company  toward  the  color,  which 
will  be  executed  in  the  following  manner.  It  wili 
be  supposed  that  the  obstacle  only  covers  the 
third  company,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Third  company^  obstacle. 


% 


I'L  22. 


rf  271^  eighth,  companies    ohstcuJ^f     A'!^  753. 


*3-F; 


I 


I        I 


^. 


M 


r/ 


ScKool  of   tLe  Battalion. 


Third  and  ri^htfi' companies  into  Hive..  2^759.  -Third  and  eighth  companies    obstaile     \^  753 


I  I 


^i 


I  { 


i 


W         A^ 


o 


SCHOOL   or  THE   BATTALION — PAET    V.      171 

754.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  the  third 
company  will  place  himself  in  its  front,  to  turn  it, 
and  command  :  1.  Third  company^  iy  the  left 
fiaiik^  to  the  rear  into  column.  2.  Double  quick. 
3.  Marcu.  He  will  then  hasten  to  the  left  of  his 
company, 

755.  At  the  command  march^  the  company 
will  face  to  the  left  in  marching ;  the  two  left 
files  will  promptly  disengage  to  the  rear  in  douhle 
quick  time ;  the  left  guide,  placing  himself  at  the 
head  of  the  front  rank,  will  conduct  it  behind 
the  fourth  company,  directing  himself  parallelly 
with  this  company  ;  the  captain  of  the  third  will 
himself  lialt  opposite  to  the  captain  of  the  fourth, 
and  see  his  company  file  past ;  when  its  right  file 
shall  be  nearly  up  wdth  him,  he  will  command : 
1.  Third  company.  '2i.  By  the  right  flanl\  3. 
March.  4.  Guide  right^  and  place  himself  be- 
fore the  centre  of  his  company. 

756.  At  the  command  march^  the  company 
will  face  to  the  right,  preserving  the  same  gait ; 
but  the  moment  it  shall  be  at  the  prescribed  dis- 
tance, its  captain  will  command  : 

1.   QuicTc  time.     2.  March. 

757.  This  company  will  thus  follow  in  column 
that  behind  which  it  finds  itself,  and  in  close 
order,  its  right  guide  marching  exactly  in  the 
trace  of  the  captain  of  that  company. 

758.  As  soon  as  the  third  company  shall  have 
faced  to  the  left,  the  left  guide  of  the  second  will 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  his 
company,  and  maintain  between  himself  and  the 


172       SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    V. 

right  of  the  fourth,  the  space  necessary  for  the 
return  into  line  of  the  third. 

759.  The  obstacle  being  passed,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

Third  company  into  line. 

760.  At  this  command  the  captain,  turning  to 
his  company,  will  add : 

1.   Comimny^    hy    the  right  fianlc.       2.  Double 
quick.     3.  Maecil 

761.  At  the  command  march,,  the  company 
will  take  the  double  quick  step,  the  captain  will 
hasten  to  the  right  of  his  company',  halt  in  his 
own  person;  the  company,  conducted  by  its 
guide,  will  file  past  its  captain  parallel  to  the  line, 
and  when  the  left  file  has  arrived  abreast  with 
him,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  left  fianlc.     2.  MAEcn.     3.  Guide  left. 

762.  At  the  command  marc\  the  company 
will  direct  itself  straight-forward  toward  the 
line  of  battle,  and  retake  its  position  in  it  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed  for  deploying 
into  line  of  battle  while  marching. 

763.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  obstacle 
covers  several  contiguous  companies  (the  three 
companies  on  the  right  for  example),  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.    Three  right  companies,,  ol)8tacle.      2.  By  th^ 


.S.liool   of    fkp   Biirtnl-imi. 


1          1 

h    '^ 

n 

J 

p  t-,  -1^ 

1 

1 

^ 

rlH     f 

J 

1 

1           '     ^ 

■J 

if 

Cs 

li       ^ 

■t'" 

^ 

II 

^  ^, 

.^ 

5: 

1             ° 

1  . 

n 

J    li 

V 

5 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX — PAET     Y.       1V3 

leftfiank^  to  the  rear^  into  column.     3.  Double 
quick — Maech, 

764.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the 
designated  companies  will  each  place  himself  be- 
fore the  centre  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  as 
to  the  movement  about  to  be  executed. 
0-765.  At  the  same  command,  the  captain  of  the 
first  company  of  skirmishers  will  caution  his 
company  to  face  by  the  left  flank. 

766.  At  the  command  marcTi^  the  designated 
companies  will  face  to  the  left  in  marching,  and 
immediately  take  the  double  quick  step ;  each 
captain  will  cause  the  head  of  his  company  to 
disengage  itself  to  the  rear,  and  the  left  guide 
will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank ; 
the  captain  of  the  third  company  will  conform 
himself  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  755,  and  fol- 
lowing :  the  captains  of  the  other  companies  will 
conduct  them  by  the  flank  in  rear  of  the  third, 
inclining  toward  the  head  of  the  column ;  and, 
as  the  head  of  each  company  arrives  opposite  to 
the  right  of  the  one  next  before  it  in  column,  its 
captain  will  himself  halt,  see  his  company  file 
past,  and  conform  himself  for  facing  it  to  the 
front,  in  marching,  to  what  is  prescribed  No. 
755  and  following. 

0-787.  At  the  same  command,  the  first  company 
of  skirmishers  will  face  by  the  left  flank,  and 
take  the  double  quick  step  :  the  left  guide  will 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  and 
the  company,  conducted  by  its  chief,  will  follow 
the  movement  of  the  first  battalion  company, 
15* 


174   SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PAP.T  V. 

taking  care  to  preserve  its  distance,  and  main- 
tain its  relative  position. 

768.  When  the  last  company  in  column  shall 
have  passed  the  obstacle,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   Three  right  companies  into  line. 

769.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  each 
of  these  three  companies  will  command,  company 
ly  the  right  flanlc.     The  colonel  will  then  add  : 

1.  Double  quicTc.     2.  Maech. 

770.  At  this,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains 
of  the  three  companies,  each  company  will  con- 
form itself  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  761  and  fol- 
lowing. The  captains  of  the  second  and  first 
companies,  respectively,  halting  in  their  own  per- 
sons when  the  third  and  second  face  by  the 
left  flank. 

0-771.  At  the  same  command,  the  first  company 
of  skirmishers  will  face  by  the  right  flank,  take 
the  double  quick  step,  and  follow  the  movements 
of  the  first  battalion  company,  preserving  its 
distance  and  position. 

772.  It  is  supposed,  in  the  foregoing  examples, 
that  the  companies  belonged  to  the  right  wing ; 
if  they  make  part  of  the  other,  they  will  execute 
the  passage  of  an  obstacle  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

773.  "^hen  flank  companies  are  broken  off"  to 
pass  an  obstacle,  the  general  guide  on  that  flank 
wiU  place  himself  sis  paces  in  front  of  the  outer 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    V.       175 

file  of  the  nearest  companj  to  him  remaining  in 
line. 

774.  In  the  preceding  movements,  it  has  been 
supposed  that  the  battahon  was  marching  in 
qnick  time,  but  if  it  be  marching  in  double  quick 
time,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  several 
contiguous  companies  to  break  to  the  rear,  he 
will  first  order  the  battalion  to  march  in  quick 
time ;  the  companies  will  break  as  indicated  No. 
763. 

775.  When  the  movement  is  completed,  the 
colonel  may  order  the  double  quick  step  to  be 
resumed.  He  will  also  cause  the  battalion  to 
march  in  quick  time  when  he  shall  wish  to  bring 
into  line  the  several  companies  which  are  to  the 
rear  in  column  ;  the  movement  will  be  executed 
as  previously  indicated ;  and  when  the  last  com- 
pany shall  have  nearly  completed  its  movement, 
the  colonel  may  cause  the  double  quick  step  to 
be  resumed. 

776.  In  the  movement  of  a  single  company,  or 
of  several  companies  not  contiguous  to  each  oth- 
er, the  battalion  will  continue  to  march  in  double 
quick  time,  but  in  these  cases  the  companies 
which  are  to  ploy  in  column,  or  re-enter  the 
line,  will  increase  the  gait. 

777.  If  the  colonel  wishes  to  charge  bayonet 
while  advancing  in  line,  he  will  previously  order 
the  color  and  general  guides  to  their  posts. 

778.  In.  the  march  in  retreat,  these  several 
movements  will  be  executed  on  the  same  prin- 
ciples as  if  the  battalion  marched  by  the  front 
rank. 

0-779.  If  in  marching  in  retreat  the  first  and 


176        SCHOOL    OF   THE   BATTAUON PAET    T. 

last  battalion  companies  are  broken  off  to  pass 
an  obstacle,  the  companies  of  skirmishers  will  be 
faced  by  the  right  and  left  flanks  respectively, 
and  take  such  position  as  to  be  covered  by  the 
same  battalion  companies  that  the  first  or  last 
battalion  company  cover  respectively.  "When  the 
|first  and  last  battalion  companies  come  into  line 
the  companies  of  skirmishers  will  be  faced  by 
the  flank,  and  resume  their  proper  position.  In 
performing  this  movement  the  captain  of  each  of 
the  companies  of  skirmishers  will  take  care  to 
incline  the  head  of  his  company  well  to  the  front, 
and  to  quicken  the  pace  so  the  distances  may  not 
be  lost. 

780.  When  a  battalion,  advancing  in  line  of 
battle,  shall  be  obliged  to  execute  the  right  about 
in  order  to  retreat,  if  there  be  companies  in 
column  behind  the  rear  rank,  these  companies 
vriU  also  execute  the  right  about,  put  themselves 
in  march  at  the  same  time  with  the  battalion, 
and  will  thus  precede  it  in  the  retreat. 

781.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  retreat  in 
double  quick  time,  and  the  colonel  should  desire 
to  bring  into  line  the  companies  which  may  be 
marching  before  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion, 
he  will  cause  the  battalion  to  take  the  quick  step, 
he  will  then  cause  those  companies  to  take  full 
distance  by  the  head  of  the  column.  The  com- 
panies marching  before  the  rear  rank  will  then 
be  brought  successively  into  line  as  the  ground 
win  permit,  whatever  may  be  the  gait  of  the 
battalion. 

782.  When  the  color-company  shall  be  obliged 
to  execute  the  movement  of  passing  an  obstacle, 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    V.       177 

the  color-rank  will  return  into  line  at  the  moment 
the  company  shall  face  to  the  left  or  right ;  the 
senior  major  will  place  himself  six  paces  before 
the  extremity  of  the  company  behind  which  the 
color-company  marches  in  column,  in  order  to 
give  the  step  and  the  direction ;  he  himself  first 
taking  the  step  from  the  battalion. 

783.  As  soon  as  the  color-company  shall  have 
returned  into  line,  the  front  rank  of  the  color- 
guard  -vvill  again  move  out  six  paces  in  front  of 
the  battalion,  and  take  the  step  from  the  senior 
major ;  the  latter  will  immediately  place  himself 
twenty  or  thirty  paces  in  front  of  the  color- 
bearer,  and  face  to  the  colonel  placed  behind  the 
centre  of  the  battalion,  who  will  establish  him 
on  the  perpendicular ;  and,  as  soon  as  he  shall 
be  assured  on  it.  the  color-bearer  will  instantly 
take  two  points  on  the  ground  between  himself 
and  the  senior  major. 

78'!.  It  is  prescribed,  as  a  general  rule,  that 
the  companies  of  the  right  wing  ought  to  exe- 
cute the  movement  of  passing  obstacles  by  the 
left  flank,  and  the  reverse  for  the  companies  of 
the  other  wing;  but  if  the  obstacle  cover  at  once 
several  companies  of  the  centre,  each  will  file  into 
column  behind  that,  still  in  line,  and  of  the  same 
wing,  which  may  be  the  nearest  to  it. 

EEMAEKS  ox  THE  DISPOSITION  OF  THE  COMPANIES 
OF  SKIRMISHERS,  AND  OF  THE  BATTALION  COM- 
PANIES,   WHEN    DEPLOYED    AS    SUCH, 

785.  When  one  or  more  platoons  of  the  compa- 
nies of  skirmishers  are  deployed,  and  the  colonel 


178       SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAKT    V. 

wishes  to  recall  them,  he  will  indicate  his  inten- 
tion to  the  junior  ma,] or,  or  other  commandant 
of  the  line,  who  will  either  cause  the  rally  on  the 
battalion  to  be  sounded  or  will  command: 

Rally  on  the  battalion. 

786.  At  this  sound,  or  command,  the  skirmish- 
ers and  reserves  will  rapidly  unmask  the  front 
of  the  battalion,  directing  themselves  in  a  run 
around  its  nearest  flank :  each  company  will  im- 
mediately be  formed  in  close  column,  by  platoon 
in  rear  of  the  first  and  last  battalion  companies 
respectively,  or  behind  any  shelter  whatever  in 
the  vicinity  that  may  ofl:er.  The  companies  of 
skirmishers  will  not  be  engaged  in  the  tire  of  the 
line ;  but,  in  case  the  enemy  are  broken  by  the 
fire,  they  will  be  prepared  for  a  rapid  pursuit. 
They  will  also  cover  the  battalion  when  in  re- 
treat, unless  the  colonel  should  desire  to  face  it 
about  and  open  the  fire  of  the  line. 

787.  When  any  of  the  battalion  companies  act- 
ing as  skirmishers  are  rallied  on  the  battalion  in 
line,  they  will  direct  themselves  around  the  near- 
est flank,  as  prescribed  above,  and  form  in  the 
rear :  they  will  then  immediately  take  their  prop- 
er places  in  the  line. 

Article  IX. 

To  pass  a  defile,  in  retreat,  by  the  right  or  left 
flank. 

788.  When  a  battalion,  retiring  in  line,  shall 


VoL.Z.  Sell  col   of    tlie   BattalioTi.  Fl.2f/. 


7l>  fHKss  a  defile  in.  retr^Mt  Ay 
tJu^righX  fhaiA.   N9  788. 


dH 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    V.       179 

encounter  a  defile  which  it  must  pass,  tlie  colonel 
will  halt  the  battalion,  and  face  it  to  the  front. 

789.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  defile  is  in 
rear  of  the  left  flank,  and  that  its  width  is  suflfi- 
cient  to  give  passage  to  a  column  by  platoon ; 
the  colonel  will  place  a  marker  fifteen  or  twenty 
paces  in  rear  of  the  file-closers  at  the  point  around 
which  the  subdivisions  will  have  to  change  direc- 
tion in  order  to  enter  the  defile ;  he  will  then 
command : 

To  the  rear^  hy  the  right  JlanTc^  pass  the  defile. 

790.  The  captain  of  the  first  company  will 
immediately  command : 

1.  First  company^  right — Face.     2.  Majbch  (or 
double  quick — March). 

791.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  com- 
pany will  commence  the  movement ;  the  first  file 
will  wheel  to  the  right,  march  to  the  rear  till  it 
shall  have  passed  four  paces  beyond  the  file  clos- 
ers, when  it  will  wheel  again  to  the  right,  and 
then  direct  itself  straight-forward  toward  the  left 
flank.  All  the  other  tiles  of  this  company  will 
come  to  wheel  in  succession  at  the  same  place 
where  the  first  had  wheeled. 

792.  The  second  company  will  execute,  in  its 
turn,  the  same  movement,  by  the  commands  of 
its  captain,  who  will  give  the  command  March, 
so  that  the  first  file  of  his  company  may  imme- 
diately follow  the  last  of  the  first,  without  con- 
straint, however,  as  to  taking  the  step  of  the 


180        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART   V. 

first ;  the  first  file  of  the  second  company  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  on  its  ground ;  all  the  other 
files  of  this  company  will  come  in  succession  to 
wheel  at  the  same  place.  The  following  compa- 
nies will  execute,  each  in  its  turn,  what  has  just 
heen  prescribed  for  the  second. 

793.  When  the  whole  of  the  second  company 
shall  be  on  the  same  direction  with  the  first,  the 
captain  of  the  first  will  cause  it  to  form,  by  platoon, 
into  line,  and  the  moment  that  it  is  in  column,  the 
guide  of  the  first  platoon  will  direct  himself  on 
the  marker  around  whom  he  has  to  change  direc- 
tion in  order  to  enter  the  defile. 

794.  The  second  company  will  continue  to 
march  by  the  flank,  directing  itself  parallelly 
with  the  line  of  battle ;  and  it,  in  its  turn,  will 
form  by  platoon  into  line,  when  the  third  com- 
pany shall  be  wholly  on  the  same  direction  with 
itself. 

795-  The  following  companies  will  successively 
execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
second,  and  each  will  form  by  platoon  into  line, 
when  the  next  company  shall  be  on  the  same  di- 
rection with  itself. 

796-  The  first  platoon  of  the  leading  company 
having  arrived  opposite  to  the  marker  placed  at 
the  entrance  of  the  defile,  will  turn  to  the  left, 
and  the  following  platoons  will  all  execute  this 
movement  at  the  same  point.  As  the  last  com- 
panies will  not  be  able  to  form  platoons  before 
reaching  the  defile,  they  will  so  direct  themselves, 
in  entering  it,  as  to  leave  room  to  the  left  for  this 
movement. 

797.  The  battalion  will  thus  pass  the  defile  by 


SCnOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PAET  Y.   181 

platoon  ;  and,  as  the  two  platoons  of  each  com- 
pany shall  clear  it,  companies  will  be  successively 
formed  by  the  means  indicated,  S.  (?.,  No.  278, 
and  following. 

798-  The  head  of  the  column  having  cleared 
the  defile,  and  having  reached  the  distance  at 
which  the  colonel  wishes  to  re-form  line  faced  to 
the  defile,  he  may  cause  the  leading  company  to 
turn  to  the  left,  to  prolong  the  column  in  that  di- 
rection, and  then  form  it  to  the  left  into  line  of 
battle ;  or  he  may  halt  the  column,  and  form  it 
into  line  of  battle  faced  to  the  rear,  either  direct 
or  by  inversion. 

799.  If  it  be  the  intention  of  the  colonel  to 
commence  the  fire  before  the  whole  column  is 
disengaged  from  the  defile,  he  may  cause  the 
leading  company,  when  it  has  formed  to  change 
direction  to  the  riglit,  and  then  form  on  the  right 
into  line;  or,  that  company  may  change  direction 
to  the  left,  and  then  the  formation  will  be  on  the 
left  into  line  by  inversion. 

800-  If  the  defile  be  in  the  rear  of  the  right 
flank,  it  will  be  passed  by  the  left ;  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

801-  It"  the  defile  be  too  narrow  to  receive  the 
front  of  a  platoon,  it  will  be  passed  by  the  flank. 
Captains  and  file  closers  will  be  watchful  that 
the  files  do  not  lose  their  distances  in  marching. 
Companies  or  platoons  will  be  formed  into  line  as 
the  width  of  the  defile  may  permit,  or  as  th« 
companies  shall  successively  clear  it. 

VOL.  u.— 16 


182       SOHOOL   OP    THE   BATTALION PART   V. 

EEMAEK8    ON    THE  DISPOSITION    OF  THE  COMPANIES. 
OF  SKIKMISHEES,  IN  PASSING  A  DEFILE. 

802.  If  the  companies  of  skirmishers  are  in 
rear  of  the  battalion  in  line,  at  the  first  command 
by  the  colonel  for  passing  the  defile,  thej  will  be 
put  in  motion,  and  accompanied  by  the  junior 
major,  will  immediately  pass  the  defile  either  by 
platoon  or  by  file,  according  to  the  width,  the 
company  nearest  to  the  defile  passing  first :  they 
will  under  the  direction  of  the  junior  major,  take 
such  positions  as  may  best  protect  the  passage  of 
the  defile  by  the  battalion  companies. 

803.  If  the  companies  of  skirmishers,  or  a  por- 
tion of  them,  are  deployed  to  Cover  the  retreat, 
and  the  colonel  desires  to  open  the  fire  of  the 
line  previous  to  passing  the  defile,  he  will,  before 
commencing  the  movement,  cause  the  skirmish- 
ers to  be  rallied  on  the  battalion,  when  they  will 
immediately  pass  the  defile. 

804.  If  the  colonel  does  not  wish  to  open  the 
fire  by  line  previous  to  passing  the  defile,  the 
companies  of  skirmishers  will  cover  the  passage 
of  the  battalion  companies  before  passing  them- 
selves. 

Aeticle  X. 

To  marcli  by  the  flank. 

805.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  battalion  to 
march  by  the  flank,  will  command : 

1.  Battalum.     2.  J^ight  (or  left)— Face.  3.  For- 
bear d.      4.  Maech  (or  double  quick — Maboh). 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION — PART    V.       183 

806.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains 
and  covering  sergeants  will  place  themselves  as 
prescribed  in  the  -S'.  (7.,  Nos.  138  and  143. 
0-807.  At  the  same  command,  the  companies  of 
skirmishers  will  face  to  the  right  or  left,  and  the 
chiefs  will  place  themselves  as  above  indicated. 

808.  The  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion 
will  place  himself  to  the  left,  and  by  the  side  of 
the  last  file  of  his  company  •.  covering  the  captains 
in  file. 

809.  The  battalion  having  to  face  by  the  left 
flank,  the  ca})tains,  at  the  second  command,  will 
shift  rapidly  to  the  left  of  their  companies,  and 
each  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  covering 
sergeant  of  the  company  preceding  his  own,  ex- 
cept the  captain  of  the  left  company,  who  will 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  sergeant  on  the 
left  of  the  battalion.  The  covering  sergeant  of 
the  right  company  will  place  himself  by  the  right 
side  of  the  front-rank  man  of  the  rearmost  file  of 
his  company,  covering  the  captains  in  file. 

810.  At  the  command  inarch^  the  battalion  will 
step  off  with  life  ;  the  sergeant,  jjlaced  before  the 
leading  file  (right  or  left  in  front),  will  be  careful 
to  preserve  exactly  the  length  and  cadence  of  the 
step,  and  to  direct  himself  straight-forward ;  to 
this  end,  he  will  take  points  on  the  ground. 

811.  At  the  same  command,  the  companies  of 
skirmishers  will  step  oflT,  the  chiefs  abreast  with 
the  captains  of  the  first  and  last  battalion  com- 
panies respectively,  and  they  will  march  parallel 
to  them. 

812.  Whether  the  battalion  march  by  the  right 
or  left  flank,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  pkce 


184       SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    V. 

himself  abreast  with  the  leading  file,  and  the  senior 
major  abreast  with  the  color-file,  both  on  the 
side  of  the  front  rank,  and  about  six  j^aces  from 
it.  The  junior  major  will  hold  himself  as  pre- 
scribed No.  94. 

813.  The  adjutant,  placed  between  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel and  the  front  rank,  will  marcli  in  the 
same  step  with  the  head  of  the  battalion,  and  the 
sergeant  major,  placed  between  the  senior  major 
and  the  color-bearer,  will  march  in  the  same  step 
with  the  adjutant. 

814.  The  captains  and  file  closers  will  carefully 
see  that  the  files  neither  open  out,  nor  close  too 
much,  and  that  they  regain  insensibly  their  dis- 
tattces,  if  lost. 

815.  The  colonel  wishing  the  battalion  to 
wheel  by  file,  will  command : 

1.  By  file  right  (or  left).     2.  Maech. 

816.  The  files  will  wheel  in  succession,  and  all 
at  the  place  where  the  first  had  wheeled,  in  con- 
forming to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  company. 

817.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  flank, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  it  to  halt,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt.     3.  Feoxt. 

818.  These  commands  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  -S'.  C,  No.  148. 

819.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  by  the  flank, 
and  the  colonel  should  wish  to  cause  it  to  march 


BCnOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION — PART    V.       185 

in  line,  either  to  the  front  or  to  tlie  rear,  the 
movements  will  be  executed  by  the  commands  and 
means  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company. 

Article  XI. 

To  form  the  battalion  on  the  right  or  left,  by  file, 
into  line  of  battle. 

820.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  right 
flank,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  on 
the  right  by  file,  he  will  determine  the  line  of 
battle,  and  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  two 
markers  on  that  line,  in  conformity  with  what  ig 
prescribed  No.  501. 

821.  The  head  of  the  battalion  being  nearly 
up  with  the  first  marker,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  On  the  right,  hy  Jile,  into  line.     2.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

822.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  com- 

f)any  will  form  itself  on  the  right,  by  file,  into 
ine  of  battle,  as  indicated  in  the  S.  C,  No.  151 ; 
the  front-rank  man  of  the  first  file  will  rest  his 
breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  the  first 
marker ;  the  other  companies  w^ill  follow  the 
movement  of  the  leading  company  ;  each  captain 
will  place  himself  on  the  line  at  the  same  time 
with  the  front-rank  man  of  his  first  file,  and  on 
the  right  of  this  man. 

823.  The  left  guide  of  each  company,  except 
the  leading  one,  wiU  place  himself  on  the  direc- 

16* 


186      SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PABT   Y. 

tion  of  the  markers,  and  opposite  to  the  left  file 
of  his  company,  at  the  instant  that  the  front- 
rank  man  of  this  file  arrives  on  the  line. 

824.  The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

Guides — Posts. 

825.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  succes- 
sive formation  of  the  battalion,  moving  along  the 
front  of  the  line  of  battle. 

826.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will,  in  succession, 
assure  the  direction  of  the  guides,  and  see  that 
the  men  of  the  front  rank,  in  placing  themselves 
on  the  line,  do  not  pass  it. 

827.  If  the  battalion  march  by  the  left  flank, 
the  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 


828.  As  marching  by  the  flank  in  the  presence 
of  the  enemy  is  a  very  objectionable  movement, 
it  will  not  be  executed  except  for  the  purpose  of 
moving  the  battalion  to  the  right  or  left  for  a 
short  distance,  or  when  the  narrowness  of  the 
way  will  not  permit  a  company  front. 
0-829.  If  the  companies  of  skirmishers  are  pres- 
ent with  the  battalion  when  marching  by  the 
flank,  and  the  colonel  wishes  either  to  file  to  the 
right  or  left,  or  to  form  on  the  right  or  left  into 
line  by  file,  he  will,  previous  to  commencing  the 
movement,  cause  those  companies  formed  as  the 
battalion  companies,  to  take  post  on  the  right  and 
left  of  the  battalion  respectively. 


CF^ 


Sckool   of  thfi    Ba+taUoii 


l't'r/)eniliriilar  t/ltinf/e   of  front  forwdril  on  ft r.\l  cotiipliiiy  Xo  H.'J'J 

■MillllllllBililMMll^^^ 


-^-... 


r> 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PAET   T.      187 

Aeticle  XII. 

CHANGES  OF  FEONT. 

Change  of  front  perpendicularly  forward. 

830.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  it  is 
supposed  to  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause  a 
change  of  front  forward  on  the  right  company, 
and  that  the  angle  formed  by  the  old  and  new 
positions  be  a  right  angle,  or  a  few  degrees  more 
or  less  than  one;  he  will  cause  two  markers  to 
be  placed  on  the  new  direction,  before  the  posi- 
tion to  be  occupied  by  tbat  company,  and  order 
its  captain  to  establish  it  against  the  markers, 

831.  The  captain  of  the  right  company  will 
immediately  direct  it  upon  the  markers  by  a 
wheel  to  the  right  on  the  fixed  pivot ;  and  aftei 
having  halted  it,  he  will  align  it  by  the  right. 

832.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colo^ 
nel  will  command : 

1.  Change  front  foricard  on  first  company.  2. 
By  company^  right  half  wheel.  3.  Maech  (oi? 
douMe  quick — Maech). 

833.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will 
place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company. 
0-834.  At  the  same  command,  the  captain  of  the 
first  company  of  skirmishers  will  face  his  com- 
pany to  the  left,  the  left  guide  will  step  in  front 
of  the  front-rank  man  of  the  left  file,  and  the 
captain  will  place  himself  by  the   side  of  his 


188       SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    Y. 

guide ;  the  captain  of  the  second  company  will 
caution  it  to  march  straight-forward. 

835.  At  the  third,  each  company  will  wheel  to 
the  right  on  the  fixed  pivot,  as  prescribed  in  the 
S.  C,  No.  189  ;  the  left  guide  of  each  will  place 
himself  on  its  left  as  soon  as  he  shall  be  able  to 
pass;  and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge  that  the 
companies  have  suflBciently  wheeled,  he  will 
command : 

4.  Forward.     5.  March.     6.   Guide  right. 

836.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies 
ceasing  to  wheel  will  march  straight-forward ;  at 
the  sixth,  the  men  wUl  touch  elbows  toward 
the  right. 

837.  The  right  guide  of  the  second  company 
will  march  straight-forward  until  this  company 
shall  arrive  at  the  point  where  it  should  turn  to 
the  right ;  each  succeeding  right  guide  wiU  fol- 
low the  file  immediately  before  him  at  the  cessa- 
tion of  the  wheel,  and  will  march  in  the  trace  of 
this  file  until  this  company  shall  turn  to  the  right 
to  move  upon  the  line;  this  guide  will  then 
march  straight-forward. 

838.  The  second  company  having  arrived  op- 
posite to  the  left  file  of  the  first,  its  captain  will 
cause  it  to  turn  to  the  right ;  the  right  guide  will 
direct  himself  so  as  to  arrive  squarely  upon  the 
line  of  battle,  and  when  he  shall  be  at  threo 
paces  from  that  line,  the  captain  will  command: 

1.  Second  company,     2.  Halt. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX PAET    Y.       189 

839.  At  the  second  command,  the  company 
will  halt ;  the  files  not  yet  in  line  with  the  guide 
will  come  into  it  promptly,  the  left  guide  will 
place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  as  soon 
as  he  is  assured  in  the  direction  by  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel, the  captain  will  align  the  company 
by  the  right. 

840.  Each  following  company  will  conform  to 
what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 
0-841.  At  the  third  command  by  the  colonel,  the 
first  company  of  skirmishers  will  step  oflT,  and 
be  conducted  by  its  captain  in  such  manner  that 
when  the  leading  file  arrives  abreast  with  the 
right  file  of  the  first  battalion  company,  it  wiU 
be  at  a  distance  of  thirty  paces  from  the  file-closers 
of  that  company ;  after  prolonging  itself  its  full 
length  in  a  direction  parallel  to  the  first  battalion 
company,  it  will  be  halted,  faced  to  the  front,  and 
dressed  to  the  right  by  its  chief.  The  second 
company  will  be  marched  straight-forward  a  dis- 
tance of  thirty-three  paces,  the  captain  will  then 
cause  it  to  execute  what  has  been  prescribed, 
Nos.  835,  836,  and  837,  observing  what  follows : 
the  company  will  be  halted,  and  dressed  to  the 
right  the  moment  it  turns  to  the  right. 

842.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Guides — Posts. 

843.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the  col- 
onel shall  wish  to  change  front  forward  on  the 
first  company,  and  that  the  angle  formed  by  the 
old  and  new  positions  be  a  right  angle,  he  will 
cause  two  markers  to   be  placed  on  the  new 


190      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    V. 

direction,  before  the  position  to  be  occupied  by 
that  company,  and  will  command : 

1.  Change  front  fortcard  on  first  company.  1.  By 
company.^  right  half  wheel.  8.  Maech  (or 
double  quich—}S.2^T!.cvL). 

844.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will 
move  rapidly  before  the  centre  of  their  respec- 
tive companies ;  the  captain  of  the  first  company 
will  command  :  1.  Right  turn ;  2.  Quick  time; 
the  captains  of  the  otlier  companies  will  caution 
them  to  wheel  to  the  right. 
0-845.  At  the  same  command,  the  captain  of  the 
first  company  of  skirmishers  will  command : 
Company  by  the  left  flanh ;  the  captain  of  the 
second  company  will  caution  it  that  it  will  have 
to  move  straight-forward. 

846.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  battal- 
ion company  will  turn  to  the  right,  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  in  the  S.  S.,  No.  415 ; 
its  captain  will  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  the 
markers,  and  the  files  in  rear  will  promptly  come 
into  line.  The  captain  will  align  the  company 
by  the  right. 

847.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will  wheel 
to  the  right  on  a  fixed  pivot ;  the  left  guides  will 
place  themselves  on  the  left  of  their  respective 
companies,  and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge  they 
have  wheeled  sufficiently,  he  will  command : 

4.  Forward.    5.  Maech.     6.   Guide  right. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PAET  V.   191 

848.  These  commands  will  be  executed  as  in- 
dicated No.  833  and  following. 

849.  At  the  third  command  by  the  colonel, 
briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  the  companies 
of  skirmishers,  the  first  company  will  execute 
what  has  been  prescribed  Xos.  834  and  841,  and 
the  second  company  what  has  been  prescribed 
No.  841. 

850.  The  colonel  will  cause  -the  battalion  to 
change  front  forward  on  the  eighth  company, 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

0-851.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  exe- 
cute this  movement  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples prescribed  for  them  when  changing  front 
on  the  first  battalion  company,  and  by  inverse 
means. 

Change  of  front  perpendicularly  to  the  rear. 

852.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  change  front  to 
the  rear  on  the  right  company,  will  impart  his 
purpose  to  the  captain  of  this  company.  The 
latter  will  immediately  face  his  company  about, 
wheel  it  to  the  left  on  the  fixed  pivot,  and  halt  it 
when  it  shall  be  in  the  direction  indicated  to  him' 
by  the  colonel ;  the  captain  will  then  face  his 
company  to  the  front,  and  align  it  by  the  right 
against  the  two  markers,  whom  the  colonel  will 
cause  to  be  established  before  the  right  and  left 
files. 

0-853.  At  the  same  time  the  captain  of  the  first 
company  of  skirmishers  will  face  it  to  the  right, 
march  it  forward  the  distance  of  thirty-three 


192       SCHOOL    OF    TUE    BATTALION PAET    V. 

paces,  file  it  to  the  left,  and  establish  it  in  rear 
of  the  first  battalion  company. 

854.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  coloud 
will  command : 

1.  Change  front  to  the  rear^  on  first  company. 
2.  Battdlion,  about — Face.  3.  By  company^ 
left  half  wheel.  4.  Marck  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

855.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  compa- 
nies, except  the  right,  will  face  about. 

0-856.  At  the  second  command,  the  second  com- 
pany of  skirmishers  will  face  about. 

857.  At  the  third,  the  captains  whose  com- 
panies liave  faced  about,  will  each  place  himself 
behind  the  centre  of  his  company,  two  paces 
from  the  front  rank,  now  the  rear. 
0-858.  At  the  same  command,  the  captain  of  the 
second  comj)any  of  skirmishers  will  })Iace  him- 
self as  above  indicated  for  the  captains  of  the 
battalion  companies. 

859.  At  the  fourth,  these  companies  will 
wheel  to  the  left  on  the  fixed  pivot  by  the  rear 
rank ;  the  left  guide  of  each  will,  as  soon  as  he 
is  able  to  pass,  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the 
rear  rank  of  his  company,  now  become  the  right ; 
and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge  that  the  com- 
panies have  suflSciently  wheeled,  he  will  com- 
mand: 

5.  Fortcard.     6.  Maech.     7.   Guide  left. 

860.  At  the   sixth   command,  the  companies 


8CU00L    OF    THK    BATTALION PABT    T.       198 

will  cease  to  wheel,  march  straight-forward 
t<j\vard  the  new  line  of  battle,  and,  at  the  sev- 
enth, take  the  touch  of  the  elbow  toward  the 
loft. 

861.  The  guide  of  each  company  on  its  right 
flank  becomes  left,  will  conform  himself  to  the 
principles  prescribed  No.  837. 

862.  The  ^«eeond  company,  from  the  right, 
having  arrived  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  first, 
will  turn  to  the  left;  the  guide  will  so  direct 
himself  as  to  arrive  parallelly  with  the  line  of 
battle,  cross  that  line,  and  when  the  front  rank, 
now  in  the  rear,  shall  be  three  i)aces  beyond  it, 
tlie  captain  will  command:  1.  Second  company ; 
2.   Halt. 

863.  At  the  second  command,  the  company 
will  halt;  the  files  which  may  not  yet  be  in  line 
with  the  guide,  will  promptly  come  into  it ;  the 
cai)tain  will  cau^o  the  company  to  face  about, 
and  then  align  it  by  the  right. 

864.  All  the  other  companies  will  execute 
what  \im  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second, 
each  as  it  successively  arrives  opposite  to  the  left 
of  the  company  that  precedes  it  on  the  new  line 

)f  battle. 

•0-365.  At  the  fourth  command  by  the  colonel, 
the  second  company  of  skirmishers  will  execute 
what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  battalion  com- 
panies, Xos.  85'J  and  8G0,  and  when  its  left  file 
shall  have  arrived  in  a  perpendicular  with  the 
left  of  the  seventh  battalion  company,  it  will  turn 
to  the  left,  and  having  crossed  the  line  the  dis- 
tance of  tliirty-thre»e  paces,  it  will  be  halted. 
fiiced  about  aud  dressed  to  the  right  by  its  chief. 

TOL.  IL— 17 


194   SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  T. 

866.  The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

Guides — Posts. 

867.  The  colonel  will  canse  a  change  of  front 
on  the  left  company  of  the  battalion  to  the  rear, 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

0-868.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  ex- 
ecute this  movement  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  them  in  changing  front  on  the  first 
battalion  company,  and  by  inverse  means. 

869.  In  changes  of  front,  the  colonel  will  give 
a  general  superintendence  to  the  movement. 

870.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  the  di- 
rection of  the  guides  as  they  successively  move 
out  on  the  line  of  battle,  conforming  himself  to 
what  has  been  prescribed  in  the  successive  for- 
mations. 

REMARKS  ox  CHAJTGES  OF  FRONT. 

871.  When  the  new  direction  is  perpendicular, 
or  nearly  so,  to  that  of  the  battalion,  the  compa- 
nies ought  to  make  about  a  half  icheel  (the 
eighth  of  the  circle),  before  marching  straight-for- 
ward ;  but  when  those  two  lines  are  oblique  to 
each  other,  the  smaller  the  angle  which  they 
form,  the  less  ought  the  companies  to  wheel.  It 
is  for  the  colonel  to  judge,  according  to  the 
angle,  the  precise  time  when  he  ought  to  give 
the  command  marcTi^  after  the  caution  fonoard^ 
and  if  he  cannot  catch  the  exact  moment,  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PART  V.   195 

word  of  execution  should  rather  be  given  a  Httle 
too  soon,  than  an  instant  too  late. 

872.  When  the  old  and  new  lines  form  an 
angle  of  forty-five  or  fewer  degrees,  the  colonel 
will  find  it  necessary  to  arrest  the  wheel  of  the 
companies  when  the  marching  flanks  shall  have 
taken  hut  a  few  paces,  or,  it  may  be,  have  but 
disengaged,  respectively,  from  the  fixed  pivots  of 
the  next  companies ;  and  in  all  such  cases,  the 
companies  will  arrive  so  nearly  parallel  to  the 
new  line,  as  to  be  able  to  align  themselves  upon 
it  without  the  intermediate  turn  to  the  right  or 
left ;  to  execute  the  movement  under  either  cir- 
cumstance supposed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Oblique  change  of  fronts  forward  (or  to  the  rear) 
oil  {such  company.) 

873.  In  the  oblique  changes  of  front,  the  com- 
panies of  skirmishers  will  be  established  parallel 
to  the  first  and  last  battalion  companies,  and  by 
the  means  heretofore  explained. 

Article   XIII. 

To  plo7  the   battalion  into   coliimn  doubled  on 
the  centre. 

874.  This  movement  consists  in  ploying  the 
corresponding  companies  of  the  right  and  left 
wings  into  column  at  company  distance,  or  closed 
in  mass,  in  rear  of  the  two  centre  companies,  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed,  Article 
Third,  Part  Second,  of  this  School. 


196       SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX PART    V. 

875.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  form  the  douhle 
column  at  company  distance  (the  battalion  be- 
ing in  line  of  battle),  will  command  : 

1.  Douhle  column^  at  half  distance.  2.  Battalion, 
inward — Face.  3.  Mabch  (or  douhle  quick — 
Maech). 

876.  At  the  first  command,  the  cajjtains  will 
place  themselves  two  paces  in  front  of  their  re- 
gpective  companies;  the  captams  of  the  two 
centre  companies  will  caution  them  to  stand  fast, 
and  the  other  captains  will  caution  their  compa- 
nies to  face  to  the  left  and  right,  respectively. 
The  covering  sergeants  will  step  into  the  front 
rank. 

0-877.  At  the  same  command,  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon of  the  companies  of  skirmishers  will  step  in 
front  of  his  platoon,  and  the  captain  of  the  first 
company  will  immediately  jiloy  his  first  platoon, 
in  close  order,  in  front  of  its  second,  and  the  cap- 
tain of  the  second  comj^any,  liis  second  platoon, 
in  close  order,  in  rear  of  its  first. 

878.  At  the  second  command,  the  fourth  and 
fifth  companies  will  stand  fast ;  tlie  others  of  the 
right  wing  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  others  of 
the  left  wing  will  fiice  to  the  right;  each  captain 
whose  company  has  faced,  will  hasten  to  break 
to  the  rear  the  two  files  at  the  head  of  his  com- 
pany ;  the  left  guide  of  each  right  company,  and 
the  right  guide  of  each  left  company,  will  each 
place  himself  at  the  head  of  its  front  rank,  and 
the  captain  by  the  side  of  his  guide. 


Vol.2. 


v^ 


i 


197 

toon 
dto 
ront 

liis 
lide. 

and 
,  di- 

the 

tho 
nior 
i^een 
>left 
k  on 

1    1)0 

I  by 
inge 
each 
umn 
,  the 
jond 
;om- 
y  be 
tlie 
bat- 
two 
lem- 
n,  at 
•iglit 
sers, 
com- 


1  U 


Vol.-^.     ^P 

_S.rhool 

of   the 

Battalic 

u. 

T12(> 

m 

■]              p 

J! 

r\ 

.- 

.   D 

1 

1  '1 

°l 

% 

1      1 

1            *^^. 

* 

P 

1 
^i  1 1 

i 

1   .^. 

1                  ^- 

■H, 

1  1 

l| 

1  J  • 

a 

1  1 

ll 

1     1 

„.  - 

i-i 

i      1 

u 

i   ■   .. 

1           -t*- 

1      1 

1 

i 

5    ^ 

rr  -  ■  r 

-  -P 

1      \[\ 

1    « 

1 

1 

r 

s'l 

,1 

J   s. 

! 

^  1 

"  m 

^ 

i 

m 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    V.       197 

J-879.  At  the  same  command,  the  first  platoon 
«^oluran  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  second  to 
the  right.  Each  guide  will  place  himself  in  front 
of  the  front-rank  man  of  the  leading  file  of  his 
platoon,  and  each  chief  by  the  side  of  his  guide. 

880.  At  the  command  march.,  the  fourth  and 
fifth  companies,  which  are  to  form  the  first  di- 
vision, will  stand  fast ;  the  senior  captain  of  the 
two  will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the 
V.  ivision,  and  command :  Guide  right;  the  junior 
captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between 
the  two  companies,  and  the  left  guide  of  the  left 
company  will  place  himself  in  the  front  rank  on 
the  left  of  the  division,  as  soon  as  he  shall  be 
able  to  pass. 

881.  All  the  other  companies,  conducted  by 
their  captains,  will  step  ofif  with  life  to  arrange 
themselves  in  column  at  company  distance,  each 
company  behind  the  preceding  one  in  the  column 
of  the  same  wing,  so  that,  in  the  right  wing,  the 
third  may  be  next  behind  the  fourth,  the  second 
next  to  the  third,  and  so  on  to  the  right  com- 
pany; and,  in  the  left  wing,  the  sixth  may  be 
next  behind  the  fifth,  the  seventli  next  to  the 
sixth,  and  so  on  to  the  left  company  of  the  bat- 
talion. 

882.  The  corresponding  companies  of  the  two 
wings  will  unite  into  divisions  in  arranging  them- 
selves in  column  ;  an  instant  before  the  union,  at 
tlie  centre  of  the  column,  the  left  guides  of  right 
companies  will  pass  into  the  line  of  file  closers, 
and  each  captain  will  command:  1.  Such  com- 
pany ;  2.  Rait ;  3.  Feoxt. 

883.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be 
17* 


198       SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    T. 

given  at  the  instant  of  union,  each  company  will 
halt ;  at  the  tliird,  it  will  face  to  the  front.  The 
senior  captain  in  each  division  will  place  himself 
on  its  right,  and  command :  Right — Deess,  and 
the  junior  captain  wUl  place  himself  in  the  inter- 
val between  the  two  companies.  The  division 
being  aligned,  its  chief  wiU  command:  Feostt, 
and  take  his  position  two  paces  before  its 
centre. 

0-884.  At  the  command  march^  by  the  colonel, 
each  platoon  column  conducted  by  its  chief,  will 
be  directed  diagonally  to  the  rear,  in  such  man- 
ner that  the  front  rank  of  the  first  platoon  of 
each  platoon  column  shall  be  on  a  line  six  paces 
in  rear  of  the  front  rank  of  the  division  next  to 
the  last.  The  first  platoon  column  three  paces 
from  the  right,  and  the  second  platoon  column 
three  paces  from  the  left  flank  of  the  battalion 
column.  The  first  platoon  column  will  be 
dressed  to  the  left,  and  the  second  to  the  right. 
In  case  there  is  but  one  platoon  on  each  flank, 
tliey  will  be  established  in  the  positions  pre- 
scribed above,  for  the  first  platoons  of  the 
columns. 

885.  The  column  being  thus  formed,  the  di- 
visions will  take  the  respective  denominations  of 
Jirst^  second,  third^  &c.^  according  to  position  in 
the  column  beginning  at  the  front. 

886.  The  lieutenant-colonel  who,  at  the  second 
command  given  by  the  colonel,  will  have  placed 
himself  at  a  little  more  than  company  distance  in 
rear  of  the  right  guide  of  the  first  division,  wiU 
assure  the  right  guides  on  the  direction  as  they 
successively  arrive,  by  placing  himself  in  their 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    V.       199 

rear,  and  then  take  post  as  indicated  N"©.  175, 
outside  the  right  flank  of  the  column. 

887.  The  senior  major  will  follow  the  move- 
ment abreast  with  the  last  company,  and  then 
take  post  as  indicated  No.  176,  outside  the  right 
flank  of  the  column.  The  junior  major  will 
place  himself  abreast  with  the  first  platoon  of 
the  first  platoon  column,  and  six  paces  outside 
its  right  flank. 

888.  The  music  will  pass  to  the  rear  of  the 
column. 

889.  The  battalion  being  in  march  to  form  the 
double  column  at  company  distance  without  halt- 
ing the  battalion,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Double  column  at  half  distance.  2.  Battalion 
hy  the  right  and  left  flanlcs.  3.  Maeoh  (or 
double  quicTc — Maech). 

890.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will 
move  briskly  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  com- 
pany; the  captains  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  will 
caution  their  companies  to  march  straight-for- 
ward, and  will  command :  quichtime:  the  othei 
captains  will  caution  their  companies  to  face  to 
the  right  and  left. 

0-891.  At  the  same  command,  the  companies  of 
skirmishers  will  execute  without  halting  what  is 
prescribed  Ko.  877.  The  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon column  will  caution  his  column  to  face  by 
the  left  flank,  and  the  chief  of  the  second  pla- 
toon column  will  caution  his  column  to  face  by 
the  right  flank. 

892.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and 


200       SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX PART    V. 

fifth  companies  will  continue  to  march  straiglit- 
forward ;  the  senior  captain  will  place  himself 
before  the  centre  of  his  division,  and  command : 
Guide  right ;  the  junior  captain  will  place  him- 
self in  the  interval  between  the  two  companies. 
The  left  guide  of  the  fifth  company  will  place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the  divis- 
ion. The  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to 
the  right.  The  color  and  general  guides  will  re- 
take their  places.  The  three  right  companies 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  three  left  companies 
will  face  to  the  right.  Each  captain  will  break 
to  the  rear  two  files  at  the  head  of  his  company ; 
the  left  guides  of  the  right  companies,  and  the 
right  guides  of  the  left  companies,  will  each 
place  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank  of 
his  company,  and  the  captain  by  the  side  of  his 
guide. 

893.  The  third  and  sixth  companies  will  enter 
the  column,  and  direct  themselves  parallelly  to 
the  first  division.  Each  of  the  other  companies 
will,  in  like  manner,  place  itself  behind  the  com- 
pany of  the  wing  to  which  it  belongs,  and  will 
be  careful  to  gain  as  much  ground  as  possible  to- 
wiard  the  head  of  the  column. 

894.  The  corresponding  companies  of  each 
wing  will  unite  into  divisions  on  taking  their 
positions  in  column,  and  each  captain,  the  in- 
stant the  head  of  his  company  arrives  at  the 
centre  of  the  column,  will  command :  1.  Such 
tompany  hy  the  right  (or  left)  flank.  2.  March. 
The  senior  captain  of  the  two  companies  will 
place  himself  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  divis- 
ion,   and  command:   Guide  right;    the  junior 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET   V.       201 

captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  be- 
tween the  two  companies.  The  two  companies 
thus  formed  into  a  division,  will  take  the  touch 
of  elbows  to  the  right,  and  when  each  division 
has  gained  its  proper  distance,  its  chief  will 
cause  it  to  march  in  quick  time. 
0-895.  At  the  command  marcJi^  by  the  colonel, 
the  first  platoon  column  will  face  by  the  left,  and 
the  second  platoon  column  by  the  right  flank, 
and  they  will  be  conducted  by  their  chiefs  as 
prescribed  No.  884.  On  arriving  at  their  posi- 
tions the  platoon  columns  will  be  faced  by  the 
right  and  left  flanks  respectively,  and  take  the 
quick  step. 

896.  When  the  battalion  presents  an  odd  num- 
ber of  companies,  the  formation  will  be  made  in 
like  manner,  and  the  company  on  either  flank 
which  shall  find  itself  without  a  corresponding 
one,  will  place  itself  at  company  distance  behind 
tlie  wing  to  which  it  belongs. 

897.  The  double  column,  closed  in  mass,  will 
be  formed  according  to  the  same  principles,  and 
by  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  indica- 
tion, closed  in  mass,  for  that  of  at  half  distance. 

898.  The  double  column  never  being  formed 
when  two  or  more  battalions  are  to  be  in  one 
general  column,  it  will  habitually  take  the  guide 
to  the  right,  sometimes  to  the  left,  or  in  the 
centre  of  the  column ;  in  the  last  case,  the  com- 
mand will  be,  guide  centre.  The  column  will 
march,  countermarch,  and  change  direction,  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  for  a  simple 
column  by  division. 

899.  The  double  column  at  company  distance 


202       SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    Y. 

will  be  closed  in  mass,  or,  if  in  mass,  will  take 
half  distance,  bv  the  commands  and  means  indi- 
cated for  a  simple  column  by  division. 
0-900.  When  the  double  column  is  formed  closed 
in  mass,  or  closes  in  mass  from  half  distance,  the 
platoon  cohirans  will  then  be  placed  so  that  their 
tirst  platoons  shall  be  on  the  same  line  with  the 
division  next  to  the  last.  When  the  double  col- 
umn countermarches,  the  platoon  columns  will 
be  countermarched  by  the  means  prescribed  No. 
425  and  following. 

EEMAEKS  ON  THE  DISPOSITION  OF  THE  COMPANIES 
OF  8KIEMISHEES  IX  THE  PLOYMENTS  OF  THE 
DOUBLE    COLUMN. 

901.  When  the  double  column  advances  to  the 
attack,  half  the  interval  on  the  right  and  left 
flanks  may  be  covered  by  skirmishers,  deployed 
on  a  line  with  the  front  rank  of  the  leading 
division. 

0-902.  When  one  or  more  platoons  of  the  com- 
panies of  skirmishers  are  deployed  to  cover  a 
double  column,  and  the  colonel  desires  their  re- 
call, but  not  with  a  view  to  form  square,  it  wiU 
be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed No.  343.  The  platoon  columns  wiQ  take 
their  places  as  indicated  No.  884. 

To  ploy  the  battalion  into  division  colunma. 

903.  This  movement  consists  in  ploying  the 
odd  companies  of  the  right,  and  the  even  com- 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION — PART    V.      203 

panies  of  the  left  wing,  in  rear  of  the  companies 
on  their  left  and  right  respectively. 

904.  The  colonel  wishing  to  form  the  division 
columns  at  company  distance,  the  battalion  being 
in  line,  and  at  a  halt,  will  command : 

1.  Division  columns  at  company  distance.  2.  Bat- 
talion^ inward  face.  3.  Maech  (or  double 
quick— M-Ancu). 

905.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will 
place  themselves  two  paces  in  front  of  their  re- 
spective companies ;  the  captains  of  the  even 
companies  of  the  right,  and  the  odd  companies 
of  the  left  wing,  will  caution  their  companies  to 
stand  fast,  and  the  other  captains,  of  the  odd 
companies  of  the  right,  and  of  the  even  companies 
of  the  left  wing,  will  caution  their  companies  to 
face  to  the  left  and  right  respectively.  The 
covering  sergeants  will  step  into  the  front  rank. 
0-906.  At  the  same  command,  the  captains  of 
the  first  and  second  companies  of  skirmishers, 
will  caution  them  that  they  will  have  to  face  to 
the  left  and  right  respectively. 

907.  At  the  second  command,  the  even  com- 
panies of  the  right,  and  the  odd  companies  of 
the  left  wing,  will  stand  fast ;  the  others  of  the 
right  wing  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  others  of 
the  left  wing  will  face  to  the  right ;  each  captain 
whose  company  has  faced,  will  hasten  to  the 
right,  and  break  ofi:*  files  as  indicated  No.  111^ 
and  will  then  place  himself,  as  will  also  the 
guides,  in  the  manner  prescribed  Xo.  878, 
0-908*  At  the  same  command,  the  first  company 


204      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    T. 

of  skirmishers  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  sec- 
ond to  the  right ;  the  left  guide  of  the  first  will 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  and  each 
chief  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  his  guide. 

909.  At  the  command  march,  the  even  com- 
panies of  the  right,  and  the  odd  companies  of 
the  left  wing  will  stand  fast.  The  captain  of  the 
right  centre  company  will  place  himself  on  the 
right,  and  the  captain  of  the  left  centre  company 
on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  their  respective 
companies :  they  will  be  covered  in  the  rear  rank 
by  the  guides.  The  captain  of  the  second  com- 
pany will  take  his  place  in  the  front  rank  on  the 
left  of  his  company,  and  the  cai)tain  of  the  sev- 
enth in  the  front  rank  on  the  right  of  his  com- 
pany ;  they  will  be  covered  in  the  rear  rank  by 
the  guides. 

910.  All  the  other  companies,  conducted  by 
tlieir  chiefs,  will  step  off  with  life,  to  arrange 
themselves  at  company  distance,  each  odd  com- 
pany of  the  right  wing  in  rear  of  the  even  com- 

f)any  on  its  left,  and  each  even  company  of  the 
eft  wing  in  rear  of  the  odd  company  on  its  right, 
80  that  in  the  right  wing,  the  first  and  third  shall 
be  behind  the  second  and  fourth  companies,  and 
in  the  left  wing,  the  sixth  and  eighth  shall  be 
behind  the  fifth  and  seventh  companies.  The 
third  and  sixth  companies  will  be  halted,  faced 
to  the  front,  and  dressed  to  the  right  by  the 
senior  captain,  after  which  the  captains  will  take 
their  places,  two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of 
their  respective  companies.  The  captain  of  the 
first  company  will  conduct  it,  until  the  left  guide 
is  abreast  with  the  left  guide  of  the  company  ira- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BA.TTALION PART    T.       205 

mediately  in  front,  ^vhen  he  will  halt,  front,  and 
dress  liis  company  to  the  left,  and  place  himself 
as  prescribed  No.  169.  The  captain  of  the  last 
company  will  conduct  it,  until  the  right  guide  is 
abreast  with  the  right  guide  of  the  company  im- 
mediately in  front,  when  it  will  be  halted,  faced 
to  the  front,  and  dressed  to  the  right,  when  the 
cliief  will  place  himself  as  above  indicated. 
0  911.  At  the  command  march,  by  the  colonel, 
the  companies  of  skirmishers,  conducted  by  their 
respective  chiefs,  will  file  to  the  left  and  right, 
respectively :  the  first  company  will  take  post 
thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers  of  the  rear 
company  of  the  first  division  column,  and  the 
second  company  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  file 
closers  of  the  rear  company  of  the  last  division- 
column.  The  companies  will  be  halted,  faced  to 
the  front,  and  dressed  to  the  right  and  left,  re- 
spectively, and  the  captains  will  place  themselves 
two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  their  re- 
spective companies. 

912.  Division  columns  being  thus  formed,  will 
take  the  respective  denominations  ofjirst,  second^ 
thirds  fourth,  according  to  their  position  in  the 
line,  beginning  at  the  right.  If  there  are  but 
seven  battalion  companies  present,  the  seventh 
will  be  considered  as  a  division  colmnn.  With  a 
less  number  of  companies,  the  movement  will  not 
be  performed. 

913.  The  position  of  the  colonel  and  junior 
major  will  be  the  same  as  prescribed  N"os.  34  and 
35,  Title  I.,  the  distances  being  estimated  from 
the  file  closers,  in  rear  of  the  rear  companies  of 
the   division   columns.      The   lieutenant-colonel 

roT .  TT. — 1 8 


206      SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION PABT   V. 

will  take  post  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  first  di- 
vision column,  and  the  senior  major  in  rear  of 
the  centre  of  the  last  division  column.  Each 
twelve  paces  from  the  file  closers  of  the  rear  com- 
panies. The  adjutant  and  sergeant-major  will 
take  post  as  prescribed  No..  36,  Title  I.  The 
music  will  take  post  in  rear  of  the  third  division 
column,  and  in  the  manner  indicated  Nos.  41  and 
'42,  Title  I. 

914.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  form 
division  columns  without  halting  the  battalion, 
the  colonel  will  command  : 

1 .  Division  columns  at  company  distance.  2.  Bat- 
talion hy  the  right  and  left  Jianhs.  3.  Maech 
(or  double  quick — Maech). 

915.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will 
move  as  prescribed  No.  890 ;  the  captains  of  the 
even  companies  of  the  right,  and  of  the  odd  com- 
panies of  the  left  wing,  will  caution  their  com- 
panies to  march  straight-forward,  and  will  com- 
mand qvich  time,  the  other  captains  will  caution 
their  companies  to  face  to  the  left  and  right  re- 
spectively. 

0-916.  At  the  same  command,  the  captains  of 
the  companies  of  skirmishers  wiQ  caution  them 
that  thev  will  have  to  face  hj  the  left  and  right 
flanks  respectively. 

917.  At  the  command  marchj  the  even  coii- 
panies  of  the  right,  and  the  odd  companies  of  the 
left  wing,  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward. 
The  captains  and  guides  of  the  centre  companies, 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX PART   IV.     207 

and  of  the  second  and  seventh,  will  conform  to 
what  is  prescribed  No.  909.  The  general  guides  will 
place  themselves  as  indicated  No.  773.  The  odd 
companies  of  the  right  wing  will  face  to  the  left, 
and  the  even  companies  of  the  left  wing,  will  face 
to  the  right ;  each  captain,  whose  company  has 
faced,  will  break  to  the  rear  the  head  of  his  com- 
pany, and  will  place  himself,  as  will  also  the 
guides,  in  the  manner  indicated  No.  878. 

918.  The  companies  that  have  faced  will  each, 
conducted  by  its  captain,  take  its  place  in  its 
division  column,  as  prescribed  Xo.  910.  Each 
captain  of  the  right  wing,  the  instant  he  arrives 
abreast  with  the  left  guide  of  the  leading  com- 
pany of  his  division  column,  and  each  captain  of 
the  left  wing,  the  instant  he  arrives  abreast  with 
the  right  guide  of  his  division  column,  will  com- 
mand :  1.  Such  company  ly  the  right  (or  left) 
■flank.  2.  March.  3  Guide  left  (or  right).  The 
companies  will  take  the  quick  step  as  soon  as 
they  have  attained  their  distances,  and  each  cap- 
tain will  take  post,  as  indicated  No.  910. 
0-819.  At  the  command  march  by  the  colonel, 
the  companies  of  skirmishers  will  face  by  the  left 
and  right  flanks  respectively;  the  chiefs  and 
guides  will  place  themselves  as  prescribed  No. 
908,  and  each  company  will  be  conducted  by  its 
chief,  and  take  the  position  prescribed  No.  911. 
On  arriving  at  their  positions,  the  companies  will 
be  faced  by  the  right  and  left  flanks  respectively, 
take  the  step  of,  and  follow  their  respective 
division  columns. 

920.  Division  columns,  closed  in  mass,  will  be 
formed  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by 


208       SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    T. 

the  same  commands,  substituting  the  indication 
closed  in  mass,  for  that  of  at  company  distance. 

921.  A  line  of  division  columns  at  company 
distance,  will  be  closed  in  mass,  and  if  closed  in 
mass,  will  take  company  distance,  by  the  com- 
mands and  means  prescribed  for  a  simple  column. 
The  column  will  always  be  closed,  and  distances 
taken,  on  the  leading  companies. 

To  advance  in  a  line  of  division  coluinns, 

922.  A  line  of  division  columns  will  advance, 
or  retire,  oblique,  and  change  direction  to  the 
right  or  left,  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed ]sro.  648  and  following,  observing  what 
follows.  In  advancing,  the  captain  on  the  left 
flank  of  the  leading  company  of  the  first,  and  the 
captain  on  the  right  flank  of  the  leading  company 
of  the  fourth  division  column,  will  be  respectively 
responsible,  for  the  preservation  of  the  distances 
between  those  columns  and  the  adjacent  ones. 
When  the  battalion  faces  about  for  the  purpose 
of  retiring  in  line,  the  captains  of  the  two  centre 
companies,  now  leading,  will  place  themselves  in 
the  rear  rank,  now  in  front,  and  on  the  outer 
flanks  of  their  respective  companies.  The  cap- 
tains of  the  leading  companies  of  the  first  and  last 
division  columns,  will  place  themselves  respec- 
tively on  the  flanks  of  their  companies,  nearest 
the  centre  of  the  line,  and  in  the  rear  rank,  now 
leading ;  they  will  be  responsible  for  the  distances 
as  above  indicated.  The  captains  of  the  rear  com- 
panies of  the  division  columns,  will  place  them- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALIOX PART    V.       209 

selves  two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  their 
respective  companies. 

923.  At  the  command  J^rward,  by  the  colonel, 
the  color-bearer,  with  the  three  corporals  of  his 
guard  in  the  rank  of  file  closers,  will  place  them- 
selves in  front  of  the  leading  centre  companies, 
and  opposite  their  places  in  line.  The  color-bearer, 
with  his  two  outer  corporals,  six  paces  in  front  of 
the  file  closers,  the  centre  corporal,  with  the  two 
nearest  file  closers,  will  cover  them  in  that  rank. 


Passage  of  obstacles,  advancing  and  retiring  in 
line. 


924.  A  battalion,  advancing  or  retiring  in  lint-. 
encountering  an  obstacle  supposed  to  cover  one  or 
more  division  columns,  they  will  be  broken  to  the 
rear  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for 
breaking  off  companies  in  a  deployed  line,  observ- 
ing what  follows.  The  first  command  by  the 
colonel  will  be,  such  a  division  column,  or  columns, 
olstacle.  The  necessary  commands  for  breaking 
oflf  will  be  given  by  the  senior  captain  of  the 
column,  and  the  leading  company  of  the  column 
will  be  closed  in  mass  on  the  last  company  of  the 
column  behind  which  it  marches. 

925.  In  coming  again  into  line,  each  company 
will  be  conducted  by  its  chief  diagonally  to  the 
front,  and  when  its  right  file  shall  have  arrived 
at  the  proper  distance  from  the  division  column 
on  the  line,  it  will  be  filed  to  the  right,  and  having 
prolonged  itself  parallel  to  the  line,  will  be  faced 
by  a  flank,  by  command  of  its  chief,  and  take  the 
step  of  the  line. 

18* 


210       SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    T. 

926.  When  the  battalion,  advancing  in  line,  is 
brought  to  the  right  about,  and  one  or  more 
division  columns  have  previously  been  broken  off 
to  the  rear,  tlie  colonel,  should  he  desire  to  bring 
them  back  into  line,  will  first  cause  them  to  take 
full  distance. 

0-927.  At  the  command.  Battalion  foriDard,  by 
the  colonel,  when  it  is  desired  to  advance  or  re- 
tire inline,  the  chiefs  and  guides  of  the  companies 
of  skirmishers  will  execute  what  is  prescribed  No. 
654.  In  advancing,  and  in  passing  obstacles,  the 
companies  of  skirmishers  will  preserve  the  relative 
positions  with  the  division  columns,  prescribed 
No.  911.  "When,  in  retiring  in  line,  the  first  and 
last  division  columns  pass  obstacles,  and  also 
when  in  returning  into  line,  the  companies  of  skir- 
mishers will  execute  what  is  prescribed  No.  779. 


To  form  double  cohimn  from  a  line  of    division 
columns. 


928.  A  line  of  division  columns  being  at  a 
halt,  either  at  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass,  it 
will  form  double  column  by  the  commands  and 
means  prescribed  No.  875  and  following,  observ- 
ing what  follows.  At  the  first  command  by  the 
colonel,  the  captains  of  the  companies  of  the 
second  and  third  division  columns  will  caution 
them  to  stand  fast.  At  the  second  command, 
and  at  the  command  march^  the  second  and 
third  division  columns  wOl  stand  fast. 

929.  A  line  of  division  columns  on  a  march, 
either  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  will 
form  double  column  by  the  commands  and  means 


oL.:^. 


211 


=^. 


i 

i 


•serving 
bv  the 
of  the 

caution 

11  com- 
march^ 

ill  con- 


ill  exe- 

'^n,  879, 


double 


lalf  dis- 
to  form 
Jl  com- 


attalion 
quick — 


and  left 
m  selves 
ly,  both 
e  them- 
of  their 
16  com- 
Livisions 

compa- 
>  of  the 

to  face 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAUT   V.        211 

prescribed  Ko.  889  and  following,  observing 
what  follows.  At  the  first  command  bv  the 
colonel,  the  captains  of  the  companies  of  the 
second  and  third  division  columns  will  caution 
them  to  march  straight-forward,  and  will  com- 
mand: Quich  time.  At  the  command  march., 
the  second  and  third  division  columns  will  con- 
tinue to  march  straight-forward. 
0-930.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  exe- 
cute what  has  been  prescribed  Xos.  877,  879, 
884,  891  and  895. 


To  form  line  of   division  columns  from  double 
columns. 


931.  The  double  column,  either  at  half  dis- 
tance or  closed  in  mass,  being  at  a  halt,  to  form 
line  of  division  columns,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  Form,  line  division  columns.  2.  Battalion 
outward  face.  3.  Maech  (or  double  quick — 
Maech). 

932.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  and  left 
guides  of  the  first  division  will  place  themselves 
before  the  right  and  left  files  respectively,  both 
faced  to  the  right ;  the  captains  will  place  them- 
selves two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  their 
respective  companies ;  the  captains  of  the  com- 
panies constituting  the  first  and  second  divisions 
of  the  double  column  will  caution  their  compa- 
nies to  stand  fast ;  the  other  captains  of  the 
right  wing  wiU  caution  their  companies  to  face 


212        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    V. 

to  the  right,  and  the  others  of  the  left  wing  will 
caution  their  companies  to  face  to  the  left.  The 
lieutenant-colonel  will  place  one  marker  at  com- 
pany distance  from  the  right  of  the  first  division, 
and  on  a  line  with  its  guides,  and  a  second 
marker  a  little  less  than  company  distance  from 
the  first;  they  will  face  toward  the  division 
guides,  and  he  assured  in  their  positions  by  the 
lieutenant-colonel.  The  senior  major  will  make 
a  like  disposition  with  markers  on  the  left  of  the 
column. 

0-933.  At  the  same  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon  column  will  caution  his  column  to 
face  to  the  right,  and  the  chief  of  the  second 
platoon  column  will  caution  his  column  to  face 
to  the  left. 

934.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  and 
second  divisions  will  stand  fast,  and  the  captains 
and  guides  will  place  themselves  as  prescribed 
Nos.  909  and  910  ;  the  others  of  the  right  wing 
will  face  to  the  right,  and  the  others  of  the  left 
wing  will  face  to  the  left.  Each  captain  whose 
company  has  faced  to  the  right  will  place  him- 
self by  the  side  of  his  right  guide ;  and  each 
captain  whose  company  has  faced  to  the  left 
will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  his  left  guide. 
0-935.  At  the  same  command,  the  platoon  col- 
umns will  face  to  the  right  and  left  respectively, 
and  the  chiefs  and  guides  will  place  themselves 
as  prescribed  No.  879. 

936.  At  the  command  march^  the  companies 
which  form  the  second  and  third  division  col- 
umns will  stand  fast ;  those  which  form  the  first 
and  fourth  division  columns,  conducted  by  their 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART   V.        213 

respective  captains,  will  move  diagonally  to  the 
front. 

937.  The  captain  of  the  leading  company  of 
the  first  division  column  will  conduct  his  compa- 
ny on  the  marker  on  the  right  of  the  first  divis- 
ion, and  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  of 
the  last  division  column  will  conduct  his  compa- 
ny on  the  marker  at  the  left  of  the  first  division ; 
the  other  companies  will  take  care  to  preserve 
their  parallelism  with  the  leading  ones,  and  the 
gnides  will  maintain  themselves  on  a  perpendicu- 
lar with  the  guides  of  the  leading  companies 
respectively. 

938.  On  arriving  up  with  the  marker,  the 
captain  of  each  leading  company  will  halt  in  his 
own  person,  and  let  his  company  file  past  him  ; 
the  leading  company,  first  division  column,  will 
file  to  the  right,  and  when  its  last  file  is  abreast 
with  the  captain,  he  will  halt  the  company,  face 
it  to  the  front,  and  dress  it  to  the  left  on  the 
markers.  The  captain  of  the  rear  company  of 
this  same  column  will  establish  his  company  in 
rear  of  the  first  by  the  means  just  prescribed ; 
the  companies  constituting  the  last  division  col- 
umn will  be  established  on  the  markers  to  the 
left  of  the  first  division,  in  a  similar  manner,  but 
by  inverse  means. 

0-939.  At  the  command  march^  the  platoon  col- 
umns will  be  conducted  by  their  respective  chiefs 
straight-forward.  When  the  right  flank  of  the 
first  platoon  column  has  arrived  on  a  line  with 
the  marker  placed  on  the  right  of  the  line  of 
battle,  the  column  will  be  faced  by  the  left  or 
right  flank,  as  the  double  column  may  have  been, 


21-i        SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALIOX PART    Y. 

at  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass,  and  having 
attained  its  proper  distance  from  the  first  divis- 
ion column,  it  will  be  halted  and  deployed  on 
its  first  platoon.  The  second  platoon  column 
will  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the 
first,  but  by  inverse  means. 

940.  The  line  being  formed,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Guides — Posts. 

At  this,  the  captains  and  guides  will  take 
posts  as  prescribed  Xos.  909  and  910. 

941.  The  double  column,  either  at  half  dis- 
tance or  closed  in  mass,  being  in  march,  to  form 
line  of  division  columns,  no  markers  will  be 
posted.     The  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Form  line  division  columns.  2.  Battalion  ly 
the  rigJit  and  left  fianks.  3.  Maech  (or  dou- 
lle  quicJc — Maech). 

942.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will 
place  themselves  quickly  in  front  of  their  respect- 
ive companies;  the  captains  of  the  first  and  second 
divisions  will  caution  their  companies  to  march 
straight  to  the  front,  and  will  command:  Quick 
time;  the  other  captains  of  the  right  wing  will 
caution  their  companies  to  face  by  the  right 
liank,  and  the  other  captains  of  the  left  wing  will 
caution  their  companies  to  face  by  the  left  flank. 
0-943.  At  the  same  command,  the  chiefs  of  the 
jjlatoon  columns  will  caution  them  to  face  by  the 
right  and  left  flanks,  respectively. 

944.  At  the   command  march^  the  first   and 


School  of    tte  Battalion. 


1. 


I'l.iS 


i   '1 


u 


-•U-, 


I  *      II 


1 1     M 


mi 


t 


r 


SCHOOL    OF    TIIE   BATTALION PART    Y.       215 

second  divisions  will  march  in  quick  time,  and 
their  captains  will  place  themselves  as  prescribed 
Nos.  909  and  910.  The  other  companies  will 
face  by  the  flanks  in  marching,  and  will  take 
their  places  in  line,  as  prescribed  l^o.  93-i  and 
following,  observing  what  follows.  When  the 
companies  have  arrived  on  the  line,  each  chief 
of  the  companies  of  the  right  wing,  will  com- 
mand: 1.  By  the  left  Jlanl.\  march.  2.  G^iide 
left.  And  each  chief  of  the  companies  of  the 
left  wing,  will  command:  1.  Bf/  the  right  fanJc, 
larch.  2.  Guide  right.  The  chiefs  and  guides 
will  take  their  proper  ])laces,  and  the  cohnnns 
will  march  aligned  with,  and  take  the  step  of, 
the  centre  division  columns.  The  color  and  gen- 
eral guides  will  take  their  places  as  prescribed 
l^os.  736  and  773. 

0-945.  At  the  command  march  by  the  colonel, 
the  platoon  columns  will  face  by  the  right  and 
left  flanks,  respectively,  and  will  execute  what  is 
prescribed  No.  939,  obser\dng  what  follows.  The 
platoon  columns  will  face  toward  the  line  of 
battle  in  order  to  obtain  their  distances,  whether 
the  double  column  be  at  half  distance,  or  closed 
in  mass.     They  will  deploy  while  on  the  march. 


Deployment  of  the  double   column,  faced  to  the 
front. 


946.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  deploy  the  double 
column,  will  place  a  marker  respectively  before 
the  right  and  left  files  of  the  first  division,  and 
as  third  before  the  left  file  of  the  right  company, 
same  division ;  which  being  done,  he  will  causQ 


216        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART   V. 

the  two  general  guides  to  spring  out  on  the  align- 
ment of  the  markers,  a  little  beyond  the  points 
at  which  the  respective  flanks  of  the  battalion 
ought  to  rest ;  he  will  then  command: 

1.  Deploy  column.     2.  Battalion  outward — Face. 
3.  Maech  (or  douhle  quiclc — March). 

947.  The  column  will  deploy  itself  on  the  two 
companies  at  its  head,  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  the  deployment  of  columns  in 
mass.  The  captains  of  these  companies  will 
each,  at  the  command  march^  place  himself  on 
the  right  of  his  own  company,  and  align  it  by 
the  right;  the  captain  of  the  fourth  will  then 
place  himself  in  the  rear  rank,  and  the  covering 
sergeant  in  the  rank  of  file  closers,  at  the  mo- 
ment the  captain  of  the  third  shall  come  to  its 
left  to  align  it. 

0-948-  At  the  first  command  by  the  colonel,  the 
chief  of  each  platoon  column  will  command: 
Backward,  march.  At  this,  each  column  will  step 
nine  paces  to  the  rear,  and  be  halted  by  its  chief; 
the  first  platoon  column  will  then  be  faced  to  the 
right,  and  the  second  to  the  left,  by  their  respec- 
tive chiefs,  who  will  place  themselves,  as  also  the 
guides,  as  prescribed  Xo.  935.  "When  the  right 
and  left  files  respectively,  of  the  first  and  last  bat- 
talion companies,  have  arrived  abreast  with  the 
right  and  left  files  of  the  platoon  columns  re- 
spectively, the  latter  will  be  put  in  march,  and  be 
faced  by  the  right  and  left  flanks  respectively, 
when  those  companies  halt. 
0-949.  When  the  first  platoon  column  has  ar- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    Y.       211 

rived  at  its  proper  distance  from  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, it  will  be  faced  about,  halted,  and  deployed 
on  its  first  platoon.  The  second  platoon  column 
will  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the 
first  by  inverse  means. 

0-950.  If  the  double  column  is  deployed  from 
half  distance,  at  the  first  command  by  the  colonel, 
the  platoon  columns  will  be  cautioned  to  face  to 
the  right  and  left  respectively.  At  the  second 
command,  the  first  platoon  column  will  face  to 
the  right,  and  the  second  to  the  left,  and  the  chief 
of  each  column  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast. 
When  the  right  and  left  files  of  the  companies 
constituting  the  division  next  to  the  last,  arrive 
abreast  with  the  right  and  left  files  of  the  pla- 
toon columns  respectively,  the  latter  will  be  put 
in  march,  and  will  be  halted  when  these  respec- 
tively halt.  "When  the  companies  constituting 
the  last  division,  have  passed,  the  platoon  col- 
umns will  again  be  put  in  motion :  and  when  the 
right  and  left  files  respectively  arrive  in  a  line 
with  the  markers  on  the  right  and  left  of  the 
line  of  battle,  the  platoon  columns  will  execute 
what  is  prescribed  No.  939. 

951.  The  deployment  being  ended,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

Guides — Posts. 

952.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause 
the  fire  to  commence  pending  the  deployment,  he 
will  give  an  order  to  that  effect  to  the  captains  of 
the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  and  the  fire  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
No.  528. 

VOL.  n. — 19 


218       SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PART    V. 

953.  The  battalion  being  in  double  column  and 
in  march,  if  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  it 
without  halting  the  column,  he  will  cause  three 
markers  to  be  posted  on  the  line  of  battle,  and 
when  the  liead  of  the  colunm  shall  arrive  near 
the  markers,  he  w^ill  command : 

1.  Deploy  column.  2.  Battalion.^  hy  the  right 
and  leftjianlcs.  3.  Maech  (or  double  quick — 
Maech). 

954.  The  column  will  deploy  on  the  two  lead- 
ing companies,  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed for  the  deployment  of  a  close  column. 
No.  580  and  following ;  at  the  command  march 
the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  halt  it,  and  the 
captains  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies  will 
align  their  companies  by  the  right. 

955.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  it  be  the 
wish  of  the  colonel  to  deploy  the  column  and  to 
continue  to  march  in  the  order  of  battle,  he  will 
not  cause  markers  to  be  established  at  the  head 
of  the  column.  The  movement  will  be  executed 
by  the  commands  and  means  indicated  Xo.  953, 
observing  what  follows.  At  the  first  command, 
the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  caution  it  to 
continue  the  march  to  the  front,  and  will  com- 
mand, Quich  time.  At  the  command  march.,  the 
first  division  will  march  in  quick  time ;  the  col- 
onel will  command,  Guide  centre.  The  captains 
of  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  the  color,  and 
the  men,  will  immediately  conform  to  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  march  in  line  of  battle.  The  com- 
panies will  take  the  quick  step  by  the  command 


SCHOOL   OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    V.      219 

of  their  captains,  as  they  successively  arrive  in 
line.  The  movement  completed,  the  colonel  may 
cause  the  battalion  to  march  in  double  quick  time. 
0-956.  In  deploying  on  a  march,  at  the  first  com- 
mand by  the  colonel,  the  chief  of  each  platoon 
column  will  immediately  command :  Such  pla- 
toon column,,  marh  time,,  march.  When  the  last 
division  has  passed,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
column  will  face  his  column  by  the  right  flank, 
and  the  chief  of  the  second,  by  the  left  flank: 
the  chiefs  and  guides  will  place  themselves  as 
prescribed  No.  908,  and  the  platoon  columns  will 
be  put  in  march,  and  having  arrived  opposite 
their  places  in  line,  they  will  be  faced  by  the 
left  and  right  flanks  respectively,  to  march  tow- 
ard the  line,  and  they  will  be  deployed  while 
marching. 

0-957.  In  deploying  a  double  column  on  a  march, 
from  half  distance,  at  the  first  command  by  the 
colonel,  the  platoon  columns  will  be  cautioned 
by  their  chiefs,  to  face  by  the  right  and  left 
flanks  respectively.  At  the  command  march, 
the  platoon  columns  will  be  faced  by  the  flanks, 
and  each  chief  will  command.  Such  platoon  col- 
umn,, marh  time — March.  The  platoon  columns 
will  then  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  No. 
950,  they  will  be  deployed  while  marching,  and 
take  the  quick  step  on  attaining  their  distances. 

To  form  the  double  column  into  line  of  battle, 
faced  to  the  right  or  left. 

958.  The  double  column,  being  at  company 
distance  and  at  a  halt,  may  be  formed  into  line 


220      SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION — PAET   Y. 

of  battle  faced  to  the  right  or  left;  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  faced  to  the  right, 
he  will  command : 


1.  Right  into  line  wheel,  left  companim  on  the 
right  into  line.  2.  Battalion,  guide  right 
3.  AIaech  (or  double  quick — Maech). 

959.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will 
place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company ; 
the  right  companies  will  be  cautioned  that  they 
will  have  to  wheel  to  the  right  into  line,  the  left 
companies  that  they  will  have  to  march  straight- 
forward. 

0-960-  At  the  same  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon  column  will  face  it  about,  and  the 
chief  of  each  platoon  column  will  command : 
1.  Foricard.     2.    Guide  right. 

961.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide 
of  the  fourth  company  will  place  himself  briskly 
on  the  direction  of  the  right  guides  of  the  col- 
umn, face  to  them,  and  opposite  to  one  of  the 
three  last  files  of  his  company  when  in  line  of 
battle  ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  him  in 
tliat  position. 

962.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated 
by  all  the  captains,  the  right  companies  will 
form  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  the  left 
companies  will  put  themselves  in  march  in  order 
to  form  on  the  right  into  lino  of  battle ;  these 
formations  will  be  executed  by  the  means  indi- 
cated Iso.  464  and  following.  No.  502  and  fol- 
lowing;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  the 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    T.       221 

guides  of  the  left  wing  on  the  line  of  battle  as 
they  successively  come  upon  it. 
0-963.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  platoon 
column  will  march  straight-forward,  and  when 
the  guide  of  the  first  platoon  has  passed  tho 
right  of  the  line  a  distance  of  thr«e  paces,  the 
chief  of  tho  column  will  face  it  by  the  right 
flank,  and  take  the  guide  to  the  right ;  when  the 
chief  of  the  first  platoon  has  arrived  at  a  dis- 
tance of  thirty-three  paces  in  rear  of  the  right 
of  the  line,  he  Avill  halt  in  his  own  person,  and 
the  platoon  will  file  to  the  right  and  execute 
what  is  indicated  No.  517. 

0-964.  The  second  platoon  column  will  be  moved 
to  tho  front,  and  wheeled  to  the  right,  so  that 
tho  right  files  of  the  platoons  will  be  on  a  line 
with  the  right  file  of  the  last  battalion  company, 
on  the  completion  of  the  wheel.  The  column 
will  then  be  moved  to  its  proper  position,  halted, 
and  deployed  on  the  first  platoon  by  its  chief. 

965.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel 
will  command: 

1.  Bight  into  line  wheel.  2.  Left  eompanies,  on 
ths  right  into  line.  3.  Battalion,  guide  right. 
4.  MAEcn  (or  double  quick — Maecii). 

966.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will 
place  himself  promptly  before  the  centre  of  his 
company ;  the  right  companies  will  be  cautioned 
that  they  will  have  to  wheel  to  the  right,  and  the 
left  companies  that  they  will  have  to  form  on  the 
right  into  line. 

0-967.  At  the  same  command,  the  chief  of  the 
19* 


222      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTAilON PABT    V. 

first  platoon  column,  will  command,  right  about, 
and  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon  column,  will 
caution  it  to  march  straight  forward. 

968.  At  the  command  march.,  briskly  repeated, 
the  right  companies  will  form  to  the  right  into 
line,  and  the  left  companies  on  the  right  into  line. 
These  formations  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
Kos.  476,  503,  and  following, 
0-969-  At  the  command  march,  the  first  platoon 
column  will  face  about,  and  will  execute  what  is 
prescribed  No.  963.  The  second  platoon  column 
will  execute  what  is  prescribed  No.  96-i. 

970.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  move  the 
battalion  forward,  at  the  moment  the  right  com- 
panies have  completed  the  wheel,  he  will  com- 
mand: 

5.  Forward.     6.  March  (or  double  quick — 
Maech). 

971-  At  the  command ybrwar6?,  the  captains  of 

the  right  companies  will  command,  Quiclc  time. 
At  the  command  march,  the  right  companies  will 
cease  to  wheel,  and  march  straight-forward.  The 
colonel  will  then  add: 

7.    Guide  centre. 

At  this  command,  the  color  and  right  general 
guides  will  immediately  conform  to  the  principles 
of  the  march  in  line  of  battle. 

972.  The  movement  of  the  left  companies  will 
be  executed  in  double  quick  time  as  prescribed 
above,  and  as  they  arrive  on  the  line  each  captain 
will  cause  his  company  to  march  in  quick  time. 


aCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALIOX PART    V.      223 

0-973.  If  the  line  move  on  without  halting,  the 
first  platoon  column  will  take  the  double  quick 
step,  and  after  having  filed  as  prescribed  No.  963, 
the  companj  will  be  faced  by  the  right  flank,  and 
having  gained  its  proper  distance  will  take  the 
step  of  the  line.  The  second  platoon  column, 
after  wheeling  parallel  to  the  line,  will  be  deployed 
while  marching. 

974.  The  column  may  be  formed  faced  to  the 
left  into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

975.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass  instead 
of  at  company  distance,  tliese  movements  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
Nos.  637  and  638. 

E^MAEK  ON  THE    DEPLOYMENT  OF  THE  DOUELE 
COLUMN. 

976.  The  depth  of  the  double  column,  at  com- 
pany distance,  being  inconsiderable,  closing  it  in 
mass,  if  at  a  halt,  in  order  to  deploy  it,  may  be 
dispensed  with  ;  but  if  it  be  in  march,  it  will  be 
preferable  to  cause  it  so  to  close,  in  halting,  before 
deploying. 

977.  The  double  column  will  be  deployed 
habitually  on  the  centre  companies,  but  the  col- 
onel may  sometimes  deploy  it  on  any  interior 
company,  or  on  the  first  or  eighth  company. 
0-978.  If  the  double  column  be  deployed  on  any 
other  company  than  the  centre  ones,  the  platoon 
columns  of  skirmishers,  will  be  moved  to  their 
proper  positions,  by  the  means  already  prescribed. 


224      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    T. 

To  deploy  a  line  of  division  columns- 

979.  A  line  of  division  columns,  will  be  de- 
ployed either  at  the  halt  or  on  a  march,  by  the 
commands  and  means  prescribed  for  deploying  a 
double  column.  If  the  deployment  is  made  from 
a  halt,  the  guides  of  the  leading  companies  of  the 
first  and  fourth  division  columns,  will,  at  the  first 
command  by  the  colonel,  place  themselves  in  front 
of  the  right  and  left  files  of  their  companies  re- 
spectively, faced  toward,  and  on  a  line  with,  the 
markers  in  front  of  the  centre  division.  Those  of 
the  right  wing  will  be  assured  in  this  position  by 
the  lieutenant-colonel,  and  those  of  the  left  wing 
by  the  senior  major. 

0  980.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  be 
faced  to  the  right  and  left  respectively,  when  the 
column  faces,  and  at  the  command  march  by  the 
colonel,  will  be  moved  by  their  respective  captains 
to  the  positions  prescribed  No.  9,  Title  1. 

EEMAEK  ON  THE  LINE  OF  DIVISION  COLUMNS. 

981«  In  case  a  battalion,  in  line  of  division 
columns,  attacks  or  repels  an  attack  from  the 
enemy,  the  colonel  may  detach  the  first  and  fourth 
division  column,  each  commanded  by  a  field 
officer,  to  attack  the  flanks  of  the  enemy,  while 
the  second  and  third  division  columns  deploy. 

To  form  double  columns  from  simple  column  by 
company. 

982.  The  battalion  being  in  column  by  com- 
pany, either  at  full  distance,  or  closed  in  mass, 


Vol.  2-  '^ * "^^o '^^   "^    ^^'^*^    B al t a lion_ .  /?/  y ,(^ 


J"*-?^ 

H:^:3r- 

1 
1 

; 

a 

[~       JB*    ) 

^ 

JT 

'iiiili.iiliJli'ttiiiiiiiiiliiiiiiilhi'liiillll'iill"  I  I 


4'!!IIIHI!lllll!li!li!P!ilHllliilllll!IIIMii'!lllnl;P^' 


Lj!jl|ili|,Mn|i|[iiii.i  |i|iij|i|^|ii|^jli||l^ 


-|ii.!!|ii!!lli:i!!'i!'''l!!llliiMlllii!l!^!'!'''M!!i!U!ii:!{^ 


H ^1 

2^o   form   d^JiCblc    cofiunn    frojn    sun/jle 
coJiunii    bj'    conip  an  y .        j!io .  '98 2 . 


SCHOOL    OF   THE   BATTAUON — PAET    V.      225 

right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  to  form  double  columa, 
the  colonel  will  command  : 


^1.  Form  douhle  column.     2.    Eight  wing,  right 
Face.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

983-  At  the  first  command  the  captains  of  the 
companies  of  tlie  right  wing,  will  caution  them 
that  tliey  will  have  to  face  to  the  right.  The 
captains  of  the  left  wing,  will  caution  their  com- 
panies to  stand  f;ist.  The  left  general  guide  will 
place  himself  on  the  prolongation  of  the  froni 
rank  of  the  last  battalion  company,  and  at  a  dis- 
tance from  its  right  guide,  equal  to  the  front  of  a 
company,  he  will  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the 
senior  major.  The  music  will  take  post  as  pre- 
scribed No.  888. 

0-984.  At  the  same  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon  column  will  face  his  column  to  the 
right.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  column, 
will  command  :  Column  foicard,  guide  left.  If  the 
column  is  closed  in  mass, the  second  platoon  column 
will  face  to  the  left. 

985.  At  the  second  command,  the  companies 
of  the  right  wing  will  face  to  the  right,  and 
their  captains  will  place  themselves  respectively 
by  the  side  of  their  right  guides. 

986.  At  the  command  march,  the  companies 
which  have  faced,  will  march  straight-forward  ; 
the  captain  of  the  left  company  of  the  right 
wing  will  halt  in  his  own  person,  and  let  his 
company  file  past  him,  and  when  the  left  file  is 
abreast  with  him  he  will  command  :  1.  Such  com- 


226       SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PABT    V. 

'pany  ^  hy  the  right  flank.  2.  Maech.  3.  Guide 
right. 

937.  At  this,  the  left  guide,  placing  himself  on 
the  right  of  the  rear  rank,  now  in  front,  will  so 
conduct  it,  that  the  elbow  of  the  file  on  his  left, 
will  graze  the  covering  sergeant  on  the  right  of 
the  leading  company  of  the  left  wing ;  just  he- 
fore  the  union  of  the  two  companies,  the  left 
guide  will  take  his  place  in  the  rank  of  file 
closers,  and  when  the  company  has  just  past  the 
covering  sergeant,  the  captain  will  command :  1. 
Such  company.,  halt.  2.  About  face.  The  chief 
of  the  division  will  immediately  place  himself  on 
its  right,  and  he,  as  also  the  junior  captain,  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed  Xo.  883. 
0-988.  At  the  command  march  by  the  colonel, 
the  first  platoon  column  will  march  straight-for- 
ward, and  when  its  left  flank  is  at  a  distance 
from  the  battalion  column,  a  little  more  than 
a  division  front,  it  will  be  faced  by  the  right 
flank,  and  taking  the  guide  to  the  right,  will  be 
marched  to  the  rear,  closing  in  mass  while  march- 
ing, on  its  second  platoon. 

■0-989.  When  the  first  platoon  arrives  on  a  line 
six  paces  in  rear  of  the  front  rank  of  the  division 
next  to  the  last,  it  will  face  by  the  right  flank, 
and  be  marched  and  established  in  the  position 
prescribed  No.  884. 

0-990.  The  second  platoon  column  will  march 
straight-forward,  closing  in  mass  while  marching^ 
until  its  first  platoon  arrives  on  the  line  above 
indicated,  when  it  will  be  faced  by  the  left  flank 
and  be  marched  and  established  in  the  position 
prescribed  No.  884.     If  the  column  is  closed  in 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    V.       227 

mass,  the  second  platoon  column  will  march  to 
the  rear  of  the  last  division,  and  having  passed 
three  paces  will  be  faced  by  the  right  flank,  and 
take  the  position  prescribed  No.  884. 

991.  The  three  right  companies  of  the  bat- 
talion having  marched  a  distance  eqnal  to  the 
front  of  a  division,  the  colonel  will  command : 
1.  Three  right  companies  by  the  right  Jlanh.  2. 
March.     3.   Guide  right. 

992.  At  the  third  command,  the  left  guides 
will  place  themselves  as  prescribed  No.  987,  and 
the  leading  one  will  direct  himself  on  the  left 
general  guide.  Each  captain,  as  his  company 
arrives  on  a  line  with  its  corresponding  division 
company,  will  command:  1.  Such  company^  hy 
the  right  JlanTc.  2.  March.  If  the  column  is  in 
close  order,  the  two  right  companies  will  mark 
time,  by  the  command  of  their  captains,  until  the 
third  has  passed,  and  the  right  company  will 
in  its  turn  mark  time  until  the  second  lins 
passed. 

993.  Just  before  the  union,  the  left  guides  will 
place  th:mselves  as  prescribed  No.  987.  When 
th^^  iront-rank  man  of  the  left  file  has  arrived 
up  with  the  right  guide  of  the  corresponding  di- 
vision company,  each  captain  will  command  :  1. 
Such  company^  halt.  2.  Front,  and  the  captains 
in  each  division  will  respectively  execute  what 
is  prescribed  No.  883. 

994.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  the 
right  guides  of  the  divisions,  on  the  direction,  by 
pacing  himself  in  their  rear,  as  they  successively 
arrive. 

995.  The  column  being  at  full  distance,  to  form 


238       SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    V. 

double  column  while  marching,  and  to  continue 
the  march,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Form  douMe  column.  2.  Bight  icing  by  the 
right  flank.  3.  Maech  (or  double  quicJc — 
March). 

996.  This  movement  will  be  executed  by  the 

commands  and  means  as  prescribed  when  at  a 
halt,  observing  what  follows.  At  the  first  com- 
mand, the  captains  of  the  left  wing  will  com^ 
mand:  QuicJc  time,  and  at  the  command  march, 
will  take  or  continue  the  quick  step.  At  the 
same  command,  the  companies  of  the  right  wing 
will  move  at  double  quick.  The  captain  of  the 
company,  next  in  front  of  the  lea-^ling  company 
of  the  left  wing,  having  prolonged  his  company 
a  distance  equal  to  its  front,  will  command:  1. 
Sv^h  company.,  by  the  left  flanlc,  quicTc  time.  2. 
March.  And  as  soon  as  the  company  has  faced, 
will  add:  1.  Marh  time.  2.  March.  As  soon 
as  the  corresponding  company  of  his  division 
has  arrived  abreast  with  his  company,  he  will 
command:  1.  Forward.  2,  March.  3.  Guide 
right.  And  at  this,  the  division  will  take  the 
guide  to  the  right. 

997.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies  of 
the  right  wing,  on  uniting  with  their  respective 
division  companies,  will  command  :  1.  Such  com- 
pany^ by  the  right  flanlc.  2.  Quick  time.  3. 
March.  4.  Guide  right.  At  this,  the  right 
guides  of  division  will  cover  the  right  guides  of 
the  column. 

0-998.  The  platoon  columns  of  the  companies 
of  skirmishers,  will  execute  this  movement   as 


Tol.^.  Sckool  of    tke  Battalion.        Ft  30. 


■^   ^"' 

1      •= — ■  ■ 

'1 

1        Fls.J 

Y 

.  1 

\                          ri 

J 

H         '     T^T. 

^. 

To  Porrn  .square.  No..9-9.9. 

pi'''i:r:l!!«l!!;lil1!llHiI  H    Ifl     ;    1 

! 

^—.  "^-.-^^ 

P^-     >  ■*=    op 

3  "           >W  ~'S!-!;s>S;"'"s-.'^        -  p 

i= .  -  =  =  o , .  „  /I 

- 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PAET  V.   229 

has  been  prescribed  for  a  halt,  observing  what 
follows.  The  platoon  columns  will  take  the  dou- 
ble quick  step.  The  leading  platoon  of  the  first 
platoon  column,  having  arrived  on  a  line  a  few 
paces  in  advance  of  the  division  next  to  the  last, 
and  the  second  platoon  column  having  arrived 
on  a  line  just  in  rear  of  this  division,  they  will 
respectively  be  faced  by  the  right  and  left  flanks, 
by  their  chiefs,  marched  to  their  proper  positions, 
faced  by  the  right  flank,  and  take  the  quick  step. 


Article  XIY. 
Dispositions  against  cavalry. 

999.  A  battalion  being  in  column  by  company, 
at  half  distance,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  square, 
he  will  first  cause  divisions  to  be  formed ;  which 
being  done,  he  will  command: 

1.  Form  square.  ♦  2.  Right  and  Uft  into  line, 
wheel. 

1000.  At  the  first  command,  the  file  closers  of 
«ach  company  of  the  fourth  division,  passing  by 
the  outer  flanks  of  their  companies,  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  before  the  front  rank,  op- 
posite to  their  respective  places,  in  line  of  battle, 
and  faced  toward  the  head  of  the  column.  The 
music,  formed  in  two  ranks,  wiU  place  itself  at 
platoon  distance  behind  the  inner  platoons  of 
the  second  division. 

TOL.  II. — 20 


230       SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    V. 

1001.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  face  the  left 
guides,  the  senior  major,  placing  himself  on  the 
right  of  the  column  abreast  -with  the  first  divis- 
ion, will  face  the  right  guides,  they  will  align 
them  from  the  front,  on  the  respective  guides  of 
the  fourth  division,  who  will  stand  fast,  holding 
up  their  pieces,  inverted,  perpendicularly;  the 
right  guides,  in  placing  themselves  on  the  direc- 
tion, will  take  their  exact  distances ;  the  guides 
of  the  second  division  taking  care  to  take  their 
distance  from  the  rear  rank  of  the  first. 
0-1002.  At  the  same  command,  the  platoon  col- 
unms  will  be  faced  to  the  left ;  each  chief  and 
guide  will  place  himself  as  prescribed  No.  879. 
The  columns  will  take  the  double  quick  step. 
The  first  platoon  column  will  be  conducted  to  the 
rear,  and  the  second  diagonally  to  the  front :  they 
will  take  a  position  in  rear  of  the  inner  platoons 
of  the  division  next  to  the  last ;  the  front  rank 
of  the  leading  platoons  of  the  columns,  four 
paces  from  the  rear  rank  of  the  division,  and  the 
first  platoon  column  on  the  right  of  the  second. 
Q-1003.  The  junior  major  will  place  himself  four 
paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  platoon  col- 
umns. 

1004.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of 
the  first  division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  all 
the  captains  of  the  second  and  third  divisions 
will  place  themselves  before  the  centres  of  their 
respective  companies,  and  caution  them  that  they 
will  have  to  wheel,  the  right  companies  to  the 
right,  and  the  left  companies  to  the  left  into  line 
of  battle. 

1005.  The  color-bearer  will  step  hack  into  the 


SCHOOL    OF   THE   BATTALION PAET    V.        231 

line  of  file  closers,  opposite  to  his  place  in  line 
of  battle,  and  will  be  replaced  by  the  corporal 
of  his  file,  vrho  is  in  the  rear  rank;  the  corporal 
of  the  same  file  who  is  in  the  rank  of  file  closers 
will  step  into  the  rear  rank. 

1006.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will 
command:  1.  Fourth  division^  foricard;  2.  Guide 
left,  and  place  himself  at  the  same  time  two  paces 
outside  of  its  left  flank. 

1007.  At  the  same,  the  junior  major  will  com- 
mand :  1.  Skirmishers  foruard;  2.    Guide  centre. 

1008.  These  dispositions  ended,  the  colonel 
will  command: 


3.  Maech  (or  douhle  quick — March). 

1009.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the 
first  division  will  stand  fast;  but  its  right  file 
will  face  to  the  right,  and  its  left  file  to  the  left. 

1010.  The  companies  of  the  second  and  third 
divisions  will  wheel  to  the  right  and  left  into  line, 
and  the  music  will  advance  a  space  equal  to  the 
front  of  a  company. 

1011.  The  fourth  division  will  close  up  to  form 
the  square,  and  when  it  shall  have  closed,  its 
chief  will  halt  it,  face  it  about,  and  align  it  by 
the  rear  rank  upon  the  guides  of  the  division, 
who  will,  for  this  purpose,  remain  faced  to  the 
front.  The  junior  captain  will  pass  into  the  rear 
rank,  now  become  the  front,  and  the  covering 
sergeant  of  the  left  company  will  place  himself 
behind  him  in  the  front  rank,  become  rear.  The 
file-closers  will,  at  the  same  time,  close  up  a  pace 


232     scnooL  of  the  battaliox — paet  v. 

on  the  front  rank,  and  the  outer  file  on  each  flank 
of  the  division  will  face  outward. 
0-1012.  At  the  same  command,  the  skirmishers 
will  advance  a  distance  equal  to  a  company  front, 
the  guide  in  the  centre  directing  himself  on  the 
centre  of  the  first  front  of  the  square. 

1013.  The  square  being  formed,  the  colonel 
will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

1014.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  first 
and  fourth,  and  the  guides  of  all  the  divisions, 
will  enter  the  square. 

1015.  The  captains  whose  companies  have 
formed  to  the  right  into  line,  will  remain  on  the 
left  of  their  companies;  the  left  guide  of  each 
of  those  companies  will,  in  the  rear  rank,  cover 
his  captain,  and  the  covering  sergeant  of  each 
will  place  himself  as  a  file  closer  behind  the  right 
file  of  his  company. 

1016.  The  field  and  staff  will  enter  the  square, 
the  lieutenant-colonel  placing  himself  behind  the 
left,  and  the  senior  major  behind  the  right  of  the 
first  division,  the  junior  major  in  rear  of  the 
centre  of  the  skirmishers. 

1017.  A  battalion  ought  never  to  present,  near 
the  enemy's  cavalry,  an  odd  company.  The  odd 
company,  under  that  circumstance,  ought,  when 
the  battalion  is  under  arms,  to  be  consolidated, 
for  the  time,  with  the  other  companies. 

1018.  The  fronts  of  the  square  will  be  desig- 
nated as  folloAvs:  the  first  division  will  always 
hQ  t\iQ  first  front ;  the  last  division,  t\iQ  fourth 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    Y.       233 

front ;  the  right  companies  of  the  other  divisions 
will  form  the  second  front;  and  the  left  com- 
panies of  the  same  divisions  the  third  front. 

1019.  A  battalion  being  in  column  by  company, 
at  half  distance,  right  in  front,  and  in  march, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square,  he 
will  first  cause  divisions  to  be  formed,  which  be- 
ing executed,  he  will  command : 

1.  Form  sqvAire.     2.  Right  and   left   into  line^ 
wheel.     3.  March  (or  double  quich — March). 

1020.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  caution  it  to  remain  faced  to 
the  front,  and  will  command :  First  division. 
All  the  captains  of  the  second  and  third  divisions 
will  rapidly  place  themselves  before  the  centres 
of  their  respective  companies,  and  caution  them 
that  they  will  have  to  wheel,  the  right  companies 
to  the  right,  and  the  left  companies  to  the  left 
into  line.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will 
caution  it  to  continue  its  march,  and  will  hasten 
to  its  left  flank.  The  file  closers  and  music  will 
execute  what  is  prescribed  No.  1000. 

1021.  At  the  second  command,  the  color-bear- 
er, and  the  corporals  of  his  file  will  execute  what 
is  prescribed  No.  1005. 

1022.  At  the  third  command,  briskly  repeated, 
the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  command  : 
Halt^  and  align  his  division  to  the  left ;  the  outer 
files  will  face  to  the  right  and  left.  The  rest  of 
the  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
Nos.  1010  and  following. 

1023.  The  lieutenant-colonel   and  the  senior 
20* 


234   SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PAET  T. 

major,  at  the  command  march^  will  conform  to 
what  is  prescribed  No.  1001. 
0-1024.  The  platoon  columns  will  execute  what 
has  been  prescribed  for  them,  when  forming 
square  from  a  halt.  They  will  move  on  a  run  to 
take  their  places  in  column, 

1025.  If  the  battalion,  before  the  square  is 
formed,  be  in  double  column,  the  two  leading 
companies  will  form  the  first  front,  the  two  rear 
companies  the  fourth ;  the  other  companies  of 
the  right  half  battalion  will  form  the  second,  and 
those  of  the  left  half  battalion  the  third  front. 
0-1026.  If  the  square  is  formed  from  double 
column,  at  the  first  command,  the  platoon  col- 
umns will  be  faced  to  the  left  and  right,  or  by 
the  left  and  right  flanks  respectively,  and  pro- 
ceed to  take  the  positions  prescribed  ISTo.  1002. 

1027.  The  first  and  fourth  fronts  will  be  com- 
manded by  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and  fourth 
divisions;  each  of  the  other  two  by  its  senior 
captain. 

1028.  The  commander  of  each  front  will  plac« 
himself  four  paces  behind  the  centre  of  its  pres- 
ent rear  rank,  and  will  be  replaced  momentarily 
in  the  command  of  his  company  by  the  next  in 
rank  therein. 

1029.  If  the  column  be  at  full  instead  of  half 
distance,  as  has  been  supposed,  the  colonel  will 
first  cause  divisions  to  be  formed,  and  wiU  then 
command : 

1.   To  form  square.     2.   To   half  distance  close 
column.     3.  March  (or  douMe  quich — Maech). 


SCHOOL   OF  THE    BATTALION — PAET   V.      235 

0-1030.  At  the  first  command,  the  platoon  col- 
umns will  be  put  in  march,  and  they  will  take 
the  positions  prescribed  Xo.  1002,  as  soon  as  the 
division  next  to  the  last  has  its  distance. 

1031.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will 
close  to  company  distance,  the  second  division 
taking  its  distance  from  the  rear  rank  of  the  first 
division.   • 

1032.  The  senior  major  will  place  himself  on 
the  right  of  the  column,  abreast  with  the  first 
division.  The  music  will  place  themselves  as 
prescribed  No.  1000. 

1033.  At  the  moment  of  halting  the  fourth 
division,  the  file  closers  will  place  themselves  as 
prescribed  Ko.  1000. 

1034.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colo- 
nel may,  according  to  circumstances,  put  the 
column  in  march,  or  cause  it  to  form  square ;  if 
he  wish  to  do  the  latter,  it  will  be  executed  by 
the  commands  and  means  prescribed  No.  999 
and  following. 

1035.  A  battalion  being  in  column  by  com- 
pany, at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  and  in 
march,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form 
square,  he  will  cause  to  be  executed  what  is  in- 
dicated Nos.  1029  and  1030. 

1036.  At  the  command  march^  the  column  will 
close  to  company  distance,  as  is  prescribed  No. 
332.  When  the  chief  of  the  fourth  division  shall 
command :  Quick,  march,  the  file  closers  of  this 
division  will  place  themselves  before  the  front 
rank. 

1037.  The  senior  major  and  the  music  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  1000. 


236     SCHOOL  of  the  battalion — paet  v. 

1038.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square, 
it  will  be  executed  by  the  commands  indicated 
No.  1019,  and  the  means  prescribed  No.  1020, 
and  following. 

1039.  If  the  column  bj  division,  whether 
double  or  simple,  be  in  mass,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  form  it  into  square,  he  will  first 
cause  it  to  take  company  distance ;  to  this  effect 
he  will  command : 

1.   To  form  square.     2.  By  the  head  of  column^ 
take  half  distance. 

1040.  The  divisions  will  take  half  distance  by 
the  means  indicated  No.  386  and  following. 
"What  is  prescribed  No.  1032  will  be  executed 
as  the  first  and  second  divisions  are  put  in 
motion. 

1041.  The  colonel  wUl  halt  the  column  the 
moment  the  last  division  shall  have  its  distance. 
As  soon  as  the  column  is  halted,  the  dispositions 
indicated  No.  1033  will  be  executed,  and  when 
these  are  completed,  the  colonel  may  proceed  to 
form  square. 

0-1042.  At  the  first  command,  the  platoon  col- 
umns will  be  put  in  march  toward  their  places  in 
column,  and  they  will  take  the  places  prescribed 
No.  1002,  as  soon  as  the  division  next  to  the  last 
has  its  distance. 

1043.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel 
will  also,  in  the  first  place,  cause  company  dis- 
tance to  be  taken  and,  for  this  purpose,  will 
pommand : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PAP.T  V.   237 

1.   To  form  square.     2.  By  the  head  of  column. 
UCke  half  distance.     3.  March. 

1044.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed  Xo.  394  and  following.  What  is  pre- 
scribed No.  1032  will  be  executed  as  the  first 
and  second  divisions  are  put  in  motion. 

1045.  The  colonel  will  proceed  to  form  square 
the  moment  the  last  division  shall  have  its  dis- 
tance ;  and  by  the  commands  indicated  No. 
1019,  and  the  means  prescribed  No.  1020  and 
following. 

0-1046.  The  platoon  columns  wOl  execute  what 
is  prescribed  No.  1024,  and  take  their  places  in 
column  as  soon  as  the  last  division  has  its  dis- 
tance. 

1047.  In  a  simple  column,  left  in  front,  these 
several  movements  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means ;  but 
the  fronts  of  the  square  will  have  the  same  desig- 
nations as  if  the  right  of  the  column  were  in 
front,  that  is,  the  first  division  will  constitute  the 
first  front,  and  thus  of  the  other  subdivisions. 
0-1048.  If  the  left  is  in  front,  the  platoon  col- 
umns will  take  their  places  in  rear  of  the  inner 
platoons  of  the  second  division. 

1049.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  ad- 
vance a  distance  less  than  thirty  paces,  he  will 
command : 

1.  By  {sucIcl)  front,  forward.     2.  Mabch. 

1050.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  advance  be 


238       SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET     V. 

made  by  the  first  front,  the  chief  of  this  front 
will  command : 

1.  First  division^  forward.     2.   Guide  centre. 

1051.  The  chief  of  the  second  front  will  face 
his  front  to  the  left.  The  captains  of  the  com- 
panies composing  this  front  will  place  themselves 
outside,  and  on  the  right  of  their  left  guides,  who 
will  replace  them  in  the  front  rank :  the  chief  of 
the  third  front  will  face  his  front  to  the  right, 
and  the  captains  in  this  front  will  place  them- 
selves outside,  and  on  the  left  of  their  covering 
sergeants;  the  chief  of  the  fourth  front  will  face 
his  front  about,  and  command:  1.  Fourth  di- 
vision^ forward ;  2.  Guide  centre.  The  captain 
who  is  in  the  centre  of  the  first  front,  will  be 
charged  witli  the  direction  of  the  march,  and  will 
regulate  himself  by  the  means  indicated  in  the 
S.  a,  No.  89. 

1052.  At  the  command  march,  the  square  wdU 
put  itself  in  motion ;  the  companies  marching  by 
the  flank  will  be  careful  not  to  lose  their  dis- 
tances. The  chief  of  the  fourth  di\'ision  will 
cause  his  division  to  keep  constantly  closed  on 
the  flanks  of  the  second  and  third  fronts. 

1053.  At  the  first  command,  by  the  colonel, 
the  junior  major  will  command:  1.  Skirmishers 
forward;  2.  Guide  centre.  At  the  command 
march.,  they  will  put  themselves  in  motion, 

1054.  This  movement  will  only  be  executed  in 
quick  time. 

1055.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  him- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION — PART     V.       239 

self  in  rear  of  the  file  of  direction,  in  order  to 
regulate  his  march. 

1056..  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  halt  the 
square,  he  will  command : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt. 

1057.  At  the  second  command,  the  square  will 
halt ;  the  fourth  front  will  face  about  immedi- 
ately, and  without  further  command ;  the  second 
and  third  fronts  will  face  outward ;  the  captains 
of  companies  will  resume  their  places  as  in 
square. 

1058.  In  moving  the  square  forward  by  the 
second,  third,  or  fourth  fronts,  the  same  rules 
will  be  observed. 

0-1059.  If  the  square  is  formed  by  the  fourth 
front,  the  skirmishers,  at  the  first  command  by 
the  colonel,  will  be  faced  about,  if  by  the  second 
front,  they  will  be  faced  to  the  right,  if  by  the 
third  front,  they  will  be  faced  to  the  left. 

1060.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  ad- 
vance a  greater  distance  than  thirty  paces,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Form  column, 

1061.  The  chief  of  the  first  front  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  Firsi  division,  forward.     2.   Gruide  left. 

1062.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  wil^ 


240      SCHOOL    OF   THE    BATTALION — PART   V. 

caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  tlie  commander  of  the 
second  front  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  left,  and 
then  command :  By  compaiiy^  hy  file  left.  The 
commander  of  the  third  front  will  cause  it  to  face 
to  the  right,  and  then  command :  By  company, 
'by  file  right.  At  the  moment  the  second  and 
third  fronts  face  to  the  left  and  right,  each  cap- 
tain will  cause  to  break  to  the  rear  the  three  lead- 
ing files  of  his  company. 

0-1063.  The  skirmishers  will  be  cautioned  by 
the  junior  major  to  stand  fast. 

1064.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the 
colonel  will  command : 

3.  Maech  (or  double  quick — Maech). 

1065.  At  this  command,  the  first  front  will 
march  forward ;  its  chief  will  halt  it  when  it  shall 
have  advanced  a  space  equal  to  half  its  fi'ont,  and 
align  it  by  the  left. 

1066.  The  corresponding  companies  of  the 
second  and  third  fronts  will  wheel  by  file  to  the 
left  and  right,  and  march  to  meet  each  other  be- 
hind the  centre  of  the  first  division,  and  the  mo- 
ment they  unite,  the  captain  of  each  company 
will  halt  his  company  and  face  it  to  the  front. 
The  division  being  re-formed,  its  chief  will  align 
it  by  the  left 

1067.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will 
cause  it  to  face  about :  its  file  closers  will  remain 
before  the  front  rank. 

1068.  The  column  being  thus  re-formed,  the 
colonel  may  put  it  in  march  by  the  commands 
and  means  prescribed  No.  219  and  following; 


Vol.  2         Scliool    of    tlTe   Battalion.-     FIJI. 


Figl. 

rc/i     lif.L 

Fig.Z. 

^  by  reaj- 

r^                                 'i! 

". 

-^              H 

J              u; 

,-' 

^     ^      o      no        o   a    _=  _  =     o-   c 

■'■ 

* 

f      . 

i   ri              H             h  ; 
^----^^-Zirzis—— 

^::::x:^:? 

Colunm   facfil  hv  rear  raalc,  to  niu 
retreat.       Xo.lOlO 

j 

i 
1                          m 

„      =      n      =     1     n      o     c     = 

1 

4-v--;:-it^-:v-?':^ 

;  r-^^-^  ' 

-^               1                 "~- 

:    ^^  '\     : 

r'-  ■■ 

To   f'orno  square  from     column    ftmeci 
rank        Xo.i07^. 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET   V.        241 

the  right  guides  will  preserve  company  distance 
exactly  as  the  directing  guides. 

1069.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form 
square,  he  will  give  the  commands  indicated  No. 
1019. 

1070.  To  cause  the  square  to  march  in  retreat 
a  distance  greater  than  thirty  paces,  the  colonel 
will  first  cause  column  to  he  formed  as  indicated 
No.  1060 ;  and  when  formed,  he  will  cause  it  to 
face  by  the  rear  rank  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  com- 
mand: 

1.    To  march  in  retreat.      2.  Face  hy  the  rea/r 
rank.     3.  Battalion  about — Face. 

0-1071.  At  the  first  command  by  the  colonel,  the 
junior  major  will  command  :  1.  Skirmishers^  out- 
ward/ace  ;  2.  Douhle  quick — March.  At  the 
first  command,  the  first  platoon  column  will  face 
to  the  right,  and  the  second  to  the  left.  At  the 
command  march ^  the  platoon  columns,  conducted 
by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  will  be  filed  around  the 
right  and  left  flanks  respectively  of  the  division, 
marched  to  the  front,  and  filed  around  the  flanks 
of  the  second  division,  facing  to  the  rear,  and 
covering  the  inner  platoons  of  that  division. 

1072.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers 
of  the  interior  divisions  will  place  themselves, 
passing  by  the  outer  flanks  of  their  respective 
companies,  behind  the  front  rank  opposite  to 
their  places  in  line  of  battle ;  the  file  closers  of 
the  other  divisions  will  stand  fast. 

1073.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion 
will  face  about ;  each  chief  o-f  division  will  place 

VOL.  n. — 21 


242      scnooL  of  the  battalion — paet  v. 

himself  before  its  rear  rank,  become  front,  pass- 
ing through  the  interval  between  its  two  com- 
panies ;  the  guides  will  step  into  the  rear  rank, 
now  front. 

1074.  The  column  being  thus  disposed,  the 
colonel  may  put  it  in  march,  or  cause  it  to  form 
square  as  if  it  were  faced  by  the  front  rank.  The 
square  being  formed,  its  fronts  will  preserve  the 
same  designations  they  had  when  faced  by  the 
front  rank. 

1075.  The  battalion  being  in  square  by  the 
rear  rank,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march 
it  in  retreat  or  in  advance,  a  distance  less  than 
thirty  paces,  he  will  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  1049  and  following;  otherwise,  he 
will  re-form  the  column  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  No.  1060,  by  marching,  forward 
the  fourth  front. 

1076.  If  the  square  is  to  be  marched  to  the 
front  a  distance  greater  than  thirty  paces,  the 
colonel  will  face  the  column  by  the  front  rank ; 
to  this  end,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  march  in  advance.     2.  Face  hy  the  front 
rank.     3.  Battalion  ahout — Face. 

1077.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
No.  1072  and  following, 

0-1078.  At  the  first  command  by  the  colonel, 
the  junior  major  will  give  the  commands  indicated 
No,  1071;  the  platoon  columns  will  be  faced 
outward,  and  be  marched  to  their  proper  posi- 
tions in  rear  of  the  division  next  to  the  last,  as 
prescribed  No.  1071. 


SCnOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX — PART   V.       243 

1079.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  advance, 
and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat, 
he  will  command : 

1.  To  march  in  retreat.  ^2.  Battalian  right  ahout. 
3.  Makch  (or  double  quick — March). 

0-1080.  At  the  first  command  by  the  colonel,  the 
junior  major  and  skirmishers  will  execute  what 
is  prescribed  No.  1071 ;  the  gait  will  be  a  double 
quick,  or  a  run,  as  the  command  of  the  colonel 
is,  inarch,  or  double  quick  march. 

1081.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers 
of  the  second  and  third  divisions  will  place 
themselves  rapidly  before  the  front  rank  of  their 
respective  divisions.  At  the  command  march, 
the  column  will  face  about  and  move  off  to  the 
rear ;  the  chiefs  of  divisions  and  the  guides  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No,  1073. 

1082.  If  the  colunm  be  marching  in  retreat, 
and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  ad- 
vance, he  will  command  : 

1.  To  march  in  advance.   2.  Battalion  right  about. 
3.  March  (or  double  quicTc — March). 

0-1083.  At  the  first  command,  the  junior  major 
and  skirmishers  will  execute  what  is  prescribed 
No.  1078.     The  gait  as  indicated  No.  1080. 

1084.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers 
of  the  second  and  third  divisions  will  place 
themselves  before  the  rear  rank  of  their  respect- 
ive divisions ;  at  the  third,  the  column  will  face 
by  the  front  rank. 


244     scnooL  of  the  battalion — paet  v. 

1085.  While  marching,  either  in  advance  or 
retreat,  the  guide  of  the  division  next  to  the 
leading  one,  will  be  careful  to  estimate  his  dis- 
tance from  the  rear  rank  of  the  one  in  front. 

To  reduce  the  square. 

1086.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  break  the  square, 
will  command  : 

1.  Reduce  square.     2.  '}£.iL^cn  {ov  douhle  quick — 
March). 

1087.  This  movement  will  be  executed  in  the 
manner  indicated  No.  1060  and  following;  but 
the  file  closers  of  the  fourth  front  will  place 
themselves  behind  the  rear  rank  the  moment  it 
faces  about ;  the  field  and  staff,  the  color-bearer 
and  music,  will,  at  the  same  time,  return  to 
their  places  in  column. 

0-1088.  At  the  first  command  by  the  colonel, 
the  skirmishers  will  be  faced  to  the  right  bj  the 
junior  major.  Each  chief  of  platoon  and  guide 
will  place  himself  as  prescribed  No.  879.  At 
the  command  march^  the  first  platoon  column, 
after  clearing  the  flank  of  the  division,  will  be 
conducted  diagonally  to  the  front,  and  the  sec- 
ond platoon  column  will  be  conducted  diagonally 
to  the  rear,  to  their  respective  positions  on  the 
flanks  of  the  battalion  column. 

EEMAEKS    OS   THE    RALLYnSTG    OF    SKIBMI8HKR8. 

0-1089.  The  skirmishers  will  be  rallied  on  the 


Vol.2.       School   of   tlie    BattaEoTL.       Pl.32. 


T?^^ 


t 


T 

-4\ 


!    C 


■^% 


4llllllllll!lilllOil!iiillimillllllll!l!iyilliyW!IIIHH 


!li!illlllll!llilllH 


Txg.l 


rig.  2 


«■ ll!lll!limi»!IMIIIIlP 


To  reduce  the.  stjjurre    No-  lOHb' 


SOriOOL    OF   THE    BATTALION PART    V.       245 

battalion  in  column,  ready  for  square,  by  the 
commands  indicated  No.  785.  The  skirmishern 
and  reserves  will  direct  themselves  on  a  run, 
around  the  tlanks  of  the  column,  and  take  tlie 
position  prescribed  No.  1002. 

To  form  square  from  line  of  battle. 

1090.  A  battalion  deployed  may  be  fonned 
into  square,  in  a  direction  either  parallel  or  per- 
pendicular to  the  line  of  battle. 

1091.  In  the  first  case,  the  colonel  will  cause 
the  battalion  to  break  by  division  to  the  rear,  by 
the  right  or  left,  and  then  close  the  colunm  to 
half  distance,  as  indicated  No.  1029  and  following. 

1092.  In  the  second  case,  he  will  ploy  the  bat- 
talion into  simple  column,  by  division  at  half 
distance  in  rear  of  the  right  or  left  division,  or 
into  colunm  doubled  on  the  centre,  or  form 
square  forward  on  the  two  centre  companies. 

1093.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column  upon 
one  of  the  flank  divisions,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Column  at  half  distance 
hy  duision.  3.  On  the  first  {or  fourth)  divis- 
ion. 4.  Battalion  right  (or  left) — Face.  5. 
Makch  (or  double  quick — March). 

1094.  This  movement  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  princii)les  prescribed  No.  159  and  fol- 
lowing ;  the  division  next  to  the  leading  one 
taking  its  distance  from  the  rear  rank  of  the  one 
in  front. 

21* 


24:6        SCHOOL    OF   TnE    BATTALION PAET    V. 

0-1095.  At  the  third  and  fourth  commands,  the 
companies  of  skirmishers  will  execute  what  is 
prescribed  Nos.  161  and  164.  Each  second  pla- 
toon will  ploy  in  rear  of  its  first.  At  the  com- 
mand march^  the  first  platoon  column,  if  the 
ployment  is  on  the  first  division,  will  march 
straight-forward,  a  platoon  distance ;  the  column 
will  then  be  faced  by  the  right  flank,  by  its 
chief,  and  on  arriving  opposite  its  place  in  the 
battalion  column,  it  will  be  faced  again  by  the 
right  flank,  and  take  its  proper  position  in  rear 
of  the  division  next  to  the  last.  The  second  pla- 
toon column  will  be  marched  diagonally  to  the 
rear,  and  be  established  in  its  proper  position  on 
the  left  of  the  first. 

1096.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  line  of 
battle,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square 
in  a  direction  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle, 
he  will  command : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  On  the  first  (or  fourth) 
dkisioji,  form  column.  3.  Battalion  ly  the 
right  (or  left)  fianl\  4.  Makch  (or  double 
qttick — Maech). 

1097.  This  movement  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  principle  prescribed  for  ploying  a  col- 
umn by  division  at  half  distance.  No.  201.  The 
chief  of  the  first  division  will  halt  his  division 
at  the  command  march. 

0-1098.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  exe- 
cute this  movement  as  if  from  a  halt,  observing 
what  follows.  At  the  command  march^  the 
companies  will  face  by  the  right  flank,  and  each 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PART  Y.   347 

second  platoon  will  take  the  double  quick  step 
or  run,  according  to  the  gait  of  the  battalion 
companies,  in  order  to  ploy  in  rear  of  its  first 
platoon. 

1099-  If  the  colonel  should  command,  prepare 
for  square,  instead  of  to  form  square,  the  chief 
of  the  leading  subdivision  will  command  quicli: 
time,  and  at  the  command  march,  bv  the  colonel, 
the  leading  subdivision  will  march  in  quick  time. 

UOO.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  double  col- 
umn, the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Double  column  at  half 
distance.  3.  Battalion  inward — Face.  4. 
Maech  (or  double  quick — March). 

UOl.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed No.  876  and  following. 
0-1102.  At  the  second  and  third  commands,  the 
companies  of  skirmishers  will  execute  what  is 
prescribed  Nos.  877  and  879.  At  the  command 
march,  the  columns  will  be  conducted  to  posi- 
tions prescribed  No.  1002. 

1103.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it 
into  double  column  to  form  square,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Form  double  column.  3. 
Battalion  by  the  right  and  left  Jianka,  4. 
Haech  (or  double  quick — Maech). 

1104.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed No.  890.  The  chief  of  the  leading  di- 
vision  will   halt  his  division  at  the   command 


248        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PABT  V. 

march^  or  command  quich  time  as  indicated  No. 

1099. 

0-1105.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  exe- 

cnte  this  movement,  as  if  from  a  halt,  observing 

what  is  prescribed  No.  1098. 

1106.  To  form  square,  forward  on  the  centre 
companies,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Forward  on  the  centre^  form  square.  2.  Bat- 
talion.^ inward  face.  3.  March  (or  doubU 
quich — Maech). 

1107.  At  the  first  command,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  hasten  to  the  front,  and  place  three 
markers,  at  division  or  company  distance  from 
the  line,  according  as  the  battalion  companies 
are  in  number,  eight  or  six  ;  the  first  marker  op- 
posite the  right  file  of  the  right  centre  company, 
the  second  opposite  one  of  the  three  left  files 
of  the  left  centre  company,  the  third,  opposite 
one  of  the  three  left  files  of  the  right  centre 
company.  Each  captain  will  place  himself,  two 
paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company,  the 
captains  of  the  two  centre  companies  will  cau- 
tion them  to  remain  faced  to  the  front,  the  others 
of  the  right  wing  will  caution  their  companies 
to  face  to  the  left,  and  the  others  of  the  left 
wing,  to  the  right. 

1108.  The  music,  in  two  ranks,  will  place 
itself  at  platoon  distance  behind  the  inner  pla- 
toons of  the  two  centre  companies,  the  color- 
bearer  will  step  back  into  the  line  of  file  closers, 
opposite  his  place  in  line  of  battle,  and  will  be 


Pol.  2. 


Sckool   of  the    BattalioTi. 


ii: 


PI. 


:  I 


tr 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PAKT    V.         249 

replaced  as  indicated  l^o.  1005.     The  covering 
sergeants  Trill  step  into -the  front  rank. 
0-1109.  At  the  same  command,  the  chiefs  of  the 
platoon  columns  will  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  877. 

1110.  At  the  second  command,  the  two  centre 
companies  will  remain  faced  to  the  front ;  the 
others  of  the  right  wing  will  face  to  the  left, 
and  the  others  of  the  left  wing  will  face  to  the 
right.  Those  captains  whose  companies  have 
faced  will  hasten  to  the  left  and  right  of  their 
companies  respectively,  and  place  themselves  as 
prescribed  Nos.  806  and  809.  The  captains  of 
the  companies  next  to  the  right  and  left  centre 
companies,  will  caution  them  that  they  will 
wheel  by  file  to  the  right  and  left  respectively ; 
each  of  the  other  captains  whose  company  has 
faced,  with  the  exception  of  those  on  the  right 
and  left  flanks,  will  caution  his  company  to  fol- 
low in  the  trace  of  its  leading  file. 

nil.  The  captains  of  the  right  and  left  com- 
panies will  tnution  them  to  move  straight-for- 
ward ;  their  file  closers  will  move  around  their 
right  and  left  flanks,  respectively,  and  place 
themselves  in  front  of  the  front  rank,  opposite 
their  places  in  line  of  battle.  The  senior  cap- 
tain of  the  two  centre  companies  will  place 
himself  before  the  centre  of  his  division,  and 
caution  it  that  it  will  have  to  move  to  the  front ; 
the  junior  captain  will  place  himself  as  indicated 
Ko.  880. 

0-1112.  At  the  same  command,  the  platoon  col- 
umns will  execute  what  is  prescribed  Xo.  879. 

1113.  At  the  command  raarch^  rapidly  repeated 


950      SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION PAET    V. 

by  all  the  captains,  the  chief  of  the  first  divi«on 
will  command :  Guide  rights  and  the  right  guide 
will  SO  direct  his  march,  that  the  breast  of  the 
front-rank  man  of  the  right  file  will  come  in 
contact  with  the  elbow  of  the  right  marker. 
The  left  guide,  of  the  left  centre  company,  will 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  his  company,  and  the 
left  guide  of  the  company  on  the  right  of  the 
right  centre  company,  will  place  himself  in  -the 
front  rank,  on  the  left  flank  of  his  company,  as 
soon  as  able  to  pass. 

1114.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself 
in  a  position  to  face  the  left  guide  of  the  division, 
when  he  arrives  in  the  line,  and  the  senior  major 
will  in  like  manner  face  the  right  guide.  The 
captain  of  the  company  next  to  the  right  of  the 
centre  division,  will  so  conduct  it,  that  his  left 
guide  will  follow  in  the  trace  of  the  right  file 
of  the  division,  and  the  right  guide  of  the  com- 
pany next  to  the  left  of  the  centre  division,  will 
in  like  manner  follow  in  the  trace  of  the  left  file 
of  the  division.  The  captains  of  the  first  and 
last  companies  will  conduct  their  companies 
straight-forward. 

1115.  When  the  centre  division  has  arrived 
near  the  markers  in  front,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  Battalion^  ty  the^ight  and  left  Jiank^. 
2.  Halt. 

1116.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  division 
will  halt,  and  be  dressed  to  the  right  by  its  chief; 
its  right  file  will  face  to  the  right,  and  its  left 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    V.       251 

file  to  the  left ;  the  file  closers  will  close  one 
pace  on  the  rear  rank.  The  companies  which 
have  wheeled  by  file  to  the  right,  will  face  by 
the  right  flank,  their  right  guides,  at  the  same 
time,  stepping  out  before  the  right  files  of  their 
respective  companies,  facing  to  the  left,  and  cov- 
ering the  right  guide  of  the  first  division.  They 
will  be  assured  in  this  position  by  the  senior 
major.  The  companies  which  have  wheeled  by 
file  to  the  left,  will  face  by  the  left  flank,  their 
left  guides  stepping  out  at  the  same  time  before 
the  left  files  of  their  respective  companies,  facing 
to  the  right,  and  covering  the  left  guide  of  the 
first  division.  They  will  be  assured  in  this  posi- 
tion, by  the  lieutenant-colonel.  The  file-closers 
of  the  second  and  third  fronts,  will  close  up  one 
pace  on  the  rear  rank. 

1117.  The  captains  of  the  first  and  last  com- 
panies, at  the  first  command,  will  caution  them 
to  continue  the  march.  At  the  command  halt, 
the  captains  will  halt  in  their  own  persons  and 
see  their  companies  file  past,  and  when  nearly 
united,  the  captain  of  the  first  company  will 
command:  1.  First  company^  ly  the  left  flmik. 
2.  Halt.  The  left  guide  passing  into  the  rank 
of  file  closers  just  before  the  union ;  the  cap- 
tain of  the  last  company  will  command:  1.  Such 
company,  hy  the  right  JianTc.     2.  Halt. 

1118.  The  fourth  division  will  be  aligned  by 
the  rear  rank,  and  by  the  means  prescribed  ISo. 
1011  ;  the  junior  captain  and  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  left  company,  will  place  themselves 
as  indicated  in  the  paragraph  just  named.  The 
file  closers,  will  at  the  same  time,  close  up  one 


252       SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    V. 

pace  on  the  rear  rank,  and  the  outer  files  on  each 
flank  of  the  division,  will  face  outward. 
0-1119.  At  the  command  march  bv  the  colonel, 
each  platoon  column  will  be  conducted  by  its 
chief,  diagonally  to  the  front,  in  double  quick 
time,  or  the  run,  as  the  gait  of  the  battalion  may 
be  quick,  or  double  quick  time.  The  platoon  col- 
umns will  take  a  position  in  rear  of  the  inner 
platoons  of  the  first  front  of  the  square,  and  at 
the  distance  of  the  front  of  a  company,  plus 
four  paces. 

1120.  The  junior  major  will  place  himself  as 
indicated  No.'lOOS. 

1121.  The  square  being  formed,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

Guides — Posts. 

1122.  At  this,  the  dispositions  will  be  made, 
as  prescribed  No.  1014  and  following. 

1123.  The  battalion  marching  in  line,  and  the 
colonel  wishing  to  form  square  on  the  centre, 
will  command : 

1.  Forward  on  the  centre  form  square.  2.  Bat- 
talion.^ ly  the  right  and  left  flanlcs.  3.  Maech 
(or  double  quiclc — Maech). 

1124.  This  movement  will  be  executed  by  the 
commands  and  means  prescribed  for  forming 
«quare  from  a  halt,  observing  what  follows.  At 
the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  two  cen- 
tre companies  aviU  caution  their  companies  to 
continue  the  march  to  the  front.  The  color  rank, 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.   253 

and  general  guides  will  take  their  places  in  the 
ranks,  and  the  color-bearer  will  take  his  place 
as  indicated  No.  1005. 

0-1125.  At  the  first  command,  by  the  colonel, 
the  companies  of  skirmishers  will  execute  what 
is  prescribed  No.  891.  At  the  command  march, 
they  will  be  faced  by  the  left  and  right  flanks 
respectively,  and  conducted  to  the  position  pre- 
scribed No.  1119. 

Squares  in  four  ranks. 

1126.  If  the  square  formed  in  two  ranks,  ac- 
cording to  the  preceding  rules,  should  not  be 
deemed  sufficiently  strong,  the  colonel  may  cause 
the  square  to  be  formed  in  four  ranks. 

1127.  The  battalion  being  in  column  by  com- 
pany at  half  or  full  distance,  right  in  front,  and 
at  a'  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form 
square  in  four  ranks,  he  will  first  cause  divisions 
to  be  formed,  w^hich  being  executed,  he  will 
command : 

1.  To  form  sqicare  in  four  ranJcs.  2.  To  half 
distance,  close  column.  3.  Maech  (or  double 
quick — Maech). 

1128.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  caution  the  right  company  to 
face  to  the  left,  and  the  left  company  to  face  to 
the  right.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will 
caution  their  divisions  to  move  forward. 
0-1129.  At  the  same  command,  the  platoon  col- 
umns will  execute  what  is  prescribed  No.  1002, 

VOL.  n.— 22 


254      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    Y. 

observing  what  follows.  The  chief  of  the  first 
platoon  column,  the  moment  it  has  its  place  in 
rear  of  the  division  next  to  the  last,  will  break 
to  the  rear  three  files  from  the  right  flank  of 
each  platoon,  and  the  chief  of  the  second  pla- 
toon column  will  do  the  same  from  the  left  flank 
of  each  platoon  of  his  column.  At  the  com- 
mand march^  for  the  formation  of  the  square, 
the  skirmishers  will  move  forward  a  platoon  dis- 
tance. 

1130.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  com- 
pany of  the  first  division  will  form  into  four  ranks 
on  its  left  file,  and  the  left  company  into  four 
ranks  on  its  right  file.  The  formation  ended,  the 
chief  of  this  division  will  align  it  by  the  left. 

1131.  The  other  divisions  will  move  forward 
and  double  their  files  marching  ;  the  right  com- 
pany of  each  division  will  double  on  its  left  file, 
and  the  left  company  on  its  right  file.  The  for- 
mation completed,  each  chief  of  division  will 
command :  Guide  left.  Each  chief  will  halt  his 
division  when  it  shall  have  the  distance  of  a  com- 
pany front  in  four  ranks  from  the  preceding  one, 
the  chief  of  the  second  division,  counting  from 
the  rear  rank  of  the  one  in  front,  and  will  align 
his  division  by  the  left.  At  the  instant  the 
fourth  division  is  halted,  the  file  closers  will  move 
rapidly  before  its  front  rank. 

1132.  The  colonel  will  form  square,  re-form  col- 
umn, and  reduce  square  in  four  ranks,  by  the 
same  commands  and  means  as  prescribed  for  a 
battalion  in  two  ranks. 

1133.  If  the  square  formed  in  four  ranks  be  re- 
duced and  at  a  halt,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 


SCHOOL   OF    THE    BATTALION PART    V.       256 

form  the  battalion  into  two  ranks,  lie  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  In   two  ramies  undouble  files.     2.  Battalion 
outward — Face.      3.   Makch. 

1134.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will 
step  before  the  centres  of  their  respective  com- 
panies, and  those  on  the  right  will  caution  them 
to  face  to  the  right,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face 
to  the  left. 

1135.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion 
will  face  to  the  right  and  left. 

1136.  At  the  command  march,  each  company 
will  undouble  its  files  and  re-form  into  two  ranks, 
as  indicated  in  the  S.  (7.,  No.  387  and  following. 
Each  captain  will  halt  his  company  and  face  it  to 
the  front.  The  formation  completed,  each  chief 
of  division  will  align  his  division  by  the  left. 

1137.  At  the  same  command,  the  files  which 
are  broken  to  the  rear  from  the  platoon  columns, 
will  be  brought  into  line  by  their  respective 
chiefs. 

1138.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  with  divis- 
ions formed  in  four  ranks,  and  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  re-form  them  into  two  ranks,  he  will 
command : 

1.   Guide  centre.     2.  In  two  ranks,  undouble  files. 
3.  March. 

1139.  The  captain,  placed  in  the  centre  of  each 
division,  will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the 
front,  as  will  also  the  left  file  of  the  right  com- 


256       flCIIOOL    OF    THE    BATTALlOJf PAET    T. 

pany,  and  the  riglit  file  of  the  left  company. 
Each  company  will  then  be  re-formed  into  two 
ranks,  as  prescribed  in  the  S.  C. 

1140.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  two 
ranks,  the  colonel  will  command :  Guide  left  (or 
right). 

1141.  The  battalion  being  in  line,  to  form  square 
in  four  ranks  on  one  of  the  flank  divisions,  the 
colonel  will  command : 

1.  To  form  square^  in  four  ranks.  2.  Column  at 
half  distance,  hy  division.  3,  On  the  first  (or 
fourth)  division.  4.  Battalion,  right  (or  left) 
— ^Fack.     5.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

1142.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of 
division  will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of 
his  division,  and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right. 

1143.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  right  guide 
of  the  first  division  will  remain  faced  to  the  front, 
the  battalion  will  face  to  the  right. 

1144.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of 
four  men  of  the  first  division  will  face  to  the  front, 
remaining  doubled.  All  the  other  files  of  four 
men  will  step  off  together,  and  each  in  succession 
will  close  up  to  its  proper  distance  on  the  file  pre- 
ceding it,  and  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled. 
When  the  last  file  shall  have  closed,  the  chief  of 
division  will  command  :  Left — Dress. 

1145.  The  other  divisions  will  ploy  into  column 
in  the  same  manner  as  with  a  battalion  in  two 
ranks,  observing  what  follows;  the  chiefs  of 
division,  instead  of  allowing  their  divisions  to  file 
past  them  on  entering  the  column,  will  continue 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIOX PAET  V.   257 

to  lead  them,  and  as  each  division  shall  arrive  on 
a  line  with  the  right  guide  of  the  first  division, 
its  chief  will  halt  the  right  guide,  who  will  im- 
mediately face  to  the  front ;  the  first  file  of  four 
men  will  also  halt  at  the  same  time  and  face  tc 
the  front,  remaining  doubled.  The  second  file 
will  close  on  the  first,  and  when  closed,  halt,  and 
face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  All  the 
other  files  will  execute  successively  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  second.  When  the  last 
file  shall  have  closed,  the  chief  of  division  will 
command  :  Left — Dress. 

0-1146.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  execute 
what  is  prescribed  ]S'o.  1095,  taking  care  to  break 
files  to  the  rear,  as  indicated  No.  1129. 

1147.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranTcs.  2.  On  the 
first  dicisio-n,  form  column.  3.  Battalion,  hy 
the  right  fianlc.  4.  Maech  (or  double  quick — 
Maech). 

1148.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of 
division  will  step  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his 
division  and  caution  it  to  face  by  the  right  flank. 
The  chief  of  the  first  division  will  caution  his 
covering  sergeant  to  halt,  and  remain  faced  to  the 
front. 

1149.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion 
will  face  to  the  right ;  the  covering  sergeant  of 
the  first  division  will  halt  and  remain  faced  to  the 
front,  the  first  division  will  then  form  into  four 
ranks  as  heretofore  prescribed.    The  other  divis- 

22* 


258       SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    T. 

ions  will  ploy  into  column  in  the  same  manner 
as  if  the  movement  had  taken  place  from  a  halt. 
0-1150.  The  companies  of  skirmishers,  Avill  exe- 
cute what  is  prescribed  Xo.  1098,  taking  care  to 
break  files  to  the  rear,  as  indicated  No.  1129. 

1151.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  a  per- 
pendicular square  in  four  ranks,  by  double  column, 
he  will  command : 

1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  Double 
column^  at  half  distance.  3.  Battalion  inward 
— Face.    4.  Makch  (or  double  quick — March). 

1152.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of 
companies  will  place  themselves  before  the  centres 
of  their  respective  companies,  and  caution  those 
on  the  right  to  face  to  the  left,  and  those  on  the 
left  to  face  to  the  right.  The  captain  of  the  fifth 
company  will  caution  his  covering  sergeant  to 
stand  fast. 

1153.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will 
face  to  the  left  and  right ;  at  the  command  march^ 
the  left  file  of  the  fourth,  and  the  right  file  of  the 
fifth  company,  will  face  to  the  front,  remaining 
doubled.  The  fourth  company  will  close  succes- 
sively by  file  of  fours  on  the  left  file,  and  the  fifth 
company,  in  like  manner,  on  the  right  file  ;  the 
files  will  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled. 
The  formation  completed,  the  chief  of  division 
will  command  :  Rigid  dress.  The  junior  captain 
will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two 
companies. 

1154.  The  other  companies  will  close  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  double  column  in  two  ranks,  ob- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    V.       259 

serving  what  follows  :  each  captain  will  halt  the 
leading  guide  of  his  company  tlie  moment  the 
head  of  his  company  arrives  on  a  line  with  the 
centre  of  the  column.  In  the  right  companies, 
the  left  guides  will  step  into  the  line  of  file  closers, 
and  the  left  file  of  four  men  v/ill  face  immediately 
to  the  front,  remaining  doubled,  and  by  the  side 
of  the  right  guide  of  the  left  company.  The  com- 
panies will  each  form  into  four  ranks,  as  pre- 
scribed No.  1144,  the  right  companies  on  the  left 
file,  and  the  left  companies  on  the  right  file.  The 
formation  completed,  the  junior  captain  will  place 
himself  between  the  two  companies,  and  the 
senior  will  command :  Right  dress. 
0-1155.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  exe- 
cute what  is  prescribed  No.  1102,  breaking  filey 
to  the  rear  as  indicated  No.  1129. 

115S.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.  To  form  square^  in  four  rariks.  2.  Form 
double  column.  2.  Battalion  hy  the  right  and 
left  fianTcs.  4.  Maech  (or  double  quick — 
Maech). 

1157.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains 
will  place  themselves  before  the  centres  of  their 
respective  companies,  and  those  on  the  right  will 
caution  them  to  face  by  the  left  flank,  and  those 
on  the  left  to  face  by  the  right  flank ;  the  captain 
of  the  fifth  company  will  caution  his  covering 
sergeant  to  halt,  and  remain  faced  to  the  front. 

1158.  At  the  command  march,  tlie  fourth  and 
fifth  companies  will  halt.    The  battalion  will  face 


260       SCHOOL    OF  THE   BATTALION PAET    V. 

to  the  left  and  right ;  the  covering  sergeant  of  the> 
fifth  company  will  halt  and  remain  faced  to  the 
front,  the  movement  will  then  be  executed  as  if 
the  battalion  was  at  a  halt. 

0-1159.  The  companies  of  skirmishers,  will  exe- 
cute what  is  prescribed  No.  1105. 

1160.  The  battalion  being  deployed,  to  form 
square  in  four  ranks,  forward  on  the  centre,  the 
colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Forward  on  the  centre^  in  four  ranhs^form. 
square.  2.  Battalion  inward  fa^e.  3.  March 
(or  douhle  quick — March). 

1161.  This  movement  will  be  executed  by  the 
commands  and  means  prescribed  for  the  two- 
rank  formation,  observing  what  follows.  At  the 
command  march.,  the  centre  division  will  form  in 
four  ranks,  as  prescribed  No.  1130.  The  com- 
panies of  the  right  and  left  wings,  which  wheel 
by  file  to  the  left  and  right,  to  form  the  second 
and  third  fronts  of  the  square,  will  respectively, 
before  wheeling,  march  straight-forward  a  dis- 
tance equal  to  the  front  of  a  platoon. 

0-1162.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  exe- 
cute what  is  prescribed  for  them  in  the  two-rank 
formation,  taking  care  to  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed  No.  1129. 

1163.  The  battalion  marching  in  line,  to  form 
square,  forward  on  the  centre,  in  four  ranks. 
The  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Forward  on  the  centre.^  in  four  ranhsy  form 


261 


y  the 
ation 
t  the 
entre 
con- 
naand 
ribed 

con- 

neral 
their 


attle, 
)hqu© 


Jirst 


nant- 
divis- 
him- 
ision, 
5  the 
,velve 
igain, 
arker 


ScllOol     of      tllH     BrtltHHoil. 


\J: 


c 


SOnOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET   T.        261 

square.      2.    Battalion  hy   the  right  and  left 
JianTcs.    3.  }1arck  (or  double-quick — Maech). 

1164.  This  movement  will  be  executed  by  the 
commands  and  means  prescribed  for  the  formation 
from  a  halt,  observing  what  follows.  At  the 
first  command,  the  captains  of  the  two  centre 
companies  will  caution  their  companies,  to  con- 
tinue the  march  to  the  front,  and  at  the  command 
march,  they  will  form  in  four  ranks,  as  prescribed 
No.  1131. 

1165.  The  companies  of  skirmishers  will  con- 
form to  what  is  prescribed  ISTo.  1125. 

1166.  The  color-bearer,  color  rank,  and  general 
guides,  at  the  command  march,  will  take  their 
places  as  prescribed  Xo.  1005. 

Oblique  squares. 

1167.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  the  oblique 
square,  he  will  command : 

1.   To  form  oblique   square.      2.    On    the  first 
division  form  column. 

116S.  At  the  second  command,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  trace  the  alignment  of  the  first  divis- 
ion in  the  following  manner :  he  will  place  him- 
self before  and  near  the  right  file  of  this  division, 
face  to  the  left,  march  twelve  paces  along  the 
front  rank,  halt,  face  to  the  right,  march  twelve 
paces  perpendicularly  to  the  front,  halt  again, 
face  to  the  right,  and  immediately  place  a  marker 


262        SCHOOL    OF   THE   BATTALION PART   T. 

at  this  point.  The  covering  sergeant  of  the  right 
company  will  step,  at  the  same  time,  before  its 
right  file,  face  to  the  left,  and  conform  the  line 
of  his  shoulders  to  that  of  the  shoulders  of  the 
marker  established  by  the  lieutenant- colonel. 
These  two  markers  being  established,  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel will  place  a  third  marker  on  the 
same  alignment,  at  the  point  where  the  left  of 
the  division  will  halt. 

11G9-  The  chiefs  of  division  will  place  them- 
selves in  front  of  the  centres  of  their  divisions ; 
the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  immediately 
establish  it  by  a  wheel  to  the  right  on  a  fixed 
pivot,  against  the  markers,  and  align  it  by  the 
left.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will  caution 
them  to  face  to  the  right.  The  colonel  will  then 
command : 

3.  Battalion  riglit — Face.     4.  Makcu  {or  double 
quicTc — Maecii). 

1170.  The  three  rear  divisions  will  direct  their 
march  so  as  to  place  themselves  at  half  distance 
from  each  other,  and  in  the  rear  of  the  first 
division,  as  previously  indicated,  observing  what 
follows : 

1171.  The  chief  of  the  second  division,  instead 
of  breaking  the  headmost  files  to  the  rear,  will 
break  them  to  the  front,  and  at  the  command 
march^  will  conduct  his  division  toward  the 
point  of  entrance  in  the  column.  Arrived  at 
this  point,  he  will  halt  in  his  own  person,  cause 
his  division  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  right,  instruct- 
ing the  right  guide  to  direct  himself  parallelly  to 


Fol.  2. 

I 


Scliool    of    Hie    T3attaIioii.  Pi. 35. 


-^^ 


If  TO.  2 


2^o  f'orjn  ohtiq^ue  square . 
Change  dz.rr^ti4m  l>j^  tTve  r-ight 
flanJc        No.  1174. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIOX PAP.T  Y.    263 

the  first  division ;  and  as  soon  as  the  left  file  has 
passed,  its  chief  will  halt  the  division,  and  align 
it  bj  the  left.  The  other  divisions  will  break  to 
the  rear,  but  slightly ;  each  will  enter  the  column 
as  prescribed  for  the  second,  and  the  moment  the 
battalion  is  ployed  into  column,  the  colonel  Avill 
cause  it  to  form  square. 

1172-  The  formation  of  a  battalion  into  oblique 
square  on  the  left  division,  will  bo  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

1173.  Should  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the 
colonel  will  first  cause  it  to  halt. 

1174.  In  the  preceding  example,  the  battalion 
was  supposed  to  be  deployed ;  but  if  it  be  already 
formed  in  column,  the  desired  obliquity  will  be 
established  by  causing  it  to  change  direction  by 
the  flank  ;  to  this  end,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.   To  form  oblique  square.     2.    Change  direction 
ly  the  right  (or  left)  fianlc. 

1175.  At  the  second  command,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  trace  the  new  direction  in  the  foUov/- 
ing  manner ;  he  will  place  before  the  right  and 
left  files  of  the  headmost  division,  two  markers, 
and  a  third  on  the  prolongation  of  the  first  two, 
on  the  side  of  the  change  of  direction,  and  at 
twelve  paces  from  the  fiank  of  the  column.  He 
will  then  place  himself  before  the  third  marker, 
march  twelve  paces  perpendicularly  to  the  front, 
halt,  and  finish  tracing  the  new  direction  in  tho 
manner  indicated,  No.  11G8. 

1176.  The  colonel  will  then  command: 


264      SCHOOL    OF   THE    BATTALION^ PAET    V. 

3.  Battalion  right  (or  left) — Face.      4.  March 
(or  double  quick — AIaech). 

1177.  The  change  of  direction  having  been 
executed,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  square  to  be 
formed. 

1178.  Should  the  column  be  in  march,  the 
colonel  will  first  cause  it  to  halt. 

1179.  01)li(iuo  squares  in  four  ranks,  will  be 
executed  by  the  same  means,  and  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  for  the  formation  of 
squares  in  four  ranks. 

1180.  Whether  the  battalion  be  ployed  into 
simple  or  double  column,  the  particular  disposi- 
tions for  the  formation  of  the  square  Avill  be 
executed  as  prescribed  ISTo.  1000  and  following. 
Wlien  the  division  which  is  to  form  the  rear  of 
the  column,  is  aligned,  the  senior  major  will  rec- 
tify the  position  of  the  guides  on  the  side  of  the 
column  opposite  the  direction. 

0-1131.  In  the  formation  of  oblique  squares, 
either  from  line  or  column,  the  companies  of 
skirmishers  will  conform  to  the  principles  Avhich 
have  been  prescribed  in  the  formation  of  perpen- 
dicular squares,  observing  what  follows.  When 
the  square  is  formed  from  column,  the  platoon 
columns  will  ta]:e  the  position  indicated  No.  1002^ 
at  the  command  march,  given  by  the  colonel,  for 
the  battalion  column  to  change  direction  by  a  flank. 

EEMAEK3    O^'    THE    FOEMATIOX     OF     8QFAEES     AND 
THE    EALLTIXG  OF  SKIEMISHEES. 

1182.    In.  all  formations  of  sanares  from  col- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.       265 

umns  composed  of  but  six  companies,  the  music 
will  place  itself  one  pace  in  rear  of  the  file  closers 
of  the  second  division.  If  the  square  is  formed 
forward  on  the  centre  from  line,  the  music  will 
take  place  one  pace  in  rear  of  the  file  closers  of 
the  first  division. 

1183.  It  is  a  general  principle  that  a  column 
by  company,  which  is  to  be  formed  into  square, 
will  first  form  divisions,  and  close  to  half  distance. 
Nevertheless,  if  it  find  itself  suddenly  threatened 
by  cavalry  without  sufficient  time  to  form  divis- 
ions, the  colonel  will  cause  the  column  to  close 
to  platoon  distance,  and  then  form  square  by  the 
commands  and  means  which  have  been  indicated ; 
the  leading  and  rearmost  companies  will  conform 
themselves  to  what  has  been  prescribed  for  divis- 
ions in  those  positions.  The  other  companies 
will  form  by  platoon  to  the  right  and  left  into 
line  of  battle,  and  each  chief  of  platoon,  after 
having  halted  it,  will  place  himself  on  the  line, 
as  if  the  platoon  were  a  company,  and  he  wiU  be 
covered  by  the  guide  in  the  rear  rank. 
0-1134.  At  the  first  command  for  forming  square, 
the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  column  will  deploy 
it  on  his  first  platoon  ;  he  will  then  face  his  com- 
pany to  the  left  or  right,  as  the  right  or  left  may 
be  in  front,  and  taking  the  double  quick  step, 
will  establish  liis  company,  at  platoon  distance, 
in  front  or  rear  of  the  first  battalion  company. 
The  second  company  of  skirmishers,  will  take  a 
position  in  rear  or  front,  of  the  last  battalion 
company,  by  the  same  means.  The  junior  major 
will  take  [)ost  in  the  centre  of  the  square.    When 

VOL.  n.— 23 


266       SCHOOL    OF    TUB    BATTALION — PAET    Y. 

the  square  is  reduced,  the  companies  of  skirmish- 
ers will  resume  their  proper  positions. 

1185.  A  battalion  in  column  at  full  distance, 
having  to  form  a  square,  will  always  close  on  the 
leading  subdivision ;  and  a  column  closed  in  mass, 
will  always,  for  the  same  purpose,  take  distances 
by  the  head.  In  either  case,  the  second  sub- 
division should  be  careful,  in  taking  its  distance, 
to  reckon  from  the  rear  rank  of  the  subdivision 
in  front  of  it. 

1183.  If  a  column  by  company  should  be  re- 
quired to  form  S(;[uare  in  four  ranks,  the  doubling 
of  files  will  always  take  place  on  the  file  next 
the  guide. 

0-1187.  In  this  case,  the  companies  of  skirmishers 
after  filing  into  the  column,  will  close  up,  and 
face  to  the  front  without  undoubling. 

1188.  When  a  column,  disposed  to  form  square, 
shall  be  in  march,  it  will  change  direction  as  a 
column  at  half  distance;  thus,  having  to  execute 
this  movement,  the  column  will  take  the  guide 
on  the  side  opposite  to  that  to  which  the  change 
of  direction  is  to  be  made,  if  that  be  not  already 
the  side  of  the  guide. 

1189.  A  column  doubled  on  the  centre  at  com- 
pany distance  or  closed  in  mass,  may  be  formed 
into  square  according  to  the  same  principles  as  a 
simple  column. 

1190.  When  a  battalion  is  ployed,  with  a  view 
to  the  square,  it  will  always  be  in  rear  of  the 
right  or  left  division,  in  order  that  it  may  be  able 
to  commence  firing,  pending  the  execution  of  the 
movement.  The  double  column,  also,  afi"ords  this 
advantage,  and  being  more  promptly  formed  than 


SCnOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PAET  Y.   267 

any  other,  it  will  habitually  be  employed,  unless 
particular  circumstances  cause  a  different  forma- 
tion to  be  preferred. 

1191.  A  battalion,  in  square,  will  never  use  any 
other  than  the  fire  by  file,  and  by  rank;  the  color 
being  in  the  line  of  file  closers,  its  guard  will  not 
fall  back  as  prescribed  No.  47 ;  it  will  fire  like 
the  men  of  the  company  of  which  it  forms  a  part. 

1192.  If  the  square  be  formed  in  four  ranks, 
the  first  two  ranks  will  alone  execute  the  firings 
prescribed  above;  the  other  two  ranks  will  re- 
main cither  at  shoulder  or  support  arms. 

1193.  The  formation  of  the  square  being  often 
necessary  in  war,  and  being  the  most  complicated 
of  the  manoeuvres,  it  will  be  as  frequently  re- 
peated as  the  supposed  necessity  may  require,  in 
order  to  render  its  mechanism  familiar  to  both 
officers  and  men. 

1194.  In  the  execution  of  this  manoeuvre,  the 
colonel  will  carefully  obser^'e  that  the  divers 
movements  which  it  involves  succeed  each  other 
without  loss  of  time,  but  also  without  confusion ; 
for,  if  the  rapidity  of  cavalry  movements  requires 
the  greatest  promptitude  in  the  formation  of 
squares,  so,  on  the  other  hand,  precipitancy  al- 
ways results  in  disorder,  and  in  no  circumstance 
is  disorder  more  to  be  avoided. 

1195.  If  the  battalion  is  formed  in  square  when 
skirmishers  are  rallied,  the  platoons  and  sections 
will  be  directed  by  their  respective  chiefs,  in  rear 
of  the  square,  which  will  be  opened  at  the  angles 
to  receive  them. 

1196.  If  circumstances  should  prevent  the  an- 
gles of  the  square  from  being  opened,  the  skir- 


268      SCHOOL    OF    TOE    BATTALION — PAET    T. 

mishers  will  throw  themselves  at  the  feet  of  the 
frout-rank  men,  the  right  knee  on  the  ground, 
the  butt  of  the  piece  resting  on  the  thigh,  the 
bayonets  in  a  threatening  position.  A  part  may 
dispose  themselves  about  the  angles,  where  they 
can  render  good  service  by  defending  the  sectors 
without  lire.  The  first  company  of  skirmishers 
will  be  attached  to  the  first  and  second,  and  the 
second  company,  to  the  third  and  fourth  fronts 
of  the  square. 

1197.  When  the  platoons  or  sections  placed  in 
the  interior  of  a  square  or  column,  are  to  be  de- 
ployed, they  will  be  marched  out  by  the  flank, 
and  then,  if  required  to  cover  the  front,  they  will 
be  moved  forward,  as  prescribed  No.  161,  and 
following  instructions  for  skirmishers ;  and  as 
soon  as  they  have  unmasked  the  column  or  square, 
they  will  be  deployed.  If  it  be  required  to  cover 
the  flanks  of  the  column,  or  other  fronts  of  the 
square,  the  platoons,  as  soon  as  disengaged,  will 
be  brought  into  line,  facing  outward,  and  then 
deployed,  either  forv.ard,  or  by  the  flanks. 

1188.  If  the  battalion  on  which  the  skirmishers, 
otlier  than  the  companies  of  skirmishers,  are  ral- 
lied, be  in  column,  ready  to  form  square,  they 
will  take  their  proper  places  in  the  column,  but 
if  circumstances  should  prevent  their  so  doing, 
they  will,  when  the  square  is  formed,  act  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  skirmishers  No.  1196. 
0-1199.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cover  by 
skirmishers  the  movements  of  a  column  prepar- 
ing to  form  square,  he  will  detach  for  this  pur- 
pose one  or  two  platoons  of  the  companies  of 
skirmishers. 


hl.-l  Scliool   of   tlie    Battalion.        Pi.Sd. 


^'A. 


'Hj  H  [y 


r,\i.i.    ;^ 


':'  ''■:'  -!f  aiMiHliHililimtlt 

wmm 

'g."     -      '      '      '           z.      .     , 

°-;,:i- 

"^icj.  ? 

«|: 

m 

Colu/nn    again.'il:  cavalry. 
JVo.1201. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PABT    Y.       269 

1290.  When  the  colonel  shall  be  ready  to  form 
square,  he  will,  in  order  to  recall  the  skirmishers, 
cause  to  the  color  to  be  sounded.  The  skirmish- 
ers in  this  case  will  move  in  quick,  or  double 
quick  time. 

Column  against  cavalry. 

1201.  When  a  column  closed  in  mass  has  to  form 
square,  it  will  begin  by  taking  company  distance, 
but  if  so  suddenly  threatened  by  cavalry  as  not 
to  allow  time  for  this  disposition,  it  will  be  formed 
in  the  following  manner  : 

1202.  The  colonel  will  command : 

1.   Column  against  cavalry.     2.  March. 

1203.  At  the  tirst  command,  the  chief  of  the 
leading  division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast  and 
pass  behind  the  rear  rank  ;  in  the  interior  divis- 
ions each  captain  will  promptly  designate  the 
number  of  files  necessary  to  close  the  interval 
between  his  company  and  the  one  in  front  of  it 
The  captains  of  the  division  next  to  the  one  in 
rear,  in  addition  to  closing  the  interval  in  front, 
will  also  close  up  the  interval  which  separates 
this  division  from  the  last;  the  chief  of  the 
fourth  division  will  caution  it  to  face  about,  and 
its  file  closers  will  pass  briskly  before  the  front 
rank. 

0-1204.  At  the  same  command,  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon  column  will  immediately  dispose  it 
along  the  front,  and  right  flank  of  the  column, 
as  indicated  No.  1196,  and  the  chief  of  the  sec- 
23* 


270    BcnooL  OF  the  battalion — PAET  y. 

ond  platoon  column,  will  dispose  his  column  in 
like  manner,  along  the  rear,  and  left  flank  of  the 
battalion  column. 

120l.  At  the  command  march,  the  guides  of 
each  division  will  place  themselves  rapidly  in  the 
hne  of  file-closers.  The  first  division  will  stand 
fast,  the  fourth  will  face  about,  the  outer  file  of 
each  of  these  divisions  will  then  face  outward;  in 
the  other  divisions  the  files  designated  for  closing 
the  intervals  will  form  to  the  right  and  left  into 
line,  but  in  the  division  next  to  the  rearmost  one, 
the  first  files  that  come  into  line  will  close  to  the 
right  or  left  until  they  join  the  rear  division.  The 
files  of  each  company  which  remain  in  column 
will  close  on  their  outer  files,  formed  into  line,  in 
order  to  create  a  vacant  space  in  the  middle  of 
the  column. 

1206.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  column 
againU  cavalry  will  be  formed  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  means.  At  the  command  march,  the 
first  and  fourth  divisions  will  halt,  and  the  latter 
division  will  face  about;  the  interior  divisions 
will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  above. 

1207.  The  battalion  being  no  longer  threat- 
ened by  the  cavalry,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Form  column.     2.  March. 

1208.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  in  col- 
umn will  close  to  the  left  and  right,  to  make 
room  for  those  in  line,  who  will  retake  their 
places  in  column  by  stepping  backward,  except 
those  closing  the  interval  between  the  two  rear 
divisions,  who  will  take  their  places  in  column 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAET    V.       271 

by  a  flank  movement.     The  fourth  division  will 
face  about,  the  guides  will  resume  their  places. 

1209.  At  the  command  march,  the  companies 
of  skirmishers  will  retake  their  places. 

1210.  If  the  colonel  should  be  so  pressed  as 
not  to  have  time  to  order  bayonets  to  be  fixed, 
the  meii  will  fix  them,  without  command  or  sig- 
nal, at  the  cautionary  command,  column  against 
cavalry. 

1211.  As  this  manoeuvre  is  often  used  in  war, 
and  with  decided  advantage,  the  colonel  will  fre- 
quently cause  it  to  be  executed,  in  order  to  vqu- 
der  it  familiar. 

Akticlk   XV. 
The  rally. 

1212.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle, 
the  colonel  will  sometimes  cause  the  disperse  to 
be  sounded,  at  which  signal,  the  battalion  will 
break  and  disperse. 

1213.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  rally 
the  battalion,  he  will  cause  to  the  color  to  be 
sounded,  and  at  the  same  time  place  two  mark- 
ers and  the  color-bearer  in  the  direction  he  may 
wish  to  give  the  battalion. 

1214.  Each  captain  will  rally  his  company 
about  six  paces  in  rear  of  the  place  it  is  to  occu- 
py in  line  of  battle. 

1215.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  color-compa- 
ny to  be  promptly  established  against^  the  mark- 
ers, and  each  company,  by  the  command  of  ita 
captain,  will  be  aligned  on  the  color-company 


272      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PABT    V. 

according  to  the  principles  heretofore  pre- 
scribed. 

1216.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  rally  the 
battalion  in  column,  he  will  cause  the  assembly 
to  be  sounded,  and  place  two  markers  before  the 
position  to  be  occupied  by  the  lirst  company, 
the  captain  of  this  company  will  rally  his  com- 
pany in  rear  of  the  two  markers,  and  each  of  the 
other  captains  will  rally  his  company  at  platoon 
distance,  behind  the  one  which  should  precede 
it  in  the  order  in  column. 

0-1217.  lu  rallying,  either  in  line  or  column,  at 
the  signal,  the  companies  of  skirmishers  will  at 
once  take  their  proper  positions. 


Aeticle  XVI. 
Bules  for  manoeuvring  by  the  rear  rank. 

1218.  It  may  often  be  necessary  to  cause  a  bat- 
talion to  manoeuvre  by  the  rear  rank :  when  the 
case  presents  itseht',  the  following  rules  will  be 
observed : 

1219.  The  battalion  being  by  the  front  rank, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  manoeuvre  by  tho 
rear  rank,  he  Avill  command : 

1.  Face  ly  the  rear  rank.     2.  Battalion. 
3.  About — Face. 

1220.  If  the  battalion  be  deployed,  this  move- 
ment will  be  executed  as  has  been  indicated  for 
the  fire  by  the  rear  rank. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PAET  V.   2Y3 

0-1221.  In  this  case,  the  companies  of  skirmish- 
ers will  execute  what  is  prescribed  No.  61. 

1222.  If  the  battalion  be  in  column  bj  com- 
pany, or  by  platoon,  right  or  left  in  front,  the 
chiefs  of  subdivision,  to  take  their  new  places  in 
column,  will  each  pass  by  the  left  flank  of  his 
subdivision,  and  the  file  closers  by  the  right 
flank ;  the  guides  will  place  themselves  in  the 
rear  rank. 

1223.  If  the  column  be  formed  by  division, 
the  chiefs  of  division  will  each  pass  by  the  inter- 
val in  the  centre  of  his  division,  and  the  file 
closers  by  the  outer  flanks  of  their  respective 
companies;  the  junior  captain  in  each  division 
will  step  into  the  rear  rank,  and  be  covered  in 
the  front  rank  by  the  covering  sergeant  of  the 
left  company. 

1224.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  him- 
self abreast  with  the  leading  subdivision,  and 
the  senior  major  abreast  with  the  rearmost  one. 
0-1225.  The  platoon  columns,  at  the  first  com- 
mand, will  be  marched  around  the  flanks  of  the 
battalion  column,  and  take  position,  such  that 
the  first  platoon  column  shall  occupy  with  refer- 
ence to  the  battalion  column,  the  same  position 
that  the  second  did  before  the  column  faced ;  and 
in  a  similar  manner,  the  second  a  position  like 
that  the  first  had  before  the  facing  of  the  bat- 
talion. 

1226.  The  battalion  being  faced  by  the  rear 
rank,  companies,  divisions,  and  wings,  will  pre- 
serve their  prior  denominations  respectively. 

1227.  The  manoeuvres  by  the  rear  rank  wiU  be 
executed  by  the  same  commands  and  on  the  same 


274       SCnoOL    of    the    BATTALIOir — PAST    V. 

principles  as  if  the  battalion  faced  by  the  front 
rank,  but  in  such  manner  that  when  the  bat- 
talion shall  be  brought  to  its  proper  front,  all 
the  subdivisions  may  find  themselves  in  their 
regular  order  from  right  to  left. 

1228.  According  to  this  principle,  when  a  col- 
umn faced  by  the  rear  rank  is  deployed,  the  sub- 
divisions which,  in  line  of  battle  by  the  front 
rank,  ought  to  tind  themselves  on  the  right  of 
the  subdivision  on  which  the  deployment  is 
made,  will  face  to  the  left;  and  those  which 
ought  to  be  placed  on  its  left,  will  face  to  the 
right. 

1229.  When  a  battalion  in  line  of  battle,  faced 
by  the  rear  rank,  is  to  be  ployed  into  column, 
the  colonel  vrill  announce,  in  the  commands, 
left  or  I'ight  in  fronts  according  as  it  may  be  in- 
tended that  the  first  or  last  subdivision  shall  be 
at  the  head  of  the  column,  because  the  first  sub- 
division is  on  the  left,  and  the  last  on  the  right 
of  the  battalion  faced  by  the  rear  rank.  The 
column  by  the  rear  rank  will  take  the  guide  to 
the  right,  if  the  first  subdivision  be  in  front,  and 
to  the  left  in  the  reverse  case. 

1230.  A  column  faced  by  the  rear  rank  will 
be  brought  to  its  proper  front  by  the  means 
heretofore  prescribed.  If  the  column  be  formed 
by  company,  or  by  platoon,  the  chiefs  of  subdi- 
vision, in  order  to  take  their  new  places  in  col- 
umn, will  pass  by  the  left  of  subdivisions,  now 
right,  and  the  file  closers  by  the  right,  now  left. 

EXD    OF    SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


VOL.   II. 


TITLE  V. 


SCHOOL  OF  THK   BATTALION. 

PACK. 

Formation  of  the  battalion  (No.  1) 5 

Com[>osition  and  march  of  oofbr  escort  (No.  5) (j 

Honurs  paid  t<>  colors  (No.  12) 7 

Escort  of  col.,r  off  the  Held  (No.  14) 7 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  School  of  the  Biittalion 

(No.  19) 9 

PART  FIRST. 

Ap.tk-i.e      I. — To  open  and  close  ranks  (No.  27) 10 

Artk  i.E     II. — Manual  of  arms  (No.  85) 12 

Akticle  III. — Loadings  at  will  and  firings  (No.  37) 12 

PART  SECOND. 

Aeticle  I. — To  break  by  company  to  the  right  (No.  7S). 
To  break  by  divi.'^iou  (N^o.  87).  To  recall  skirmishers  (No. 
?5).  To  break  the  column  forward  without  haltintr  it 
(No.  97).  To  break  the  battalion  marching  in  line  of  bat- 
tle (No.  10:3)   19 

Article  II. — To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left  of 
companii'S  (No.  lOS).  Battalion  marching  to  break  to  the 
rear  ^^No.  1  Is).  To  advance  or  retire  by  the  right  of  com- 
panies (No.  135).  Battalion  marching  in  linc^to  advance 
or  retire  by  right  of  comjianies  (No.  145).  Advancing  or 
retiring  by  the  right  or  left  of  companies  to  lona  line  (No. 
15<i).  Remarks  on  deployment  of  skirmishers  in  advanc- 
ing or  retinn"  by  right  or  left  of  companies  (No.  15C).. . .     2T 

Aktiolk  III. — To  ploy  battalion  into  close  column  on  the 
first  division  (No.  159).    To  ploy  the  battalion  into  close 


276  CONTENTS. 

oolumn  on  the  fourth  division  (No.  190).  _To  ploy  the 

batta" 


battalion  on  an  interior  division  (No.  lyy).    The  battalion 
being  in  march  to  ploy  it  on  tirst  division  (No.  200). 
marks  on  ploying  the  battalion  into  column  (No.  213). 


PART  TIIIKi). 

Aeticle  I. — To  march  in  column  at  full  distance  ^No.  216). 
Column  being  in  inarch  to  execute  the  about  (No.  225). 
Manner  of  prolonging  a  line  of  battle  by  markers  (No. 
22S).     Remarks  on  the  march  in  column  (No.  232).   . .     .     50 

Article  11. — Column  in  route  (No.  239).  General  remarks 
on  the  column  in  rout<3  (No.  260) 57 

Article  111. — To  change  direction  in  column  at  full  dis- 
tance (No.  273) 64 

Article  IV.— To  halt  the  column  (No.  2S6) 68 

Article  V. — To  close  the  column  to  half  distance  or  in 
mass  on  the  leading  company  (No.  294).  To  close  the  col- 
umn on  the  eighth  or  rearmost  company  (No.  316).  Col- 
umn being  in  march,  to  close  on  the  eighth  company 
(No.  325).     Remarks  (No.  332) 69 

Article  VI. — To  march  in  column  at  half  distance  or  closed 
in  mass  (No.  335).    Remarks  (No.  842) 77 

Article  VII. — To  change  direction  in  column  at  half  dis- 
tance (No.  343) .' 78 

Article  VIII. — To  change  direction  in  column  closed  in 
mass,  first,  marching  (No.  345) ;  second,  from  a  halt  (No. 
365) 79 

A-Rticle  IX.— Being  in  column  at  half  distance,  or  closed 
in  mass,  to  take  distances  by  the  head  of  the  column  ^No. 
336).  To  take  distances  on  the  rear  of  the  column  (No. 
397).  To  take  distances  on  the  head  of  the  column  (No. 
403) 87 

Article  X. — To  countermarch  a  column  at  full  or  half  dis- 
tance (No.  422).  To  countermarch  a  column  closed  in 
mass  (No.  424) 95 

Article  XL— Being  in  column  by  company  closed  in 
mass,  tof.rm  divisions  (No.  437).  '  Cohinm  at  a  halt,  at 
full  or  h.ilf  distance,  to  form  divisions  (No.  453).  Column 
marching  nt  full  or  half  distance  to  form  divisions  (No. 
456).  Remarks  on  the  f(jrmation  of  divisions  from  a  halt 
(No.  457) 99 

PART  FOURTH. 

Article  I. — Manner  of  determining  the  line  of  battle 
(No.  463) 104 


CONTENTS.  277 

PAOB. 

ARTICLE  IL — Colnmn  at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  to  the 
left  into  line  of  battle  (No.  464).  Same  movement  in  col- 
umn in  march  (No.  47G).  Same  movement,  and  to  move 
the  line  forward  (No.  47S).  By  inversion  to  theriirhtor 
left  into  line  of  battle  (No.  484).  Successive  formations 
(No.  4aO) lOy 

Article  111.— Column  at  half  distance,  to  the  left  or  right 
into  line  of  battle  (No.  492).  By  the  rear  of  column,  to 
the  left  or  right  into  line  (No.  493).  Column  at  half  dis- 
tance on  the  right  or  left  into  lino  of  battle  (No.  MO). — 
Remarks  on  the  formation  on  the  right  or  left  into  line 
(No.  6'i3).  Column  at  half  distance  forward  into  line  of 
battle  (No.  530).  Column  at  half  distance,  faced  to  the 
rear  into  line  of  battle  (No.  531) 118 

Article  IV.— Deployment  of  columns  closed  in  mass  (No. 
555).  Deployment  of  column  on  first  division  (No.  55S). 
To  deploy  while  marching  on  first  division  (No.  oSO).  To 
deploy  from  a  halt  on  rearmost  divisi<in  (No.  591).  To 
deploy  while  in  march  on  rearmost  division  (No.  610\ 
To  deploy  the  column  on  an  interior  division  (No  621). 
To  deploy  while  in  march  on  an  interior  division  (No. 
626).  Remarks  on  deployments  of  columns  closed  in 
mass  (No.  632).     Remarks  on  inversions  (No.  639) 128 


PART  FIFTH. 

Article  I.— To  advance  in  line  of  battle  (No.  64S).  Re- 
marks on  the  advance  in  line  of  battle  (No.  679) 148 

Article  II. — Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle  (No.  6SG). — 
Remarks  on  the  oblique  march  (No.  696.) 157 

Article  III. — To  halt  the  battalion  marching  inline  of  bat- 
tle, and  to  align  it  (No.  699) 159 

Article  IV. — Change  of  direction  in  marching  in  line  of 
battle  (No.  717) 163 

Article    V. — To  march  in  retreat  in  line  of  battle  (No.  730).  IGG 

Article  VI. — To  halt  the  battalion  marching  in  retreat  and 
to  face  it  to  the  front  (No.  744) T 168 

Article  VII.— Change  of  direction  in  marching  in  retreat 
(No.  751) ITO 

Article  VIII. — Passage  of  obstacles  advancing  and  retreat- 
inz  (No.  753).  Remarks  on  the  disposition  of  the  com- 
panies of  skirmishers,  and  of  the  battalion  companies 
when  deployed  as  such  (No.  7S5) 170 

Article  IX.— To  pass  a  defile  in  retreat  by  the  right  or  left 
flank  (No.  7SS).  Remarks  on  the  disposition  of  the  com- 
panies of  skirmishers  in  passing  a  defile  (No.  802) 178 

Article   X.— To  march  by  the  flank  (No.  805) 1S2 

VOL.  II. — 24 


278  OONTKITTS. 

PAOI. 

Aeticle  XL— To  form  the  battalion  on  the  right  or  left  by 
file  into  line  of  battle  (Xo.  S20)    Remarks  (No.  82S) 1S5 

Aeticle  XII. — Change  of  front  perpendicularly  forward 
^Xo.  S30).  !?ame  EQOvement,  the  battalion  being  in  march 
(N'o.  b4^i).  Chance  of  front  p<rpendicularly  to  the  rear 
(Xo.  So>).     Remarks  on  changes  of  front  (No.  871) 1ST 

Akticle  XIII.— To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column  doul)le<l 
on  the  centre  (No.  874).  To  form  double  column  march- 
inir  (^N'o.  8S9).  Remarks  on  disposition  of  companies  of 
skirmishers  in  the  ployments  of  double  column  (No.  y01». 
To  ploy  the  battalion  into  division  columns  (No.  903). 
To  form  division  cloumns  marching  (No.  914).  To  close 
division  columns  In  mass  and  to  take  distances  (No.  921). 
To  advance  in  a  line  of  division  columns  (No.  922).  Pas- 
sage of  t»bstacle8  advancing  or  retiring  in  a  line  of  divis- 
ion columns  (No.  924).  To  form  double  column  from  line 
of  division  coiuuins  (No.  928).  To  form  line  of  division  col- 
umns from  (limbic  column  (No.  931).  Same  movement 
while  marching  (No.  941).  Deploymentof  double  column 
faced  to  the  front  (No.  946).  Same  movement  while 
marching  (No.  953).  To  form  the  double  c^olumn  into 
line  of  battle  faced  to  the  right  or  left  (No.  9&?).  Same 
movement  while  marching  (No.  965).  Same,  and  to  move 
the  battalion  forward  (Xo.  970).  Remarks  on  the  deploy- 
ment of  the  double  «olumn  (No.  976).  To  deploy  a  line 
of  division  columns  (No.  979).  Remarks  on  the  line  of 
division  columns  (No.  981).  To  form  double  column  from 
simple  column  by  company  (No.  982) 195 

AiiTii  LE  XIV. — Column  by  company  at  half  distance,  right 
in  fmnt,  at  a  halt  to  forni  square  (N'o.  999).  Same  move- 
ment while  iH  march  (No.  1019).  If  the  column  be  at 
full  instead  of  Jialf  distance  (No.  1029).  If  the  column 
be  bv  division,  double  or  eimple,  and  in  mass,  to  form 
square  (No.  1039).  If  this  column  be  in  march  (No.  104^3). 
Battalion  being  in  square,  to  advance  less  than  thirty 
paces  (No.  1049).  To  halt  the  Square  (No.  1056).  The 
battalion  being  in  square  to  form  column  to  advance  a 
greater  distance  than  thirty  paces  (No.  1060).  To  march 
the  square  in  retreat  a  greater  distance  than  thirty  paces 
(No.  1070).  To  reduce  the  square  (Xo.  10S6).  Remarks 
on  the  rallying  of  skirmishers  (No.  10?9).  To  form  square 
from  line  of  battle  (No.  1090).  To  ploy  the  battalion  into 
column  upon  flank  division  to  form  square  (No.  1093). 
Same  movement  when  marching  (No  1096).  To  ploy  the 
battalion  into  double  column  to  form  sqtiare  (No.  11(>0). 
Same  movement  when  marching  (.N'o.  1103).  To  form 
8qu:u-e  forward  on  the  centre  companies  (No.  1106).  Same 
movement  when  marching  (No.  1123).    To  form  square 


C0XTEXT3.  279 

PAGE 

In  four  ranks  from  column  by  company  at  half  or  fnll 
distance  {So.  1127).  Square  iformed  in  four  ranks  re- 
duced, to  form  battalion  in  two  ranks  (No.  1183).  The 
column  in  march,  \vith  divisions  in  four  ranks,  tore-form 
in  tworanks(No.  li;3S).  The  battalion  in  line  to  form 
square  in  four  ranks,  or  flank  division  (No.  1141).  Same 
movement,  battalion  in  march  (No.  1147).  To  form 
perpendicular  square  in  four  ranks  by  double  column 
(No.  1151).  Same  movement,  battalion  in  march  (No. 
1156).  To  form  square  in  four  ranks  in  1  me  by  forward 
on  the  centre  (No.  11(}<J)-  The  same  movement,  the  bat- 
talion Iteins:  in  march  (No.  llfrS).  To  form  oblique  square 
from  line  of  battle  (No.  1167).  To  form  oblique  square 
from  battalion  in  column  (No.  1174).  Eemarks  on  the 
formation  of  squares  and  the  rallying  of  skirmishers  (No. 
llyj).  Column  against  cavalry  (No.  1201).  To  form  col- 
umn (No.  1207) 229 

Aetitlk    XV.— The  rally  (No.  1212.)  271 

Articlk  XVL— Eules  for  manoeuvring  by  the  rear  rank 
(No.  1218) 272 


D.  VAN  NOSTRAND'S 

MILITARY  PUBLICATIONS. 


Scott's   Military  Dictionary.     Comprising 

Technical  Definitions;  Information  on  Eaising  and  Keep- 
ing Troops;  Actual  Service,  inchuling  makeshifts  and  im- 
proved materiel,  and  Law,  Government,  Regulation,  and 
Administration  relating  to  Land  Forces,  By  Colonel  IT.  L. 
Scott,  Inspector-General  U.  S,  A.    1  vol.,  largo  octavo,  fully 

illustrated.    Half  Morocco $5  00 

"  It  is  a  complete  Encyclopedia  of  Military  Science.''— Phila- 
delphia Etening  Bulletin. 

"  Wo  cannot  speak  too  much  in  legitimate  praise  of  this  work." 
—Katioiuil  Intelligencer. 

"■  The  work  is  more  properly  a  Military  Encyclopedia,  and  is 
profusely  illustrated  with  engravings.  It  appears  to  contain  every 
thing  that  can  be  wanted  in  the  shape  of  information  by  officers 
of  all  gmdfi.'"— Philadelphia  North  American. 

Kelton's  Bayonet  Exercise.  A  New  Man- 
ual of  the  Bayonet,  for  the  Army  and  Militia  of  the  United 
States.    By  Colonel  J.  C.  Kelton,  U.  S.  Army.    With  thirty 

beaatifully-eiigraTed  plates,    Ked  cloth $1  75 

This  Manual  was  prepared  for  the  use  of  the  Corps  of  Cadets, 

and  has  been  introduced  at  the  Military  Academy  with  satisfec- 

1 


torj  resnlts.  It  is  simply  the  theory  of  the  attack  and  defence  of 
the  Bword  applied  to  the  bayonet,  on  the  authority  of  men  skilled 
In  the  use  of  arras. 

Wilcox's  Rifles  and  Rifle  Practice.— An 

Elemeoitary  Treatise  on  the  Theory  of  Eifle  Firing;  explain- 
ing the  causes  of  inaccuracy  of  flre,  and  the  manner  of  cor- 
recting it ;  with  descriptions  of  the  Infantry  Kifles  of  Europe 
and  the  United  States,  their  Balls  and  Cartridges.  By  Capt. 
C.  M;  Wilcox,  IT.  S.  A.     NeAr  edition,  with  engravings  and 

cuts.    Green  cloth $175 

**  This  book  is  quite  original  in  its  character.  That  character  is 
completeness.  It  renders  a  study  of  most  of  the  works  on  the 
rifla  that  have  been  published  quite  unnecessary.  "Wo  cordially 
recommend  the  book." — United  Service  Gagette,  LoTidon, 

Army   Officer's   Pocket  Companion.— 

Principally  designed  for  StafiF  Officers  in  the  Field.  Partly 
translated  from  the  French  of  M.  db  Eouvre,  Lieut-Colonel 
of  the  French  Staff  Corps, with  Additions  from  Standard  Amer- 
ican, French,  and  English  Authorities.  By  Wm.  P.  Ceaig- 
uiLL,  First-Lieutenant  U.  S.  Corps  of  Engineers,  Assist.  Prof 
of  Engineering  at  the  U.  S.  Military  Academy,  West  Point. 

1  vol.  ISmo.    Full  roan $1  50 

''  I  have  carefully  examined  Captain  Craighill's  Pocket  Com- 
panion. I  find  it  one  of  the  very  best  works  of  the  kind  I  have 
ever  seen.  Any  army  or  volunteer  officer  who  will  make  himself 
acquainted  with  the  contents  of  this  little  book,  will  seldom  be 
ignorant  of  his  duties  in  camp  or  field." 

H.  W.  Hallkck,  Major- General  U.  &  A. 

3 


Roberts'  Hand-Book  of  Artillery,  for  the 

Bervico  of  tho  United  States  Army  and  Militix    New  and 
revised  edition.     By  Major  Joseph  Eobekts,  U.  S,  A.    1  vol. 

ISmo.     Cloth  flexible $0  T5 

"  A  complete  catechism  of  gun  practice,  covering  the  whole 
ground  of  this  branch  of  military  science,  and  adapted  to  militia 
and  volunteer  drill,  as  well  as  to  the  regular  army.  It  has  tho 
merit  of  precise  detail,  even  to  the  technical  names  of  all  parts  of  a 
gun,  and  how  the  smallest  operations  connected  with  its  use  can 
bo  best  performed.  It  has  evidently  been  prepared  with  great 
care,  and  with  strict  scientific  accuracy.  By  the  recommendation 
of  a  committee  appointed  by  tho  commanding  ofi&cer  of  tho  Artil- 
lery School  at  Fort  Monroe,  Ya.,  it  has  been  substituted  for 
•Burns''  Questions  and  xVnswers,'  an  English  work  which  has 
heretofore  been  the  text-book  of  instruction  in  this  country." — 
Xew  York  Century. 

The  Political  and  Military  History  of 
the  Campaign  of  Waterloo.— Translated 

from  the  French  of  General  Bajion  de  Jomini.     By  Capt. 
S.  V.  Bexet,  U.  S.  Ordnance.    1    vol.  12mo,   cloth,  second 

edition $0  75 

"  Baron  Jomini  has  tho  reputation  of  being  one  of  the  greatest 
military  historians  and  critics  of  the  century.  His  merits  have 
been  recognized  by  the  highest  military  authorities  in  Europe,  and 
were  rewarded  in  a  conspicuous  manner  by  the  greatest  military 
power  in  Christendom,  He  learned  the  art  of  war  in  Lue  school 
of  experience,  the  best  and  only  finishing  school  of  the  soldier- 
He  served  with  distinction  in  nearly  all  the  campaigns  of 
ITapoleon,  and  it  was  mainly  from  the  gigantic  military  operations 


of  this  matchless  master  of  the  art  that  he  was  enabled  to  di»- 
coTcr  its  true  principles,  and  to  ascertain  tho  best  meana  of  their 
application  in  tho  infinity  of  combinations  which  actual  war  pre- 
sents. Jomini  criticises  the  details  of  Waterloo  with  great  science, 
and  yet  in  a  manner  that  interests  tho  general  reader  as  Mell  as 
the  professional." — Xew  York  World. 

School  of  the  G-Uides.  Designed  for  the  use 
of  the  Militia  of  tho  United  States.     Flexible  cloth $0  5« 

"This  neat  hand-book  of  the  elementary  movements  on  which 
the  art  of  the  tactician  is  based,  reflects  great  credit  on  Colonel 
I^  Gal,  whoso  reputation  is  deservedly  ifigh  among  military  mea 
No  soldier  should  be  without  tho  '  School  of  the  Guides.''" — New 
York  Daily  Neics. 

"  The  work  is  carefully  got  up,  and  is  illustrated  by  numeroHs 
figures,  which  make  the  positions  of  the  guides  plain  to  the 
commonest  understanding.  Those  of  our  sergeants  who  wish  to 
be  '  posted '  in  their  duties  should  procure  a  copy." — Sunday 
Mercury,  Philadelphia. 

Manual  of  Heavy  Artillery.    For  the  Use 

of  Volunteers.     1  voL  12mo.     Red  cloth $0  75 

"  Should  be  In  the  hands  of  every  artillerist"— 3".  Y.  Jlluttrat-e/l 
Jfetcg. 

"This  is  a  concise  and  well-prepared  manual,  adapted  to  the 
wants  of  volunteers.  The  instruction,  which  is  of  an  important 
nature,  is  presented  in  a  simple  and  clear  style,  such  as  will  be 
easily  understood.  Tho  volume  is  also  illustrated  with  explana- 
tory cuts  and  drawings.  It  is  a  work  of  practical  value,  and  one 
needed  at  the  present  time  in  the  service." — Boston  Commercial 
Bulletin. 

4 


"An  indispensablo  manual  for  all  who  wish  easily  and  accu- 
rately to  learn  tho  school  of  the  artillerist"— -A''.  Y.  Comnieroial 
Adt»rtU»r. 

Austrian  Infantry  Tactics.    Evolutions  of 

the  Line  as  practised  by  tho  Austrian  Infantry,  and  adopted 
In  1S:>3.  Translated  by  Captain  C.  M.  Wilcox,  Seventh  Kegi- 
ment  U.  8.  Infantry.  1  vol.  12mo.  Threa  largo  plates. 
Cloth 11  00 

*  The  movements  of  armies  engaged  in  battle  have  often  been 
•ompared  to  those  of  the  chess-board,  and  we  cannot  doubt  that 
thoTo  are  certain  principles  of  tactics  in  actual  war,  as  in  that 
ganie,  which  may  determine  tho  result  independently,  in  a  great 
measure,  of  the  personal  strength  and  courage  of  the  men  engaged. 
Tho  diflFerence  between  these  principles  as  applied  in  the  Amer- 
ican army  and  in  tho  Austrian,  is  so  wide  as  to  havo  suggested 
the  translation  of  tho  work  before  us,  which  contains  the  whole 
result  of  the  famous  Field-Marshal  Eadetzky'a  experience  for 
twenty-five  years,  while  in  supreme  command  in  Italy." — Kew 
York  Century. 

Rh3niied  Tactics,  by  "  Gov."    i  vol  ismo. 

Taper.     With  portraits $0  25 

*  Our  author  deserves  great  credit  for  the  ingenuity  he  has  dis- 
played in  putting  into  verso  a  manual  which  would  at  first  glanco 
•eem  to  defy  the  most  persistent  efforts  of  the  rhymer.  The 
book  contains  a  number  of  illustrations  representing  some  of  the 
more  difficult  positions,  in  tho  figures  of  which  portraits  of 
Roveral  prominent  officers  of  the  New  York  Volimteers  may  bo 
recognized."— ^'e'W  York  Times. 

5 


Maxims  and  Instnictions  on  the  Art 

of  "War.  Maxims,  Advice,  and  Instructions  on 
the  Art  of  "War;  or,  a  Practical  Military  Guide  for  the  use 
of  Soldiers  of  all  Amis  and  of  all  Countries.  Translated  from 
the  French  by  Captain  Lendy,  Director  of  the  Practical 
Military  College,  late  of  the  French  Staff,  etc.,  etc.    1  vol. 

18mo.     CToth $0  T5 

"A  book  of  maxims,  that  is  not  as  dry  as  a  cask  of  '  remainder 
biscuit,"  is  a  novelty  in  literature.  The  little  volume  before  nt 
is  aa  exci-ption  to  the  general  rule.  It  presents  the  suggestion 
of  common  sense  in  military  affairs,  with  a  certain  brilliancy 
and  i>oint.  One  may  read  it  purely  for  entertainment,  and  not  be 
disappointed.  At  the  same  time,  it  is  full  of  practical  instruc- 
tions of  groat  value.  When  found  in  the  pocket  of  an  officer  of 
volunteers,  it  will  be  the  right  book  in  the  right  place.''— A'".  Y. 
Tribune. 

A   System  of  Target  Practice.— For  tho 

use  of  Troops  when  armed  with  the  Musket,  Eille-Musket, 
Eifle,  or  Carbine,  prepared  principally  from  the  French,  bf 
Gapt  Hkxet  Hetu,  Tenth  Infantry    U.  S.  A. 

"Wak  Depaetmext,  I 

"TVasuixgtox,   March  1st,   3S5S.  > 
"  The  System  of  Target  Practice,  prepared  under  direction  of 
the  War    Department  by  Captain  Henry  Heth,  10th  Infantry, 
having  been  approved,  is  adopted  for  the  instruction  of  troops 
when  armed  with  the  musket,  rifle-musket,  rifle,  or  carWne. 
"Joux  B.  Floyd,  Secretary  of  War."" 


Any  of  the  Books  on  tMs  list  will  be  sent  by  mail, 

post  paid,  on  receipt  of  the  price  named. 

6 


University  of  California  Library 
Los  Angeles 

This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


NON-lftNtWABL 


lU- 


-r-.!r{)G'T,2 

DUE2WKSFRQM 


,Lo  .  lD-URI. 
AY  0  6 1997 


Tc6 

5  1995 

OATE  RECEIVED 


CU^ 


1  / 


BSITY  Of  c-i^--* 
r/lS  ANGELBB 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


UD 
160 
C26i 
V.2 


